JP7015548B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

When a lottery for a jackpot game that is advantageous to a player is performed when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the gaming machine changes a decorative symbol on a display means and displays a determination result (for example, a patent). See Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-246019

By the way, in a gaming machine, an effect may be executed while displaying a decorative pattern on a predetermined display means.

An object of the present invention is to improve the interest in a production using a decorative pattern.

The present invention that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) determines whether or not to perform a special game based on the acquisition means (for example, the random number acquisition unit 231) that acquires the determination information when the start condition is satisfied and the determination information. When the determination means (for example, a special symbol determination unit 234), the storage means which can store the determination information as a hold storage (for example, RAM203), and the effect symbol are displayed in a variable manner to notify the result of the determination. The effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 300) for displaying a plurality of the effect symbols in a visually recognizable manner is provided, and the effect symbols are in the same gaming state (for example, a low-probability time-saving non-game state). As a display mode displayed in, the first has an identification character (for example, a numerical element 411) and a decorative portion having a decorative property corresponding to the identification character (for example, a character element 413) when the variable display is started. A display mode (for example, the decorative symbol 41 in FIG. 58 (1)) and a second display mode mainly composed of the identification character when the variable display is started (for example, the decorative symbol 41 in FIG. 62-1 (1)). ), And the effect control means displays a variable effect according to the result of the determination and a number of icons (for example, the hold icon in FIG. 109 (b)) according to the number of hold storages. When the second display mode is used, a plurality of sets of the plurality of effect symbols (for example, the first set decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set decorative symbols 41D of FIG. 61 (1)) can be displayed. It is possible to display, and when the reach effect is not executed in any of the plurality of sets, it is possible to make the timing of aligning the plurality of the effect symbols in a visible manner in each of the plurality of sets. The time for displaying the plurality of the effect symbols in a visually recognizable manner without re-variation differs between the case where the second display mode is used and the case where the first display mode is used. When the icon is increased and displayed, a predetermined notification sound (for example, the generation notification sound of FIG. 109 (b)) can be output, and the icon is increased and displayed by one during the customer waiting state in which the variation effect is not executed. In this case, the output period of the predetermined notification sound (for example, the period of T1 to T3 of FIG. 108) is longer than the increase display period of the icon (for example, the period of T1 to T2 in FIG. 108). It is a feature.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned reference numerals in this column are exemplified in the description of the present invention, and the above-mentioned reference numerals do not reduce the present invention.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest in the production using the decorative pattern.

It is a schematic front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. (A) is an enlarged view showing an example of a display arranged at the lower left of the gaming board, and (b) is a partial plan view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the control unit of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the image / acoustic control unit and the lamp control unit of this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure of the game control part of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the operation of the basic processing by a game control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the operation of the process at the time of power-off by a game control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main control process of a game control part. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the start port switch processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a gate switch process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a special symbol processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the stopped processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the customer waiting setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of ordinary symbol processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the big prize opening processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the game state setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the electric tulip processing. It is a figure which shows the composition example of the random number used in this embodiment, (a) is a figure which shows the composition example of a jackpot random number, (b) is a figure which shows the composition example of a jackpot symbol random number, (c). ) Is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reach random number, and (d) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a hit random number. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the variation pattern and the table used in the variation pattern selection process. It is a block diagram explaining the configuration example of the RAM of the game control unit, (a) is a block diagram which shows the structure of a storage area, (b) is a block diagram which shows each structure of the storage part shown in (a). Is. It is a block diagram explaining the structure example of the RAM of the effect control part, (a) is a block diagram which shows the structure of the hold storage area, (b) is a block which shows each structure of the storage part shown in (a). It is a figure. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the pre-determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the operation of an effect control part, (a) is a figure which shows the main process, (b) is a figure which shows interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a command reception process. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pre-determination effect selection process and the effect selection process of FIG. 26. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the jackpot effect selection process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the ending effect selection process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the customer waiting command reception process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the effect button processing. It is a variable effect pattern table for a big hit in a low probability time saving non-game state. A variable effect pattern table for small hits and misses in a low-probability time-saving non-game state is shown. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which showed the modification of the character symbol enlarged display effect. It is a figure which showed the modification of the reach time drawing production. It is a figure which showed the modification of the reach time drawing production. It is a figure which showed the modification of the aspect which the decorative design with high decorativeness is cut off from the display area of an image display part, and is displayed. It is a figure which showed the modification of the display mode of 4th symbol. It is a figure which showed the modification of the variation effect example of A mode as the effect mode in a low probability time saving no game state. In the second embodiment, it is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of the gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole game machine. It is a figure which shows the main processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st start port detection switch input process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the type of the command transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is a figure which shows the type of the command transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is a figure which shows the main processing in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the icon change effect processing in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows the icon change effect determination process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the icon final display mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the change scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows the icon display mode update process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the change pattern determination table for hold icon. It is a figure which shows an example of the one-step change pattern determination table for the icon. It is a figure which shows an example of the two-step change pattern determination table for the icon. (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the holding icon display mode and the change effect occurrence timing, and (b) is a diagram showing the relationship 1 between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing. Yes, (c) is a diagram showing the relationship 2 between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing, and (d) shows the relationship between the icon display mode and the notification sound when the icon is generated (change). It is a figure which shows. It is a figure which shows the main processing in the integrated control unit. It is a figure which shows the command reception interrupt processing in a general control unit. It is a figure which shows the V blank interrupt processing in a general control unit. It is a timing chart 1 of the change effect at the time of winning. It is a timing chart 2 of the change effect at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the production example of the change effect at the time of a prize. It is the timing chart 1 of the normal change pattern 01. It is the timing chart 2 of the normal change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the production example of a normal change pattern 01. It is the timing chart 1 of the character action change pattern 01. It is a timing chart 2 of the character action change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the production example of the character action change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 102. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 1 of the symbol action change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 2 of the symbol action change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the effect example of the symbol action change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 106. It is a timing chart in which the fluctuation effect is started from the customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the production example which starts the fluctuation effect from the customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 109. It is a timing chart in which the number of holds increases during the fluctuation effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example which the number of hold increases during a variable effect. It is a timing chart that the number of holdings increases immediately after the decrease. It is a figure which shows the production example which increases immediately after the holding number decreases. It is a timing chart in which the number of holds increases during a specific reach production. It is a figure which shows the effect example which the number of hold increases during a specific reach effect. It is a timing chart that the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific game state. It is a figure which shows the effect example that the number of hold is increased or decreased before and after the end of a specific game state. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 118.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings.
[First Embodiment]
[Basic configuration of gaming machines]
FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of the pachinko gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment.
The pachinko gaming machine 100 as an example of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 is configured to pay out a prize ball when a gaming ball launched by a player's instruction operation wins a prize. The pachinko gaming machine 100 includes a gaming board 110 on which a gaming ball is launched, and a frame member 150 surrounding the gaming board 110. The game board 110 is detachably attached to the frame member 150.

The game board 110 has a game area 111 for playing a game with a game ball, a rail member 112 on the front surface, and a rail member 112 forming a passage through which the game ball launched from below rises toward the upper position of the game area 111. A guide member 113 for guiding the game ball is provided on the right side of the region 111.
In the present embodiment, an image display unit 114 for displaying various images for effect is arranged at a position of the game area 111 that is easily visible to the player. The image display unit 114 is provided with a display screen such as a liquid crystal display, and as the game progresses by the player, for example, a decorative symbol for notifying the player of the symbol lottery result (symbol change result) can be displayed. It displays an effect image due to the appearance of a character or an item, or an effect image using the hold display described later.
Further, on the front surface of the game board 110, a movable accessory 115 and a board lamp 116 used for various effects are provided. The movable accessory 115 operates on the game board 110 to perform various effects, and the board lamp 116 emits light to perform various effects.

In the game area 111, a game nail, a windmill, and the like (not shown) for changing the direction in which the game ball falls are arranged. Further, in the game area 111, various accessories related to winning and lottery are arranged at predetermined positions. Further, the game area 111 is provided with an discharge port 117 that discharges a game ball launched into the game area 111 that has not won a prize in the winning port to the outside of the game area 111.

In the present embodiment, as various accessories related to winning and lottery, the first starting port 121 and the second starting opening 122 where the special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) starts when the game ball wins, and the second starting port 122 when the game ball passes are normal. A starting gate (hereinafter, simply referred to as a gate) 124 at which a symbol lottery (opening / closing lottery) is started is arranged on the game board 110. In FIG. 1, gates 124 are provided on the left and right sides of the game area 111, the gate 124 on the left side is described as 124L, and the gate 124 on the right side is described as 124R. Further, the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 referred to here refer to winning openings that trigger the operation of the predetermined special symbol display. Specifically, the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 are provided with switches (first starting port switch 211 and second starting port switch 212, which will be described later) for detecting the passage of a game ball at the time of winning a prize. Has been done. Then, when the game ball wins a prize in the first start port 121 or the second start port 122, the switch detects the passage of the game ball, which triggers the operation of the special symbol display.

The second starting port 122 includes an electric tulip (opening / closing member) 123 as a normal electric accessory that a pair of tulip flower-shaped blades opens and closes by an electric solenoid and lights up. In the electric tulip 123, when the wings are closed, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 122, while when the wings are opened, the entrance of the second starting port 122 expands and the game ball moves to the second starting port 122. It is configured to be easy to enter. Then, when the electric tulip 123 wins the ordinary symbol lottery, the blades open for a specified time (for example, 0.15 seconds to 1.8 seconds) and a specified number of times (for example, 1 to 3 times) while lighting or blinking.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 has, as a gaming state, a low-probability state in which the winning probability is low and a high-probability state in which the winning probability is higher than the low-probability state, based on the winning probability of the jackpot lottery. Then, it is controlled to either a low probability state or a high probability state based on a predetermined condition.
Further, the pachinko gaming machine 100 has, as a gaming state, a state in which there is little chance of winning a prize in the second starting port 122 and a state in which there is more chance of winning a prize in the second starting port 122 than in a state without electric support. have. Then, under predetermined conditions such as, for example, triggered by the number of lottery of a big hit or a special symbol lottery, the state is controlled to be either an electric support state or an electric support state. The electric support state is, for example, one or more of shortening the normal symbol fluctuation time, extending the opening time of the electric tulip 123, and increasing the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery. It is a gaming state controlled by the combination.
Further, the pachinko gaming machine 100 has, as a gaming state, a time-saving state in which the special symbol variation time is long and a time-saving state in which the special symbol variation time is shorter than the time-saving non-state.
In this embodiment, the electric support state and the time saving state are controlled at the same time. Further, in the following description, the electric support state and the time saving state are simply referred to as the time saving state, and the electric support non-state and the time saving non-state are simply referred to as the time saving non-state.

Further, in the present embodiment, as other characters related to winning and lottery, a large winning opening 125 as a special electric character that opens according to the result of the special symbol lottery and a lottery even if a game ball wins a prize are performed. A normal winning opening 126 and a non-normal winning opening 126 are arranged on the game board 110. The large winning opening 125 is provided with a large winning opening door 125D that opens and closes the large winning opening 125. In the following description, the opening / closing state and opening / closing operation of the large winning opening door 125D may be described as the opening / closing state and opening / closing operation of the large winning opening 125 for convenience.
In the present embodiment, a display 130 for displaying the lottery result and the number of holdings is arranged at the lower left position of the game board 110.

Further, on the back surface of the game board 110, a game control board for determining the winning of a special symbol, an effect control board for comprehensively controlling the effect, an image control board for controlling the effect by images and sounds, various lamps, and the like. Various boards (not shown) such as a lamp control board that controls the effect of the movable accessory 115 are attached. Further, on the back surface of the game board 110, a switching power supply (not shown) that converts the supplied 24V AC power supply into a DC power supply and outputs it to various boards or the like is arranged.

When the player touches the handle 151 and rotates the lever 152 in the clockwise direction, the frame member 150 causes the game balls to be hit at a predetermined time interval (for example, 100 pieces per minute) with a striking force according to the operation angle. It is equipped with a launcher (not shown) that launches electrically at. Further, the frame member 150 includes a supply device (not shown) that sequentially supplies game balls to the launcher one by one at a timing linked to an operation by the player's lever 152, and a game ball supplied by the supply device to the launcher. It is equipped with a plate 153 for temporary storage. For example, a payout ball by a payout unit is paid out to the plate 153.
In the present embodiment, the plate 153 is configured by integrating the upper and lower plates, but a configuration example in which the upper plate and the lower plate are separated can also be considered. Further, a configuration example in which the handle 151 of the launcher emits light under predetermined conditions is also conceivable.

Further, the frame member 150 has a stop button 154 for temporarily stopping the launch of the game ball even when the player is in contact with the handle 151 of the launcher, and the game ball accumulated in the plate 153. It is equipped with a take-out button 155 for dropping it into a box (not shown) and taking it out.
Further, the frame member 150 includes a speaker 156 and a frame lamp 157 for notifying the gaming state and situation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 and performing various effects. The speaker 156 performs various effects by music, voice, and sound effects. The frame lamp 157 is composed of a light emitting body such as an LED, and performs various effects by light such as a pattern due to lighting / blinking and a difference in light emission color. As for the frame lamp 157, a configuration example that enables an effect of changing the irradiation direction of light can be considered.
Further, the frame member 150 includes a transparent plate (not shown) for separating the game board 110 from the player.

FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating the pachinko gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 2A is an enlarged view showing an example of a display 130 arranged at the lower left of the gaming board 110. FIG. 2B is a partial plan view of the pachinko gaming machine 100.
As shown in FIG. 2A, the display 130 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is used for winning the first special symbol display 221 and the second starting port 122, which operate in response to the winning of the first starting port 121. It includes a second special symbol display 222 that operates correspondingly, and a normal symbol display 223 that operates corresponding to the passage of the gate 124. The first special symbol display 221 displays the lottery result by displaying the special symbol in a variable manner and then stopping the display based on the winning of the first starting port 121. The second special symbol display 222 displays the lottery result by displaying the special symbol in a variable manner and then stopping the display based on the winning of the second starting port 122. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate 124, the normal symbol display 223 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner and then stops and displays the lottery result. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 are each composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is displayed depending on the lighting mode thereof. Similarly, the ordinary symbol display 223 is also composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the lottery result of the ordinary symbol lottery is displayed depending on the lighting mode thereof.

Further, the display 130 operates in response to the hold on the first special symbol display 221 and the first special symbol hold display 218 and the second special symbol display 222. 2 The special symbol hold indicator 219 and the normal symbol hold indicator 220 that operate in response to the hold on the normal symbol display 223 are provided. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol hold indicator 218, the second special symbol hold indicator 219, and the ordinary symbol hold indicator 220 are each composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the number of holds is determined by the lighting mode thereof. Is displayed.

Here, the hold will be described. If the game ball wins a prize in the first starting opening 121 or the second starting opening 122 during the variable display operation of the special symbol (while the variable display for one winning prize is being performed), the special symbol is changing. In addition, it is not possible to start the variable display operation of the special symbol based on the later winning. Therefore, the later winnings are stored up to the specified number (for example, 4), and the right to start the special symbol for the winning game ball is until the variable display operation for the first winning game ball is completed. It is put on hold.
It should be noted that the same processing as for the special symbol is performed for the normal symbol. The fact that such a hold has been made and the number of holds (unchanged number) are displayed on the first special symbol hold indicator 218, the second special symbol hold indicator 219, and the ordinary symbol hold indicator 220.

Further, the display 130 includes a state display 224 that displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100. In the present embodiment, the status display 224 is composed of a display device in which three LEDs are arranged. One of the three LEDs lights up to indicate whether or not the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a high probability state in which the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is high. The other one is to notify by lighting whether or not the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a time-saving state in which the special symbol fluctuation time is short. Still another one is to notify by lighting whether or not the player is in an advantageous state by hitting right (by changing the hitting force of the game ball).

Further, the display 130 includes a round number display 225 that displays the number of rounds when the big winning opening 125 is operated in the big hit game performed according to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. The jackpot game will be described later. The round number display 225 is composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the number of operating rounds of the big winning opening 125 in the big hit game is displayed depending on the lighting mode thereof.

The frame member 150 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 includes an input device for the player to input an effect. As shown in FIG. 2B, in the present embodiment, as an example of the input device, an effect button 161 and an effect key 162 adjacent to the effect button 161 and composed of a plurality of keys arranged in a substantially cross shape are used. Is arranged on the frame member 150. In the illustrated example, consider a case where an effect of accepting an operation of selecting one image from a plurality of images is performed. In this case, for example, by operating the effect key 162 composed of four keys arranged in a cross, the player instructs one of the plurality of images displayed on the image display unit 114, and presses the effect button 161. By operating it, it is possible to perform an effect such as selecting an instructed image. Further, as the form of the input device, in addition to the illustrated effect button 161 and effect key 162, various input forms such as a lever and a handle can be adopted depending on the content of the effect and the like.

[Control unit configuration]
Next, a control unit that performs operation control and signal processing in the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a control unit of the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment.
FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of an image / acoustic control unit and a lamp control unit according to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control unit includes a game control unit 200 as a main control means, which determines whether or not a special symbol has been won. Further, as the sub control means, an effect control unit 300 that comprehensively controls the effect and a payout control unit 330 that controls the payout of the payout ball are provided.

[Configuration / function of game control unit]
The game control unit 200 is used as a CPU 201 that performs arithmetic processing when determining the winning of a special symbol, a ROM 202 that stores programs and various data executed by the CPU 201, and a working memory of the CPU 201. RAM 203 and

The game control unit 200 controls the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 in either a high-probability state or a low-probability state, a time-saving no state, or a time-saving state. As a result, the gaming states of the pachinko gaming machine 100 are a high-probability time-saving gaming state, which is a high-probability state and a time-saving state, a low-probability time-saving gaming state, which is a low-probability state and a time-saving state, and a high-probability state and a time-saving non-state. It is one of a low-probability time-saving no-game state, a low-probability state, and a low-probability time-saving no-game state. Then, the game control unit 200 switches between the high-probability state and the low-probability state, and switches between the time-saving non-state and the time-saving state based on a predetermined condition. Further, the game control unit 200 controls such as making the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery higher in the time saving state, shortening the normal symbol fluctuation time, extending the opening time of the electric tulip 123, and the like. I do.

The game control unit 200 performs a special symbol lottery when the game ball wins a prize in the first start opening 121 or the second start opening 122. Then, a special game such as a big hit game is performed according to the determination result of the special symbol lottery. In the special game, the game control unit 200 holds a predetermined number of rounds in which the large winning opening 125, which is a special electric accessory, is maintained in an open state until a predetermined condition (for example, 29.5 seconds have elapsed or 10 game balls have been won). Control to repeat only. Then, the game control unit 200 controls the opening / closing operation interval when the big winning opening 125 opens.

Further, the game control unit 200 performs a normal symbol lottery when the game ball passes through the gate 124. Then, the operation of the electric tulip is controlled according to the determination result of the normal symbol lottery.
Further, the game control unit 200 holds the game ball when the game ball wins the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 during the special symbol change, or the game ball passes through the gate 124 during the normal symbol change. Set the hold that occurs as a result.
Further, the game control unit 200 accompanies game control such as determination results of a special symbol lottery and a normal symbol lottery, change information between a high probability state and a low probability state, change information between a time saving state and a time saving state, and hold setting information. The information is sent to the effect control unit 300 by a command described later.

Further, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 121, the second starting port 122, the large winning opening 125, and the normal winning opening 126, the game control unit 200 hits one game ball according to the place where the game ball wins. An instruction is given to the payout control unit 330 to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls. For example, if a game ball wins in the first starting port 121, three prize balls, if a game ball wins in the second starting port 122, four prize balls, and if a game ball wins in the large winning opening 125, 13 prizes. When a game ball wins a ball or a normal winning opening 126, an instruction command (command) is sent to the payout control unit 330 so that 10 prize balls are paid out respectively. Even if it is detected that the game ball has passed through the gate 124, the payout control unit 330 is not instructed to pay out the prize ball linked to the game ball.
When the payout control unit 330 pays out the prize balls according to the instruction of the game control unit 200, the game control unit 200 acquires information regarding the number of paid out prize balls from the payout control unit 330. As a result, the number of prize balls paid out is managed.

As a detection means, the game control unit 200 includes a first start port detection unit (first start port switch (SW) 211) that detects the winning of the game ball to the first start port 121. , To the second start port detection unit (second start port switch (SW)) 212 for detecting the winning of the game ball to the second start port 122, the electric tulip opening / closing unit 213 for opening / closing the electric tulip 123, and the gate 124. A gate detection unit (gate switch (SW) 214) for detecting the passage of the game ball is connected to the gate detection unit (SW) 214.
Further, the game control unit 200 includes a large winning opening detection unit (large winning opening switch (SW)) 215 for detecting the winning of a game ball to the large winning opening 125, and a large winning opening door 125D of the large winning opening 125. The large winning opening door opening / closing part 216 that sets the closed state and the protruding inclined open state, and the normal winning opening detection unit (ordinary winning opening switch (SW) 217) that detects the winning of the game ball to the ordinary winning opening 126. , Are connected.

Further, the game control unit 200 has a first special symbol hold indicator 218 that displays the number of unchanged holdings that have won a prize in the first starting port 121 during the change of the special symbol, and a second special symbol hold indicator 218 during the change of the special symbol. The second special symbol hold indicator 219 that displays the number of unchanged items that have been won in the starting port 122, and the normal symbol hold indicator that displays the number of unchanged items that have passed through the gate 124 while the normal symbol is changing. 220 and are connected.
Further, the game control unit 200 has a first special symbol display 221 that displays the result of a special symbol variation display and a special symbol lottery performed by winning a game ball to the first starting port 121, and a second starting port. The second special symbol display 222 that displays the variation display of the special symbol and the result of the special symbol lottery performed by winning the game ball to 122, and the variation display of the normal symbol and the normal symbol display that displays the result of the ordinary symbol lottery. The device 223 and the state display 224 that displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 are connected.

Then, the detection signals detected by the first start port switch 211, the second start port switch 212, the gate switch 214, the large winning port switch 215, and the normal winning port switch 217 are sent to the game control unit 200. Further, the control signals from the game control unit 200 are the electric tulip opening / closing unit 213, the grand prize opening door opening / closing unit 216, the first special symbol holding indicator 218, the second special symbol holding indicator 219, and the normal symbol holding indicator 220. , 1st special symbol display 221 and 2nd special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223 and status display 224. As a result, the game control unit 200 performs various controls related to the number of payout prize balls described above.

Further, the game control unit 200 is connected to an external information terminal board 350 for a board that transmits various information to a host computer (not shown) installed in the hall. Then, the game control unit 200 transmits information regarding the number of prize balls paid out, information indicating the state of the game control unit 200, etc. acquired from the payout control unit 330 to the host computer via the external information terminal board 350 for the board. do.

[Configuration / function of payout control unit]
The payout control unit 330 includes a CPU 331 that performs arithmetic processing for controlling payout of payout balls, a ROM 332 that stores programs and various data executed by the CPU 331, and a RAM 333 that is used as a work memory of the CPU 331. And have.
Then, the payout control unit 330 controls the payout of the payout ball based on the command sent from the game control unit 200.
Specifically, the payout control unit 330 acquires a command from the game control unit 200 to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the place where the game ball has won a prize (first starting port 121 or the like). Then, the payout drive unit 334 is controlled so that the number of prize balls specified in the command is paid out. The payout drive unit 334 here is composed of a drive motor that sends out the game ball from the storage unit of the game ball.

Further, the payout control unit 330 includes a payout ball detection unit 335 that detects the number of prize balls actually paid out from the game ball storage unit by the payout drive unit 334, and a game ball in the storage unit (not shown). It detects whether or not the ball presence detection unit 336 that detects the presence or absence of storage of the ball and the plate 153 that holds the game ball used when the player plays the game and the prize ball paid out are in a full tank state. The full tank detection unit 337 is connected to the full tank detection unit 337. Then, the payout control unit 330 receives the detection signals detected by the payout ball detection unit 335, the ball presence detection unit 336, and the full tank detection unit 337, and performs predetermined processing according to these detection signals.
Further, the payout control unit 330 is connected to a frame external information terminal board 340 for transmitting various information to the host computer installed in the hall. Then, the payout control unit 330 may, for example, provide information on the number of prize balls instructed to pay out to the payout drive unit 334, information on the number of actually paid out prize balls detected by the payout ball detection unit 335, and the like. Is transmitted to the host computer via the external information terminal board 340 for the frame. Further, the same information is transmitted to the game control unit 200.

[Structure / function of production control unit]
The effect control unit 300 includes a CPU 301 that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the effect, a ROM 302 that stores programs and various data executed by the CPU 301, a RAM 303 that is used as a work memory of the CPU 301, and a date and time. It is equipped with a real-time clock (RTC) 304, which measures the data.
The effect control unit 300 sets the effect content based on, for example, the determination result of whether or not the special symbol lottery is won or not and the fluctuation pattern sent from the game control unit 200. At that time, the effect content may be set according to the operation input by receiving the operation input from the user using the effect button 161 or the effect key 162. In this case, for example, a signal (operation signal) corresponding to the operation is received from a controller (not shown) such as the effect button 161 and the operation content identified by the operation signal is reflected in the effect setting.
Further, when the game is interrupted for a predetermined period, the effect control unit 300 instructs the setting of the screen display for waiting for customers as one of the effects.
Further, the effect control unit 300 sets the effect content based on the change information of the high probability state and the low probability state, and the change information of the time reduction non-state and the time reduction state received from the game control unit 200.
Further, the effect control unit 300 sends a command instructing the execution of the set effect content to the image / sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320.
Further, the effect control unit 300 instructs the setting of the initial screen when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on. The details will be described later, but the initial screen is an initial screen displayed when the power is turned on, for example, an image 75 during power restoration (FIG. 57 (2) described later), a default symbol (FIG. 57 (3)), and the like. Is included.

Further, the effect control unit 300 is connected to an image / sound control unit 310 that controls an effect using images and sound, and a lamp control unit 320 that controls an effect using various lamps and movable accessories 115. Has been done.

[Configuration / function of image / acoustic control unit]
As shown in FIG. 4, the image / sound control unit 310 stores a CPU 311 that performs arithmetic processing for controlling an image expressing the effect content and sound, a program executed by the CPU 311 and various data. It includes a ROM 312, a RAM 313 used as a working memory of the CPU 311 and the like, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 314, a CGROM 315, and a SNDROM 316.

Then, the image / sound control unit 310 controls the image displayed on the image display unit 114 and the sound output from the speaker 156 based on the command sent from the effect control unit 300.
Specifically, the CGROM 315 has a symbol image and a background image displayed during the game on the image display unit 114, a decorative symbol for notifying the player of the lottery result, a character for displaying a notice effect to the player, and the like. Image data such as items are stored. Further, the SNDROM 316 stores various acoustic data such as music and sound that are synchronized with the image data or output from the speaker 156 independently of the image data, and sound effects such as jingles.
The CPU 311 analyzes animation patterns, creates a display list summarizing commands related to drawing, and sends the display list to VDP314 based on the hold number command or the variable effect start command sent from the effect control unit 300. conduct.

The VDP 314 reads out the image data and the acoustic data stored in the CGROM 315 and the SNDROM 316, respectively, based on the display list received from the CPU 311. Further, the VDP 314 performs drawing processing for background image display, symbol image display, symbol image variation, character / item display, etc. using the read image data, and voice processing using the read acoustic data. .. Then, the VDP 314 controls the screen display on the image display unit 114 by the image data that has been drawn. Further, the VDP 314 controls the sound output from the speaker 156 by the sound processed sound data.
In the present embodiment, the VDP 314 is configured to perform voice processing in addition to the drawing processing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a processor dedicated to voice processing may be separately provided.

[Configuration / function of lamp control unit]
The lamp control unit 320 stores a CPU 321 that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the light emission of the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 and the operation of the movable accessory 115, and a program and various data executed by the CPU 321. It includes a ROM 322 and a RAM 323 used as a working memory of the CPU 321 and the like.
Then, the lamp control unit 320 controls lighting / blinking, emission color, and the like of the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 based on the command sent from the effect control unit 300. It also controls the operation of the movable accessory 115.

Specifically, the ROM 322 of the lamp control unit 320 contains lighting / blinking pattern data and emission color pattern data (emission pattern) of the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 according to the effect content set by the effect control unit 300. Data) is stored. The CPU 321 selects and reads out the light emission pattern data stored in the ROM 322 that corresponds to the command sent from the effect control unit 300. Then, the lamp control unit 320 controls the light emission of the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 based on the read light emission pattern data.
Further, the ROM 322 of the lamp control unit 320 stores the operation pattern data of the movable accessory 115 according to the effect content set by the effect control unit 300. The CPU 321 controls the operation of the movable accessory 115 by the read operation pattern data.

In the present embodiment, each of the game control unit 200, the effect control unit 300, the image / sound control unit 310, the lamp control unit 320, and the payout control unit 330 is a main board arranged on the rear surface of the game board 110. The game control board as a sub-board, the effect control board as a sub board, the image control board, the lamp control board, and the payout control board are individually configured.
Further, in the configuration example described with reference to FIG. 4, the effect button 161 and the effect key 162 are connected to the effect control unit 300 and controlled by the effect control unit 300, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The effect button 161 and the effect key 162 may be connected to the lamp control unit 320 and controlled by the lamp control unit 320.

[Functional configuration of game control unit]
Subsequently, the functional configuration of the game control unit 200 will be described.
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the game control unit 200. As shown in FIG. 5, the game control unit 200 includes a random number acquisition unit 231, a normal symbol determination unit 232, a special symbol fluctuation control unit 233, and a special symbol determination unit 234 as functional units for executing various lottery processes. , Ordinary symbol variation control unit 236, and.
Further, the game control unit 200 includes a variation pattern selection unit 235 as a functional unit that executes processing associated with a special symbol variation.
Further, the game control unit 200 has a large winning opening motion control unit 237, an electric tulip motion control unit 238, and a prize ball processing unit 239 as functional units for executing data processing related to motion control of various accessories and prize balls. And an output control unit 240 and a random number control unit 241.

The random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value used for the special symbol lottery and a random number value used for the normal symbol lottery. In the case of the random number value used for the special symbol lottery, specifically, on the condition that the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122, the numerical value in a predetermined range is set for each type of random number. One numerical value (random number value) is selected (acquired) from among them. The acquired random number value is used for determination by the special symbol determination unit 234. As will be described in detail later, the random numbers used in the special symbol lottery include a jackpot random number indicating whether or not it is a jackpot, a symbol random number indicating the type of jackpot, a variable pattern random number, a reach random number, and the like.
Further, in the case of a random number value used for a normal symbol lottery, specifically, one numerical value (random number value) is selected (acquired) from a predetermined range of numerical values on condition that the game ball has passed through the gate 124. ). The acquired random number value is usually used for determination by the symbol determination unit 232. As the random numbers used in the ordinary symbol lottery, in addition to the hit random numbers indicating whether or not they are hits, symbol random numbers indicating the types of hits, variable pattern random numbers, and the like may be set.
When the special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol variation control unit 233 controls the variation of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 221 or the second special symbol display 222 according to the lottery result.

At the start of the change of the special symbol, the special symbol determination unit 234 uses a random number table as shown in FIG. "Type" and "whether it is a small hit or a miss when the big hit is not won" are determined. That is, the random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value related to the special symbol when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 211 or the second start port switch 212, which is the detection means, and determines the special symbol. Based on the acquired random number value, the unit 234 determines whether or not to perform a special game (big hit game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player. The above-mentioned special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) refers to processing by the random number acquisition unit 231 and the special symbol determination unit 234.

Here, the "big hit" is divided into a plurality of types according to the game state generated after the end of the big hit game. Specifically, the type of jackpot is determined by the combination of the time-saving no state or the time-saving state, and the high-probability state or the low-probability state. That is, as the types of jackpots based on the game state that occurs after the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot that becomes a high-probability time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game (hereinafter, the jackpot in the high-probability time-saving game state) and the low-probability time-saving game state. Big hit (hereinafter, big hit in low probability time saving game state), big hit in high probability time saving no game state (hereinafter, big hit in high probability time saving no game state), big hit in low probability time saving no game state (hereinafter, low) There is a possibility of a jackpot in a non-game state with a short probability. Each of these jackpots is associated with an individual special symbol, and the type of jackpot is determined according to the type of the special symbol won in the special symbol lottery.

Further, the "big hit" may be divided into a big hit in which the time of the big hit game is long and a large amount of game balls can be expected to be paid out, and a big hit in which the time of the big hit game is short and the payout of the game balls can hardly be expected. The former is called "long hit" and the latter is called "short hit". For example, in "long hit", a round in which the open state of the large winning opening 125 is maintained until a predetermined condition (for example, 29.5 seconds have elapsed or 10 game balls have been won) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). Is done. Further, in the "short hit", a round in which the large winning opening 125 is opened for a certain period of time (for example, 0.9 seconds) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice).

In addition, when the big hit is not won, the "small hit" is a small hit game in which the big winning opening 125 is opened for a certain period of time (for example, 0.9 seconds) a predetermined number of times (for example, twice). Will be done. When the small hit is won, the game state before the small hit is continued even after the small hit game is completed. That is, when the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit is the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the high-probability time-saving gaming state is continued even after the end of the small hit game, and the gaming state does not shift. Similarly, when the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit is the low-probability time-saving non-game state, the low-probability time-saving non-game state is continued even after the end of the small hit game, and the gaming state does not shift.
Further, the "small hit" is a kind of "missing", and none of the above-mentioned gaming states that are advantageous to the player is set.

The variation pattern selection unit 235 selects the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol to be displayed on the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222. Specifically, the variation pattern selection unit 235 can perform a reach effect in the determination result of whether or not to perform the jackpot game and the decorative symbol variation effect accompanying the special symbol variation (for example, 13.5 seconds or more). ) Is determined, and the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the judgment result and the like. Then, the special symbol variation control unit 233 controls the variation of the special symbol based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection unit 235. Details of the operations of the variation pattern selection unit 235 and the special symbol variation control unit 233 will be described later.
Here, "reach" is an effect for making the player expect a big hit in the decorative design described later.

The ordinary symbol determination unit 232 determines whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is "win or not" by using a random number table as shown in FIG. 20 (d) described later at the start of the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol. That is, the ordinary symbol determination unit 232 determines whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening and closing the electric tulip 123 based on the random number value for the ordinary symbol lottery acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231. Further, when a plurality of types of hits are set in the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines the "type of hit" when the determination result is a hit. The ordinary symbol lottery is a process performed by the random number acquisition unit 231 and the ordinary symbol determination unit 232.
The normal symbol variation control unit 236 controls the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 223 according to the lottery result when the normal symbol lottery is performed.
The electric tulip motion control unit 238 opens the electric tulip 123 for a specified time and a specified number of times when the normal symbol lottery determines "hit" by the normal symbol determination unit 232, and the game ball is placed in the second starting port 122. Generate a state that makes it easy to win a prize. Further, when it is determined to be "off", such an open state of the electric tulip 123 is not generated. The operation pattern of the electric tulip 123 will be described later. For example, there are an operation pattern that opens once with an opening time of 0.15 seconds and an operation pattern that opens three times with an opening time of 1.80 seconds.

When the special symbol lottery determines "big hit" by the special symbol determination unit 234, the big prize opening operation control unit 237 has a big winning opening with an operation pattern specified based on the type of the winning jackpot as a big hit game. Controls the opening operation of 125. Further, when the special symbol lottery determines "small hit" by the special symbol determination unit 234, the large winning opening operation control unit 237 opens the large winning opening 125 as a small hit game for a specified time and a specified number of times. ..
The prize ball processing unit 239 sets a command for managing the number of prizes for various prizes related to prizes and lottery, and for controlling the payout of prize balls according to the prizes.
The output control unit 240 controls the output of control commands from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 and the payout control unit 330.
The random number control unit 241 updates various random number values acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231 at a predetermined timing.

[Basic operation of gaming machines]
Next, the basic operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
When the power is turned on, the game control unit 200 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 initializes and sets various devices as a basic process at startup. Then, after performing the basic processing, the game control unit 200 repeatedly executes the main control processing, which is a series of processing related to the progress of the game. Further, when the power is cut off, the game control unit 200 executes a series of power cut-off processes.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the operation of the basic processing by the game control unit 200.
When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, the game control unit 200 first permits access to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 3) (step (hereinafter, step is referred to as “S”) 601). Then, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch for clearing the RAM 203 is ON (S602).
When the RAM clear switch is OFF (No in S602), the game control unit 200 then determines whether or not the backup flag related to the operation when the power is cut off is ON (S603).
When the backup flag is ON (Yes in S603), the game control unit 200 then determines whether or not the checksum created when the power is cut off is normal (S604).
When the checksum is normal (Yes in S604), the game control unit 200 then executes the return process (S605). In this return process, the game control unit 200 sets sub-control means such as the effect control unit 300 when returning from the state in which the power supply is cut off. Specifically, the game control unit 200 is in a gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the power is cut off (whether or not a jackpot game is in progress, either a high-probability state or a low-probability state, a time-saving state and a time-saving non-state). A command for setting a sub-control means is output to the effect control unit 300 so as to reflect any one of the above. Further, in this return process, the game control unit 200 turns off the backup flag.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is ON (Yes in S602), the backup flag is OFF (No in S603), or the checksum is abnormal (No in S604), then the game control unit 200 is initialized. As a process, the stored contents of the RAM 203 are cleared (S606), and the work area of the RAM 203 is set (S607). Then, the game control unit 200 outputs a command for setting (initializing) the sub control means to the effect control unit 300, and sets the sub board (sub control means) (S608). The setting of the sub-board includes clearing the RAM 303, RAM 313, and RAM 323 mounted on each sub-board.

After the return process (see S605) is completed or the sub-board setting (see S608) is completed, the game control unit 200 sets various counters and timers used for the game control (S609). Then, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the interrupt enable (S610), interrupt disable (S611), symbol random number control process (S612), initial value random number update process (S613), and power cutoff flag are ON. (S614) is repeatedly executed as a loop process.
Here, the interrupt enable (S610) and the interrupt disable (S611) are provided to enable the execution of the interrupt process during the execution of the loop process (S610 to S614). In the present embodiment, this interrupt process executes the main control process in the game control. The details of the main control process will be described later.
In the symbol random number control process (S612), the game control unit 200 updates the variable pattern random number used in the special symbol lottery.
In the initial value random number update process (S613), the game control unit 200 updates the initial values of various random numbers used in the game control.
In the determination of the power cutoff flag, when the power cutoff flag is OFF (No in S614), the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not cut off, and the game control unit 200 performs main control by interruption together with loop processing (S610 to S614). Repeat the process. On the other hand, when the power cutoff flag is ON (Yes in S614), the game control unit 200 starts a process for shutting off the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (process at the time of power cutoff).

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the operation of the power cutoff process by the game control unit 200.
In the power cutoff process, the game control unit 200 first clears the setting of the output port for performing various outputs (S701). Next, the game control unit 200 creates a checksum and stores it in the RAM 203 (S702). Next, the game control unit 200 turns on the backup flag (S703), prohibits access to the RAM 203 (S704), and shifts to an infinite loop.

[Main control processing of gaming machines]
Next, the main control process of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
In the main control process, the game control unit 200 controls the game in the pachinko gaming machine 100, instructs the effect control unit 300, which is a sub control means, to control the effect, and gives the payout control unit 330 a prize ball. Instruct to control the payout of.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the main control process of the game control unit 200.
The main control process consists of a series of processes in game control, and is repeatedly executed at predetermined fixed time (for example, 4 milliseconds). In the present embodiment, the game control unit 200 generates an interrupt at predetermined fixed time intervals, and when the interrupt is enabled in the loop process shown in FIG. 6 (see S610), the main control is performed as the interrupt process. Execute the process. As shown in FIG. 8, in the main control process, random number update process, switch process, symbol process, electric accessory process, prize ball process, and output process are sequentially executed (S801 to S806).

In the random number update process (S801), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number control unit 241 to update the values of various random numbers used in the game control by the game control unit 200. Details of setting the random number and updating the random number value will be described later.

As the switch process (S802), a start port switch process and a gate switch process are performed.
In the start port switch process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number acquisition unit 231 to monitor the states of the first start port switch 211 and the second start port switch 212 in FIG. 3, and the switch is turned on. If it becomes, the process for the special symbol lottery is executed. Further, as will be described in detail later, when the pre-determination process is performed in the first start port switch 211 and the second start port switch 212, each function (subroutine) of the special symbol determination unit 234 and the variation pattern selection unit 235 is called. Execute the process for pre-judgment.
In the gate switch process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number acquisition unit 231 to monitor the state of the gate switch 214 in FIG. 3, and when the switch is turned on, it is for a normal symbol lottery. Execute the process.
The details of these switch processes will be described later.

As the symbol processing (S803), a special symbol processing and a normal symbol processing are performed.
In the special symbol processing, the game control unit 200 calls each function (subroutine) of the special symbol variation control unit 233, the special symbol determination unit 234, and the variation pattern selection unit 235, and executes the special symbol variation and the processing associated with the symbol variation. do.
In the normal symbol processing, the game control unit 200 calls the functions (subroutines) of the normal symbol determination unit 232 and the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236, and executes the normal symbol change and the processing associated with the normal symbol change.
The detailed contents of these pattern processing will be described later.

As the electric accessory processing (S804), a large winning opening processing and an electric tulip processing are performed.
In the big winning opening process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the big winning opening operation control unit 237 and controls the opening operation of the special winning opening 125, which is a special electric accessory, based on a predetermined condition.
In the electric tulip processing, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the electric tulip motion control unit 238 and controls the opening operation of the electric tulip 123, which is an ordinary electric accessory, based on a predetermined condition.
The detailed contents of these electric accessory processing will be described later.

In the prize ball processing (S805), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the prize ball processing unit 239, and sets a command for managing the number of prizes and controlling the payout of prize balls according to the prize.

In the output process (S806), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the output control unit 240, outputs a command for effect control to the effect control unit 300, and outputs a command for payout control to the payout control unit 330. Output. The effect control command is generated in each process from S802 to S804, and is stored (set) in the control command storage area provided in the RAM 203. The payout control command is generated in the process of S805 and is stored (set) in the storage area of the control command provided in the RAM 203. A storage area is set in the RAM 203 for each type of control command.

The output control unit 240 examines the storage area of each control command of the RAM 203 in order, and if the control command is stored in each storage area (that is, the control command is generated by the processing of S802 to S805). B), the control command is read and output to the output destination (effect control unit 300 or payout control unit 330).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, the output process is performed at the end of a series of main control processes. That is, the commands generated in each process of S802 to S805 by each of the above functions as the first processing means are stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203 in each process. Then, after these processes, the output control unit 240 as the second processing means collectively outputs the commands generated in each process stored in the storage area of the RAM 203. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the main control process is executed for one cycle, the command generated in the execution of the one cycle is output after the last command generation in the execution of the one cycle is performed.

[Modification example of basic operation of gaming machine]
In the operation example described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 8, interrupts are permitted in the loop processing portion of the basic processing, and the main control processing consisting of a series of processing is executed as the interrupt processing. However, the main control process may be configured to be repeatedly executed at regular time intervals, and the specific realization means (execution procedure) is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 6 to 8. For example, the main control process may be incorporated into a series of operations of the basic process, the elapsed time may be measured at a predetermined timing, and the process may be returned to the main control process at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds). Further, while incorporating the main control process into a series of operations of the basic process, an interrupt is generated at regular time intervals and an interrupt is generated, as in the operation described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 8. It may be configured to return to the main control process incorporated in the basic process.

When outputting the command generated in the basic processing, as a general rule, each time the command is generated, it is stored in the command storage area of the RAM 203, and the function of the output control unit 240, which is the second processing means, is called. Output. The basic process is a special process such as an initial operation performed only when the power is turned on, unlike the main control process related to the progress of the game. In addition, since the processing procedure of the basic processing may change due to branching based on conditions such as the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the power is turned on, the generated command is promptly output so that there is no omission in the output processing. It is a process. In addition, in response to a specific processing request, such as when commands are continuously generated by multiple related processes, a processing procedure is adopted in which multiple commands are stored in the command storage area of RAM 203 and output collectively. May be.

[Random number update processing by the game control unit]
The random number value as the determination information used for various lottery in the game control such as the special symbol lottery is counted by the counter, and the random number update process (S801) of the main control process shown in FIG. 8 starts from a predetermined initial value. One is added each time it is done. Then, the value at the time when each lottery is performed is acquired in the start port switch process (FIG. 9) and the gate switch process (FIG. 10), and is used in the special symbol process (FIG. 11) and the normal symbol process (FIG. 16). To. The counter of this random number value is an infinite loop counter, and after the counted random number value reaches the maximum value of the set random number (for example, 299 for the jackpot random number shown in FIG. 20A described later). , Returns to the initial value again. Further, since the random number update process is performed at regular intervals, if the initial value of each random number is specified, the winning value may be estimated based on the update interval and the information of the initial value. Therefore, after returning to the basic process shown in FIG. 6 from the main control process, the initial value of each random number is randomly changed in the initial value random number update process of S613.

[Starting port switch processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start port switch process among the switch processes shown in S802 of FIG.
In this start port switch process, a process for winning a prize at the first start port 121 and a process for winning a prize at the second start port 122 are sequentially performed. Referring to FIG. 9, the game control unit 200 first determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first start port 121 and the first start port switch 211 has been turned on (S901). When the first start port switch 211 is turned on, the game control unit 200 then determines whether or not the unchanged number of holdings U1 in the winning of the first start port 121 is less than the upper limit value (S902). .. In the example shown in FIG. 9, the upper limit is set to four. When the holding number U1 has reached the upper limit value (No in S902), the winning of the unvariable portion cannot be held any more, so that the processing for winning at the first starting port 121 is terminated.

On the other hand, when the hold number U1 is less than the upper limit value (Yes in S902), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires the random number value for the determination by the winning this time and stores it in the RAM 203 (S903). .. Here, since the prize is won in the first starting port 121, a random number value for a special symbol lottery is acquired. The random number value acquired at this time is a value updated by the random number update process of S801. Then, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined in the later special symbol processing by this random value. The random value here includes a jackpot random value that determines a jackpot, a small hit, or a miss, and the type of jackpot (time saving state or time saving no state after the end of the big hit game, high probability state and low probability state, long hit, short). The symbol random value (big hit symbol random value) that determines the hit), the fluctuation pattern random value for specifying the fluctuation pattern in the symbol fluctuation, and the fluctuation pattern (variation time) that can execute the reach effect described later when the value is lost. Includes reach random values, etc. that determine whether or not.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs a preliminary determination process (S904). In the pre-judgment process, a random number is generated by a special symbol process for a winning ball (reserved ball) whose random number has already been acquired by winning a prize at the starting port but has not yet been determined by the special symbol process described later. It is a process of determining the random number before the determination (predetermination).

Then, the effect control unit 300 of the present embodiment determines the random number by the special symbol processing based on the determination result (preliminary determination result) of the random number determined by the prior determination processing, and the determination result is notified. Before that, a notice effect suggesting the determination result can be performed. In this advance notice effect, for example, the image display unit responds to the generation of a winning ball (reserved ball) in which a random number has already been acquired by winning a prize at the starting port but the random number has not yet been determined by special symbol processing. It is performed by using the hold display effect (described later) displayed on 114. By the advance notice effect based on this advance determination, the player is suggested to the player the determination result when the random number is subsequently determined by the special symbol processing with respect to the reserved ball corresponding to the advance determination related to the advance notice effect. As a result, the player can play the game while having an expectation for the reserved ball. The details of the advance notice production based on the preliminary judgment will be described later.

Then, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the reserved number U1 (S905).
After that, the game control unit 200 sets the pre-determination result command including the pre-determination information by the pre-determination process of S904 in the RAM 203 in order to notify the effect control unit 300 of the pre-determination result (S906).
Further, the game control unit 200 sets the hold number increase command for notifying the effect control unit 300 of the increase in the hold number U1 by S905 in the RAM 203 (S907), and ends the process for winning in the first start port 121. ..

Next, processing for winning a prize at the second starting port 122 is performed. Referring to FIG. 9, the game control unit 200 then determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second start port 122 and the second start port switch 212 has been turned on (S908). When the second start port switch 212 is turned on, the game control unit 200 next determines whether or not the unchanged number of reservations U2 in the winning of the second start port 122 is less than the upper limit value (S909). ). In the example shown in FIG. 9, the upper limit is set to four. If the number of holds U2 has reached the upper limit (No in S909), the winning of the unvariable portion cannot be held any more, so that the processing for winning at the second starting port 122 is terminated.

On the other hand, when the hold number U2 is less than the upper limit value (Yes in S909), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires the random number value for the lottery due to the current winning and stores it in the RAM 203 (S910). .. Here, since the prize is won in the second starting port 122, the random number values for the special symbol lottery (big hit random value, big hit symbol random value, reach random value, variable pattern random value, etc.) are acquired in the same manner as in S903 above. To. The random number value acquired at this time is a value updated by the random number update process of S801. Then, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined in the later special symbol processing by this random value.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs a preliminary determination process (S911). The content of this pre-determination process is the same as that of S904 described above.
Then, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the reserved number U2 (S912).
After that, the game control unit 200 sets the pre-determination result command including the pre-determination information by the pre-determination process of S911 in the RAM 203 in order to notify the effect control unit 300 of the pre-determination result (S913).
Further, the game control unit 200 sets the hold number increase command for notifying the effect control unit 300 of the increase in the hold number U2 by S912 in the RAM 203 (S914), and ends the process for winning the prize at the second start port 122. ..

[Gate switch processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of the gate switch process when the game ball passes through the gate 124.
In this gate switch process, the game control unit 200 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 124 and the gate switch 214 is turned on (S1001). When the gate switch 214 is turned ON, the game control unit 200 then determines whether or not the unchanged hold number G is less than the upper limit value (S1002). In the example shown in FIG. 10, the upper limit is set to four. If the number of holds G has reached the upper limit (No in S1002), the winning of the unvariable portion cannot be held any more, so the gate switch process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the hold number G is less than the upper limit value (Yes in S1002), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires the random number value for the lottery due to the current winning and stores it in the RAM 203 (S1003). .. Here, since the prize is won at the gate 124, a random value (such as a winning random value) for a normal symbol lottery is acquired.

Next, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the hold number G (S1004).
After the value of the hold number G is added in S1004, the game control unit 200 sets the hold number G increase command in the RAM 203 to notify the effect control unit 300 of the increase in the hold number G by S1004 (S1005). The process for winning a prize at the gate 124 is terminated.

[Special symbol processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol processing among the symbol processing shown in S803 of FIG.
In this special symbol processing, the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the jackpot game flag is ON in the setting of the flag set in the RAM 203 (hereinafter, flag setting) (hereinafter, the flag setting). S1101). Here, the jackpot game flag is a flag set to identify that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.

When the jackpot game flag is ON, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is already in the jackpot, so the special symbol processing is terminated without starting the special symbol variation (Yes in S1101). On the other hand, when the jackpot game flag is OFF (No in S1101), the special symbol variation control unit 233 then determines whether or not the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is undergoing special symbol variation (S1102). When the special symbol is not changing (No in S1102), the special symbol change control unit 233 then performs processing related to the reserved numbers U1 and U2 (see FIG. 9) of the unchanged portion of the special symbol (S1103 to S1106). In the present embodiment, since the number of reservations U1 related to the winning of the first starting port 121 and the number of holdings U2 related to the winning of the second starting port 122 are distinguished, this process is also performed individually for each corresponding starting port. ..

Specifically, the special symbol variation control unit 233 first determines whether the number of reservations U2 related to the winning of the second starting port 122 is 1 or more (S1103). When the hold number U2 is 1 or more (Yes in S1103), the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 subtracts 1 from the value of the hold number U2 (S1104). On the other hand, when the holding number U2 = 0 (No in S1103), the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 then determines whether the holding number U1 related to the winning of the first starting port 121 is 1 or more (S1105). When the hold number U1 is 1 or more (Yes in S1105), the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 subtracts 1 from the value of the hold number U1 (S1106). On the other hand, when the number of reservations U1 = 0 (No in S1105), it means that there is no prize for starting the lottery of the special symbol, so that the special symbol change is not started and the customer waiting setting process of another routine is performed. Is executed to end the process (S1116).
In this embodiment, the process related to the number of pending U2s related to the winning of the second starting port 122 is prioritized. That is, when the hold number U2 is 1 or more, the process related to the hold number U2 is performed, and when the hold number U2 = 0, the process related to the hold number U1 is performed (see S803 to S806). On the other hand, regardless of which of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 is won, the control may be such that the reserved numbers U1 and U2 are subtracted in the order of winning.

After subtracting the hold number U1 or the hold number U2 in S1104 or S1106, the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 turns off the customer waiting flag set in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1107). The customer waiting flag is a flag for identifying that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the customer waiting state, and is set in the customer waiting setting process (S1116, see FIG. 15 to be described later).

Next, the special symbol variation control unit 233 executes a jackpot determination process and a variation pattern selection process by another routine (S1108, S1109). Although details will be described later, setting information for variation of the special symbol (big hit symbol, game) that is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 by the jackpot determination process and the variation pattern selection process. The state, fluctuation pattern, etc.) are determined. It should be noted that these information are included in the fluctuation start command sent to the effect control unit 300.

After that, the special symbol variation control unit 233 is displayed by the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 shown in FIG. 2 based on the setting contents determined by the jackpot determination process and the variation pattern selection process. The change of the special symbol is started (S1110). Then, a variation start command including setting information (big hit symbol, game state, variation pattern, etc.) indicating the setting contents is generated and set in the RAM 203 (S1111). The fluctuation start command set in S1111 is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

When it is determined in S1102 that the special symbol is changing (Yes in S1102), or after the change start command is set in S1111, the special symbol change control unit 233 determines whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed (S1112). ). That is, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol in S1110 has reached the variation time set in the variation pattern selection process of S1109. If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (No in S1112), the special symbol variation is continued, so that the special symbol processing ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has elapsed (Yes in S1112), the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 first determines the fluctuation of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 in the jackpot determination process of S1108. It stops at the symbol determined in (S1113). A variable stop command for stopping the decorative symbol described later is set in the RAM 203 (S1114). Then, the stopped processing of another routine is executed (S1115). The details of the stopped processing will be described later. The fluctuation stop command set in S1114 is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

[Big hit judgment processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot determination process (S1108 in FIG. 11).
In this jackpot determination process, the special symbol determination unit 234 of the game control unit 200 first determines the jackpot random number value in the special symbol lottery this time (S1201), and determines whether or not it is a jackpot or a small hit (S1202). , S1205). Whether or not a jackpot or a small hit is determined is whether or not the value of the jackpot random number acquired in S903 or S910 in FIG. 9 matches the value set as the winning value of the jackpot or the value set as the winning value of the small hit. It is determined by determining whether or not (see FIG. 20 (a)).

When the result of the random number determination in S1201 is a big hit (Yes in S1202), the special symbol determination unit 234 then determines the jackpot symbol random number value (S1203). Depending on the result of this determination, the type of jackpot (big hit in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, jackpot in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, etc.) is determined. Which jackpot will be won is determined by which of the values preset for each type of jackpot matches the value of the jackpot symbol random number acquired in S903 or S910 in FIG. 9 (FIG. 20 (Fig. 20). b) See).

After the above determination, the special symbol determination unit 234 sets a symbol (big hit symbol) representing the type of jackpot determined by the determination of the jackpot symbol random number in the RAM 203 as setting information (S1204).

When the result of the random number determination in S1201 is a small hit (No in S1202, Yes in S1205), then the special symbol determination unit 234 uses a symbol indicating that it is a small hit (hereinafter referred to as a small hit symbol) as setting information. It is set in RAM 203 (S1206).

When the result of the random number determination in S1201 is neither a big hit nor a small hit (No in S1202 and S1205), then the special symbol determination unit 234 uses the symbol indicating that the lottery has been missed (hereinafter referred to as the missed symbol) as setting information in the RAM 203. (S1207).

[Variation pattern selection processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern selection process (S1109 in FIG. 11).
In this variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern selection unit 235 of the game control unit 200 first refers to the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (whether it is a time saving state or a time saving state, and a high probability state or a low probability state). (S1301). Then, using the determination result of S1202 in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 12), it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been achieved in this special symbol lottery (S1302). Then, in the case of a big hit (Yes in S1302), the fluctuation pattern selection unit 235 reads the fluctuation pattern table for the big hit from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1303).

On the other hand, when there is no big hit (No in S1302), the fluctuation pattern selection unit 235 then determines a random number value for determining whether or not to perform a so-called reach effect for the player to expect a big hit. (S1304). Whether or not to perform the reach effect is determined by determining whether or not the value of the reach random number acquired in S903 or S910 in FIG. 9 matches the preset value (see FIG. 20 (c)). ..
When the reach effect is performed as a result of the determination using the random value (Yes in S1305), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads the variation pattern table for reach from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1306). Further, when the reach effect is not performed (No in S1305), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads the variation pattern table for removal from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1307).
Here, the fluctuation pattern table is a plurality of fluctuation patterns (variation time 3 seconds, 7 seconds, 13 seconds, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, etc.) prepared in advance and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number. It is a table associated with.

Next, the variation pattern selection unit 235 determines the variation pattern random value using the variation pattern random value acquired in S903 or S910 of FIG. 9 and the variation pattern table set in S1303, S1306, and S1307 (S1308). ). That is, the variation pattern selection unit 235 refers to the variation pattern table set in the RAM 203, and selects the variation pattern according to the random number value of the variation pattern random number. Therefore, even if the same random number value is acquired, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (whether it is a time-saving state or a time-saving state, and a high-probability state or a low-probability state), and the result of a special symbol lottery (whether or not a big hit is made). , If there is no big hit, whether or not to perform reach effect), etc., the reference variation pattern table is different, so the determined variation pattern is different.

After that, the variation pattern selection unit 235 sets the variation pattern selected in S1308 in the RAM 203 as setting information (S1309). The fluctuation pattern setting information set in S1309 is included in the fluctuation start command set in S1111 of FIG. 11, and is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 by the output process shown in S806 of FIG. The details of the fluctuation pattern selected in this embodiment and its setting will be described later.

[Processing during stop by the game control unit]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stopped processing (S1115 in FIG. 11).
In this stopped processing, the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the flag indicating the time saving state (hereinafter referred to as the time saving flag) is turned on in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1401). When the time saving flag is ON (Yes in S1401), the game control unit 200 subtracts 1 from the value of the lottery number (variation number) J in the time saving state (S1402), and whether or not the lottery number J becomes 0. (S1403). Then, if the number of lottery times J = 0 (Yes in S1403), the time saving flag is turned off (S1404). The operation of turning on the time reduction flag and the setting of the initial value of the lottery number J are performed in the game state setting process (FIG. 18) in the large winning opening process (FIG. 17) described later.

When the time saving flag is OFF (No in S1401), after turning off the time saving flag in S1404, or when the value of the lottery number J after subtraction in S1402 is not 0 (No in S1403), then the game control The unit 200 checks whether or not the flag indicating the high probability state (hereinafter referred to as the high probability flag) is turned on in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1405). If both the high-probability flag and the previous time-saving flag are ON, it is in the high-probability time-saving game state, and if the high-probability flag is ON and the time-saving flag is OFF, it is in the high-probability time-saving non-game state. be.

When the high probability flag is ON (Yes in S1405), the game control unit 200 subtracts 1 from the value of the lottery number (variation number) X in the high probability state (S1406), and has the lottery number X become 0? Check whether or not (S1407). Then, if the number of lottery times X = 0 (Yes in S1407), the high accuracy flag is turned off (S1408). The operation of turning on the high accuracy flag and the setting of the initial value of the lottery number X are performed in the game state setting process (FIG. 18) in the large winning opening process (FIG. 17) described later.

When the high accuracy flag is OFF (No in S1405), after the high accuracy flag is turned OFF in S1408, or when the value of the lottery count X after subtraction in S1406 is not 0 (No in S1407), then The game control unit 200 determines whether or not a big hit has been achieved in this special symbol lottery (S1409). Then, in the case of a big hit (Yes in S1409), the game control unit 200 then determines the type of the big hit (S1410). Here, as an example of determining the type of jackpot, whether or not it is a long hit is determined.

Here, the determination of whether or not it is a big hit can be made based on the determination result of the big hit determination process (FIG. 12). For example, if any of the symbols shown in the chart of FIG. 20 (b) described later is set, it is Yes in S1409. If the missing symbol or the small hit symbol is set in the RAM 203 by the jackpot determination process, the result is No in S1409.

When the type of jackpot is long hit (Yes in S1410), the game control unit 200 turns on the long hit game flag (S1411). As a result, the setting of the gaming state of the RAM 203 becomes the jackpot gaming state (long hit gaming state) in which the type of jackpot is a long hit. It should be noted that here, there is no distinction between a high-probability state and a low-probability state in the long hit. Whether the state becomes a high probability state or a low probability state is specified by turning on the corresponding flag in the game state setting process (FIG. 18) in the large winning opening process (FIG. 17) described later.

When the type of big hit is not a long hit (No in S1410), the game control unit 200 turns on the short hit game flag (S1412). As a result, the setting of the gaming state of the RAM 203 becomes the jackpot gaming state (short hit gaming state) in which the type of jackpot is a short hit. As in the case of long hits, short hits do not distinguish between high-probability states and low-probability states.

After turning on the jackpot game flag in S1411 or S1412, the game control unit 200 initializes the values of the lottery times J and X (S1413). Further, the game control unit 200 turns off the time saving flag when the time saving flag is ON in S1401 and the lottery number J is not 0 in S1403 (S1414). Similarly, when the high accuracy flag is ON in S1405 and the lottery number X is not 0 in S1407, the high accuracy flag is turned OFF (S1414).

After initializing the values of the lottery counts J and X in S1413, the game control unit 200 starts the opening operation (S1417). Here, the content of the opening operation differs depending on which of S1411 and S1412 the winning game flag is turned ON. In other words, the opening operation is set according to the determination result of the special symbol lottery.
After that, the game control unit 200 sets the opening command in the RAM 203 (S1418) for performing the effect in the opening operation according to the jackpot game flag in the effect control unit 300, and ends the stopped processing. This opening command is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol lottery this time is not a big hit (No in S1409), then the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery this time is a small hit (S1415). ). If it is not a small hit (No in S1415), the stopped processing is terminated.
On the other hand, in the case of a small hit (Yes in S1415), the game control unit 200 starts the small hit game (S1416). As a result, the setting of the gaming state of the RAM 203 becomes the small hit gaming state. In the small hit game, as described above, the large winning opening 125 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times, and the game ends after a predetermined time has elapsed.

[Customer waiting setting processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting setting process (S1116 in FIG. 11).
In this customer waiting setting process, the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1501). Here, the customer waiting flag is a flag set to identify that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the customer waiting state.

When the customer waiting flag is ON, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the customer waiting state, so the process ends as it is (Yes in S1501). On the other hand, when the customer waiting flag is OFF, the game control unit 200 generates a customer waiting command and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1502), and turns the customer waiting flag ON (S1503). The customer waiting command set in S1502 is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 by the output process shown in S806 of FIG. The customer waiting flag is set in a state where the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped and there is no hold.

[Normal symbol processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol processing among the symbol processing shown in S803 of FIG.
In this normal symbol processing, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1601). Here, the auxiliary game flag is a flag that is set when a normal symbol lottery is won. The state in which the auxiliary game flag is set is a state in which the electric tulip 123 is opened according to the electric tulip process (FIG. 19) described later, and it is easy to win a prize in the second starting port 122 (auxiliary game state).

When the auxiliary game flag is ON, the auxiliary game state is already in effect and the normal symbol is stopped. Therefore, the normal symbol processing is terminated without starting the normal symbol change (Yes in S1601). On the other hand, when the auxiliary game flag is OFF (No in S1601), the normal symbol variation control unit 236 then determines whether or not the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the normal symbol variation (S1602). When the normal symbol is not changing (No in S1602), the normal symbol change control unit 236 then determines whether the reserved number G (see FIG. 10) of the unchanged portion of the normal symbol is 1 or more (S1603). When the number of holds G = 0 (No in S1603), it means that there is no prize for starting the lottery of the normal symbol, so the process ends without starting the normal symbol change.

On the other hand, when the hold number G is 1 or more (Yes in S1603), the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 subtracts 1 from the value of the hold number G (S1604). Then, the ordinary symbol determination unit 232 determines the winning random number in the ordinary symbol lottery this time, and determines whether or not the ordinary symbol lottery has been won (S1605). Whether or not a winner is won is determined by determining whether or not the value of the winning random number acquired in S1003 of FIG. 10 matches the value set as the winning value in the table or the like shown in FIG. 20 (d) described later. It is determined.

Next, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 sets the normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery (S1606). That is, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the symbol representing the winning (hereinafter, the winning symbol) is set in the RAM 203 as the setting information. On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery is not won, a symbol indicating that the lottery has been lost (hereinafter referred to as a missed symbol) is set in the RAM 203 as setting information.

Next, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 sets the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (S1607). This fluctuation time is set based on the time reduction flag set in the processes of S1404 and S1414 in FIG. 14, and S1804 and S1807 in FIG. 18 described later. That is, when the time saving flag is ON at the time of setting by S1607, it is set to a short time (for example, 1.5 seconds), and when the time saving flag is OFF, it is set to a long time (for example, 4.0 seconds). Will be done. After this setting, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 starts the normal symbol fluctuation in the normal symbol display 223 shown in FIGS. 2A and 3 based on the setting content of S1607 (S1608). It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol can also be determined by lottery. In this case, for example, when the game ball passes through the gate 124, the random number acquisition unit 231 acquires the fluctuation pattern random number value of the normal symbol, and in S1607, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 obtains the fluctuation pattern random number value of the normal symbol. By making a determination, the fluctuation time is set.

After starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol in S1608, or when it is determined in S1602 that the normal symbol is changing (Yes in S1602), the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 determines whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed (S1609). ). That is, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol in S1608 has reached the fluctuation time set in S1607. If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (No in S1609), the normal symbol fluctuation is continued, so that the normal symbol processing ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation time ends (Yes in S1609), the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 stops the fluctuation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 223 (S1610). Then, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 determines whether or not the determination result of S1605 is a winning (S1611). If it is a win (Yes in S1611), the auxiliary game flag is turned ON (S1612). On the other hand, if the lottery is missed (No in S1611), the normal symbol processing is terminated without turning on the auxiliary game flag.

[Large winning opening processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the contents of the large winning opening processing in the electric accessory processing shown in S804 of FIG.
In this big prize opening process, the big winning opening operation control unit 237 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the big hit game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1701). When the jackpot game flag is OFF, there is no prize in the jackpot 125, so the jackpot processing is terminated (No in S1701). On the other hand, when the jackpot game flag is ON (Yes in S1701), the jackpot motion control unit 237 then opens the pachinko gaming machine 100 in the motion control at the time of the jackpot started in the stopped processing (FIG. 14). It is determined whether or not the operation is in progress (S1702).

When the pachinko gaming machine 100 is opening (Yes in S1702), the large winning opening operation control unit 237 then determines whether or not the time (opening time) for which the preset opening operation should be performed has elapsed. (S1703). If the opening time has not elapsed, the opening operation at the large winning opening 125 is continued, so the large winning opening process is terminated (No in S1703). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1703), then the large winning opening operation control unit 237 sets the operation of the large winning opening 125 (S1704) and initializes the winning number C (C = 0). (S1705), the value of the number of operating rounds R of the large winning opening 125 is added by 1 from the current value (S1706), and the large winning opening 125 is started (opened) (S1707).

In the operation setting of S1704, the operation pattern of the large winning opening 125 and the number of rounds (the number of operation rounds) to be operated by the operation pattern are set. As an example of the case where the big winning opening 125 operates, there are a case where it is a big hit of a long hit or a short hit and a case where it is a small hit in a special symbol lottery. The operation pattern and the number of rounds are set variously according to the types of these hits. In the big hit game, it is stipulated that the big winning opening 125 is continuously operated a plurality of times (multiple rounds). As an example, in the case of a long hit, for example, 15 rounds (15R) are operated, and in one round, 29.5 seconds of opening is performed once. In the case of a short hit, for example, it is operated for 2 rounds (2R), and in 1 round, it is opened once for 0.9 seconds. To further explain, it is opened for 0.9 seconds, closed for 1.0 second, and then opened for 0.9 seconds. On the other hand, in the case of a small hit, for example, it is opened for 0.9 seconds, closed for 1.0 second, and then opened for 0.9 seconds. Here, when the operation with a short hit and the operation with a small hit are compared in the above example, the opening for 0.9 seconds is performed twice. That is, the operation of the large winning opening 125 seen by the player is the same in the case of the short hit and the case of the small hit, and the short hit and the small hit are distinguished only from the operation of the large winning opening 125 on the game board 110. You can't.

In the case of a small hit, it is stipulated by law that the cumulative opening time of the large winning opening 125 must be set within 1.8 seconds. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit (long hit or short hit), the big winning opening 125 must be opened a plurality of times in a row. Therefore, when it is difficult to visually distinguish between the operation with a small hit and the operation with a short hit as described above, in the case of a small hit, the cumulative opening time in one operation is within 1.8 seconds. An operation mode in which the large winning opening 125 is opened twice or more is set, and in the short hit, the number of rounds equal to the number of times the small hit is opened is set.

Next, the large winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not the opening time in the operation pattern set in S1704 has elapsed (S1708). If the open state of the large winning opening 125 has not passed the opening time (No in S1708), then in the large winning opening operation control unit 237, the number of winnings C to the large winning opening 125 is a specified number (for example, 9). (S) It is determined whether or not it is more than or equal to (S1709). If the opening time has not elapsed and the number of winnings C is less than the specified number, the operating state (opening state) of the large winning opening 125 is continued, so that the large winning opening process is terminated (No in S1709). ). On the other hand, when the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1708) or when the winning number C reaches the specified number (Yes in S1709), the large winning opening operation control unit 237 ends the operation of the large winning opening 125 (closed). (S1710).

Next, the large winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not the number of operating rounds R of the large winning opening 125 has reached the maximum value set in S1704 (S1711). Then, if the maximum value is not reached, the remaining operations are performed, so that the large winning opening process is terminated (No in S1711).

When the number of rounds R of the operation of the large winning opening 125 reaches the maximum value (Yes in S1711), the large winning opening operation control unit 237 then starts the ending operation (S1712). Here, the content of the ending operation corresponds to the state of the jackpot game flag among the ending operations set in each of the long-hit game and the short-hit game.
After that, the big winning opening operation control unit 237 sets the ending command in the RAM 203 for performing the production in the ending operation according to the big hit game flag in the effect control unit 300 (S1713). This ending command is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

Next, the large winning opening operation control unit 237 resets the number of rounds R of the operation of the large winning opening 125 to 0 (S1714), and then performs an ending operation in which the elapsed time from the start of the ending operation is preset. It is determined whether or not the power time (ending time) has passed (S1717). If the ending time has not elapsed, the ending operation is continued, so the large winning opening process is terminated (No in S1717). On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (Yes in S1717), then the big winning opening operation control unit 237 turns off the big hit game flag after passing through the game state setting process by the game control unit 200 (S1718). The large winning opening process is completed (S1719). The content of the game state setting process will be described later.

When it is determined in S1702 that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the opening (No in S1702), then the large winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not the ending is in progress (S1715). Then, if the ending is in progress (Yes in S1715), the operations after S1717 are executed.

On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the ending (No in S1715), then the large winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not the large winning opening 125 is operating (opening) (S1716). Then, if it is not in operation (No in S1716), the operation after S1705 is executed, and if it is in operation (Yes in S1716), the operation after S1708 is executed.
It should be noted that the effect performed in the small hit game described above is the same as the effect performed in the short hit game, and it is not possible to distinguish between the short hit and the small hit from the effect.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 18 shows the contents of the game state setting process (S1718) by the game control unit 200, which is executed when the ending time has elapsed (Yes in S1717).
When the game state setting process is performed, the jackpot game flag is ON in S1701 of FIG. 17 as a premise. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, the game control unit 200 first determines the type of the jackpot (S1801, S1802, S1803, S1806). These determinations can be made, for example, based on the type of symbol set as setting information in the RAM 203 in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 12). Since these judgments are substantially the same as those of S1202, S1203, and S1205 in the jackpot judgment processing (FIG. 12), the judgment results of S1202, S1203, and S1205 may be used.

If it is a small hit (Yes in S1801), the game state is not changed, so the game state setting process is terminated.
When the type of jackpot is a jackpot in a low-probability time-saving game state (No in S1801, Yes in S1802, Yes in S1803), the game control unit 200 turns on the time-saving flag (S1804). As a result, the game state of the RAM 203 is set to the low-probability time-saving game state. Further, the game control unit 200 sets the initial value of the lottery number J (S1805), and ends the game state setting process. The initial value of the lottery number J is 100 times in the illustrated example. Therefore, if the lottery in the low-probability time-saving game state is performed 100 times, the low-probability time-saving game state ends and the low-probability time-saving non-game state is reached.

On the other hand, when the type of jackpot is a jackpot in a low-probability time-saving non-game state (No in S1801, Yes in 1802, No in S1803), the game control unit 200 performs processing without turning on both the time-saving flag and the high-accuracy flag. finish. Therefore, the setting of the gaming state of the RAM 203 for the gaming after this jackpot is a low-probability time-saving non-gaming state.

When the type of jackpot is a jackpot in a high-probability time-saving game state (No in S1801, S1802, Yes in S1806), the game control unit 200 turns on the time-saving flag (S1807) and sets the initial value of the number of lottery J. (S1808). In this case, the initial value of the lottery number J is 10,000 times in the illustrated example. Further, the game control unit 200 turns on the high accuracy flag (S1809) and sets the initial value of the lottery number X (S1810). The initial value of the lottery number X is 10,000 times in the illustrated example. As a result, the game state of the RAM 203 is set to the high-probability time-saving game state. Then, if the lottery in this high-probability time-saving game state is performed 10,000 times, the high-probability time-saving game state ends, and the low-probability time-saving non-game state is established.

On the other hand, when the type of jackpot is a jackpot in a high-probability time-saving non-game state (No in S1801, S1802, S1806), the game control unit 200 turns on only the high-probability flag (S1809), and the initial value of the number of lottery times X. (10000 times) is set (S1810). As a result, the setting of the gaming state of the RAM 203 becomes a high-probability time-saving non-gaming state. Then, if the lottery in this high-probability time-saving no-game state is performed 10,000 times, the high-probability time-saving no-game state ends, and the low-probability time-saving no-game state is reached.

[Electric tulip processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the contents of the electric tulip processing among the electric accessory processing shown in S804 of FIG.
In the electric tulip processing, the electric tulip motion control unit 238 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1901). When the auxiliary game flag is OFF, the electric tulip 123 is not opened, so the electric tulip processing is terminated (No in S1901). On the other hand, when the auxiliary game flag is ON (Yes in S1901), the electric tulip motion control unit 238 then determines whether or not the electric tulip 123 is operating (S1902).

When the electric tulip 123 is not operating (No in S1902), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 sets the operation pattern of the electric tulip 123 (S1903) and operates the electric tulip 123 with the set operation pattern (S1904). .. Here, the operation pattern is set based on the time reduction flag set in the processing of S1404, S1414 in FIG. 14, S1804, S1807 in FIG. 18, and the like. For example, if the time saving flag is OFF at the time of setting by S1903, an operation pattern that opens once with an opening time of 0.15 seconds is set, and if the time saving flag is ON, the opening time is 1.80 seconds. An operation pattern that opens three times in time is set. In this way, normally, when the time saving flag is ON (when the time saving state is in the state), the electric tulip 123 is opened a plurality of times for a long time, and it becomes easy to win a prize in the second starting port 122 (electric chew support). Is done. It should be noted that a plurality of operation patterns (types of auxiliary games) of the electric tulip 123 when the time reduction flag is ON or OFF are prepared, and the operation is performed according to the type of hit determined by the normal symbol processing (see FIG. 16). It may be configured to set a pattern.

When it is determined in S1902 that the electric tulip 123 is operating (Yes in S1902), or after the electric tulip 123 is operated in S1904, the electric tulip operation control unit 238 elapses the opening time in the set operation pattern. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1905). If the opening time has not elapsed, the operating state (opening state) of the electric tulip 123 is continued, so that the electric tulip processing is terminated (No in S1905). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1905), the electric tulip motion control unit 238 turns off the auxiliary game flag and ends the electric tulip processing (S1906).

[Random number judgment method]
Here, a random number determination method, which is performed in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 12), the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 13), the normal symbol process (FIG. 16), and the like, will be described in detail.
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a random number (determination table) used in the special symbol lottery and the ordinary symbol lottery in the present embodiment.
FIG. 20 (a) shows a configuration example of a jackpot random number used in a special symbol lottery, FIG. 20 (b) shows a configuration example of a jackpot symbol random number used in a special symbol lottery, and FIG. 20 (c) shows a special symbol lottery. An example of the structure of the reach random number used and an example of the structure of the winning random number used in the ordinary symbol lottery are shown in FIG. 20 (d).

Referring to FIG. 20A, as the determination value of the jackpot random number, the jackpot when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 at the time of jackpot determination is in the low probability state and the jackpot when the gaming state at the time of jackpot determination is in the high probability state. Two types of and a small hit are set. The range of random numbers (big hit random numbers) is 300 from 0 to 299. In the case of a special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) in a low probability state, only one winning value is set, and the winning probability is 1/300. Further, in the case of a special symbol lottery in a high probability state, 10 winning values are set, and the winning probability is 10/300 (= 1/30). That is, in the illustrated example, when the starting ports 121 and 122 are won in a high probability state and the special symbol lottery is performed, the winning probability is 10 times higher than in the case where the special symbol lottery is performed in the low probability state. Further, the winning value of the small hit is set to three regardless of whether it is in the low probability state or the high probability state, and the winning probability is 3/300 (= 1/100).
Here, to explain by taking a special symbol lottery in a low probability state as an example, the jackpot random number values (see S903 and S910) acquired by winning a prize in the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 are shown in FIG. 20. It is determined whether or not the value matches "5", which is the winning value of the big hit lottery in the low probability state in (a). Although detailed description is omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery in a high probability state and the special symbol lottery for small hits.

With reference to FIG. 20B, five types of jackpot symbols are prepared: low-probability symbol A, low-probability symbol B, high-probability symbol A, high-probability symbol B, and latent symbol. Here, the low-probability symbol A and the low-probability symbol B are symbols indicating that they are jackpots in a low-probability state, and among them, the low-probability symbol A is a jackpot in a long hit (8 rounds) and a low-probability short-time gaming state. Show that there is. The low-probability symbol B indicates that it is a long hit (4 rounds) and a big hit in a low-probability short-time gaming state. The high-probability symbol A and the high-probability symbol B indicate that they are long hits (15 rounds) and big hits in a high-probability time-shortening gaming state. The high-probability symbol C and the high-probability symbol D indicate that they are long hits (8 rounds) and big hits in a high-probability time-saving gaming state. The high-probability symbol E indicates a short hit (2 rounds) and a high-probability short-time non-game state jackpot. The latent probability symbol is a symbol indicating that it is a short hit (2 rounds) and a big hit in a high-probability short-time non-game state. Therefore, the high-probability symbol B and the latent probability symbol have the same gaming state after the big hit game, but the latent probability symbol is a condition for performing a latent effect that does not clearly notify the player that the high-probability symbol is in the high-probability state. Therefore, it is provided separately from the high-probability symbol B. The range of random number values is 250 from 0 to 249. Further, in the jackpot symbol random number, a winning value is set for each of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122, which trigger the special symbol lottery.

In the low-probability symbol A, 35 values are assigned as winning values to both the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122. Therefore, if the jackpot is won, the probability of winning the low probability symbol A is 35/250 (= 7/50).
In the low-probability symbol B, 15 values are assigned as winning values to both the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122. Therefore, if the jackpot is won, the probability of winning the low probability symbol B is 15/250 (= 3/50).

In the high-probability symbol A, 20 values are assigned as winning values when the first starting port 121 is won. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol A is 20/250 (= 2/25).
On the other hand, 150 values are assigned as winning values when a prize is won in the second starting port 122. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol A is 150/250 (= 15/25).

In the high-probability symbol B, five values are assigned as winning values when the first starting port 121 is won. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol B is 5/250 (= 1/50).
On the other hand, 25 values are assigned as winning values when a prize is won in the second starting port 122. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol B is 25/250 (= 1/10).

In the high-probability symbol C, 25 values are assigned as winning values when the first starting port 121 is won. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol C is 25/250 (= 1/10).
On the other hand, 10 values are assigned as winning values when a prize is won in the second starting port 122. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol B is 10/250 (= 1/25).

In the high-probability symbol D, 25 values are assigned as winning values when the first starting port 121 is won. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol D is 25/250 (= 1/10).
On the other hand, 10 values are assigned as winning values when a prize is won in the second starting port 122. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol D is 10/250 (= 1/25).

In the high-probability symbol E, 25 values are assigned as winning values when the first starting port 121 is won. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol E is 25/250 (= 1/10).
On the other hand, five values are assigned as winning values when a prize is won in the second starting port 122. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol E is 5/250 (= 1/50).

In the latent probability symbol, 100 values are assigned as winning values when the first starting port 121 is won. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121, the probability of winning the latent symbol is 100/250 (= 2/5).
On the other hand, the winning value in the latent probability symbol is not assigned to the second starting port 122, and if the second starting opening 122 is won, the winning value in the latent probability symbol will not be won.

Here, to explain using the low-probability symbol A as an example, the jackpot symbol random value (see S903 and S910) acquired by winning a prize in the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 is shown in FIG. 20 (b). ), It is determined whether or not it matches the winning value of the low probability symbol A, "0 to 34". Although detailed description is omitted, the same applies to special symbol lottery such as low-probability symbol B.

As described above, by making the winning probability of the type of jackpot different between the case where the first starting port 121 is won and the case where the second starting opening 122 is won, various playability can be provided. In addition, the arrangement of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 on the game board 110 is devised so that it becomes easier to aim at either the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 in a specific state (mode). It is also possible to encourage the player to participate in a more active game by configuring the above.

Next, the determination of the reach random number will be described. The reach random number is set according to the number of holdings as described later. Here, as an example, a reach random number when the number of pending numbers is 0 will be described.
With reference to FIG. 20 (c), the range of random number values is 250 from 0 to 249, and the variation pattern (variation time) in which the reach effect can be executed is set (for example, 13.5 seconds or more). Twenty-two random number values are assigned to (with reach), and 228 random number values are assigned to the lottery result (without reach) in which the reach effect is not a feasible variation pattern (for example, less than 13.5 seconds). That is, in the illustrated example, if a big hit is not made in the special symbol lottery, the reach effect is performed with a probability of 22/250 (= 11/125). Here, the reach effect is an effect performed on the image display unit 114 when the special symbol changes. Hereinafter, the effect at the time of special symbol change in which the reach effect is not a feasible variation pattern is referred to as a non-reach effect, and the effect at the time of a special symbol change in which the reach effect is a feasible variation pattern is referred to as a reach effect. Called.

Here, to explain with reach as an example, the reach random value (see S903 and S910) acquired by winning a prize in the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 is the reach in FIG. 20 (c). It is determined whether or not it matches the winning value of "0 to 21". Although detailed explanation is omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery without reach.

In many cases, when the special symbol changes, it is linked to the display control of the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 (hereinafter, when these are not distinguished, they are referred to as special symbol indicators 221 and 222). , The image display unit 114 performs an effect using a decorative pattern. The decorative design is configured by displaying, for example, three rows of symbols consisting of a number sequence in which numbers 1 to 9 are continuously written in the vertical direction. Then, at the same time that the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display units 221 and 222 is started, the decorative symbol displayed on the image display unit 114 starts scrolling. Further, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the special symbol (the start of scrolling of the decorative symbol), the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the decorative symbol is also fixedly stopped. Generally, when the judgment result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, three identical numbers are lined up in a straight line extending horizontally or diagonally in the stop display of the decorative symbol. The effect using the decorative symbol performed along with the variable display of this special symbol is called a variable effect.

In the effect with reach, the following operations are performed with respect to the decorative pattern as a variable effect. First, one of the two symbols (sequential sequence) is temporarily stopped before the decorative symbol that scrolls in the vertical (horizontal) direction is fixedly stopped. At this time, the same numbers are temporarily stopped on a straight line extending horizontally (vertically) or diagonally. Further explaining, if the decorative pattern is scrolled in the vertical direction, the same numbers are temporarily stopped in one row in the horizontal direction.
Next, the last row gradually slows down the scroll speed, giving the player the expectation that three identical numbers will be aligned on a straight line. Then, after the last row is temporarily stopped, the three symbols are fixedly stopped.
Here, in the effect with reach, the SP reach effect or the SP / SP reach effect may be performed before the three symbols are fixedly stopped. The SP reach production is generally called super reach or special reach, and is a production that expects a big hit rather than a reach, and is a production of moving images in which various characters appear and the story unfolds. .. In addition, SP / SP reach is generally called super super reach or special special reach, and it is a production that expects a bigger hit than SP reach, and it is a moving image in which various characters appear and the story unfolds. It is a production of.
Further, as shown in FIG. 21 described later, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation time is longer (for example, 90 seconds or 60 seconds), the SP reach or the SP / SP reach effect is set to be executed. .. It should be noted that the above-mentioned variable effect performed together with the effect with reach is also referred to as a variable effect during reach.
On the other hand, in the non-reach production, the horizontal (vertical) or horizontal (vertical) or horizontal (horizontal) or horizontal (horizontal) or horizontal (horizontal) or horizontal (horizontal) or horizontal (horizontal) or horizontal (horizontal) or horizontal (horizontal) or horizontal (horizontal) or horizontal (horizontal) or horizontal (horizontal) or horizontal (horizontal) or vertical (horizontal) or vertical (horizontal) or vertical The symbol is fixed and stopped when the same numbers are not aligned on a straight line that extends diagonally.

As described above, when the result of the determination of the jackpot random number is a loss, the reach random number can perform the reach effect as a variable pattern in which the reach effect can be executed on the image display unit 114, or the reach effect can be executed. Decide whether to perform a non-reach effect that does not have a variable pattern. In addition, the reach random number is designed to give the player an appropriate sense of expectation while enabling efficient game progress by changing the execution ratio of the effect with reach according to the number of holdings.
In addition, if the jackpot is won, the effect with reach will be performed, and finally the decorative pattern will be fixedly stopped with the same numbers aligned on a straight line extending horizontally (vertically) or diagonally. Can be done. On the other hand, in the case of winning a small hit or losing, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped in the state where the same numbers are not aligned on the above straight line.

Next, the determination of the winning random number used in the ordinary symbol lottery will be described.
With reference to FIG. 20 (d), the range of random number values is 10 from 0 to 9, and one value is assigned as the winning value when the time saving flag is OFF, and as the winning value when the time saving flag is ON. Nine values are assigned. Therefore, if the game ball passes through the gate 124 and the normal symbol lottery is performed in the state of no time saving, the player wins with a probability of 1/10. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the gate 124 and the normal symbol lottery is performed in the time saving state, the player wins with a probability of 9/10.

Here, to explain by taking the time saving flag OFF as an example, the winning random number value (see S1003) acquired when the game ball of the gate 124, the first starting port 121, or the second starting port 122 passes through is shown in FIG. 20 (see S1003). It is determined whether or not it matches with "0" which is the winning value of the time saving flag OFF in d). Although detailed explanation is omitted, the same applies to the ordinary symbol lottery with the reduced working hours flag ON.

Further, although not particularly shown, it is possible to set a plurality of hits having different contents (opening pattern of the electric tulip 123) of the auxiliary game to be performed when it is determined to be a hit in the ordinary symbol lottery. In this case, for example, a winning symbol random number for specifying the type of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery is set as in the case of the jackpot symbol random number (see FIG. 17B) for specifying the type of jackpot in the special symbol lottery. Then, the game control unit 200 acquires the random number value of the winning symbol random number together with the random number value of the winning random number by the gate switch process (see FIG. 10) by the random number acquisition unit 231 and is acquired by the normal symbol determination unit 232. Identify the type of hit based on the random number value.
The range of random numbers, the ratio of winning values, and the values of winning values shown in the configuration example of each random number in FIG. 20 are merely examples, and are not limited to the values shown in the drawings.

[Example of setting fluctuation pattern]
Next, an example of setting the fluctuation pattern and the table used in the fluctuation pattern selection process shown in FIG. 13 will be described.
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a variation pattern used in the variation pattern selection process shown in FIG. 13 and a setting example of a table. Note that FIG. 21 shows a setting example of a low-probability time-saving non-game state. Although not shown, a table for setting the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process is individually provided for other gaming states such as the high-probability time-saving gaming state.
Further, FIG. 21 shows a setting example when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting opening 121. When the game ball wins in the second starting port 122, a table for setting the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process may be individually provided, or the game ball wins in the first starting port 121. The table to be referred to in some cases may be shared and referenced.

As shown in FIG. 21, when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit (Yes in S1302 of FIG. 13), the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 determines the fluctuation pattern based on the jackpot symbol and the fluctuation pattern random number. .. Specifically, in the special symbol variation control unit 233, the variation pattern random number value (see S903) acquired together with the jackpot random number value by the random number acquisition unit 231 matches any of the variation pattern random number values assigned to each jackpot symbol. The fluctuation pattern is determined based on whether or not it is done. For example, when the jackpot symbol is "high probability symbol A" and the variation pattern random number is "51", it matches the variation pattern random number range "50 to 69" assigned to "high probability symbol A" in FIG. 21. Therefore, "PB3" is selected as the fluctuation pattern. The special symbol fluctuation time in this "PB3" is "90.18 seconds".

Further, when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is wrong (No in S1302 of FIG. 13), the special symbol variation control unit 233 is based on the hold number U1 of the first special symbol lottery, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number. To determine the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, when the reserved number U1 of the first special symbol lottery is "0", the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 has a reach random number value (see S903) acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231 together with the jackpot random number value. , It is determined whether it is allocated to the reach random number range "0 to 21" or the reach random number range "22 to 249" allocated to the hold number "0" of "missing" in FIG. 21. When the acquired reach random number is included in the reach random number range "0 to 21", the variation pattern random number value (see S903) acquired together with the jackpot random number value by the random number acquisition unit 231 is the reach random number range "0 to 21". 21 ”Variation pattern The variation pattern is determined based on which of the random number values is matched. For example, when the fluctuation pattern random number is "51", it matches the fluctuation pattern random number range "50 to 89", so "PR4" is selected as the fluctuation pattern.

As described above, the game control unit 200 has the fluctuation pattern random value (see S903 and S910 in FIG. 9) acquired when the game ball wins the start ports 121 and 122, and the gaming state and reach of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the conditions such as the presence or absence of the effect and the number of holdings. Then, the information on the fluctuation pattern of the determined special symbol is included in the fluctuation start command, and is sent from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300. As will be described later, in the effect control unit 300, as an effect when the special symbol changes, an effect corresponding to the variation time specified based on the information of the variation pattern included in the variation start command (executable in the variation time). Is selected and executed.

[Structure of RAM of game control unit and RAM of effect control unit for performing advance notice effect based on prior determination]
Subsequently, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the game control unit 200 and the RAM 303 of the effect control unit 300 in the present embodiment for executing the advance notice effect based on the prior determination will be described.
FIG. 22 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of RAM 203 (see FIG. 3) of the game control unit 200 according to the present embodiment. 22 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the storage area 204, and FIG. 22 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the storage units shown in FIG. 22 (a).

As shown in FIG. 22A, the RAM 203 includes a storage area 204 as a special symbol hold storage area for storing the jackpot random numbers acquired by the jackpot random number lottery. The storage area 204 has eight storage units corresponding to the maximum number of holdings of the first starting port 121 and the number of holdings of the second starting port 122 (when the upper limit of each holding number is 4). .. Specifically, the storage area 204 includes a first storage unit 204a, a second storage unit 204b, a third storage unit 204c, a fourth storage unit 204d, a fifth storage unit 204e, a sixth storage unit 204f, and a seventh storage unit. It has a unit 204g and an eighth storage unit 204h.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22B, each of these storage units 204a to 204h is an area in which information indicating the distinction between the winning start ports (first start port 121 or second start port 122) is stored. It has an area where the acquired jackpot random number is stored, an area where the symbol random number is stored, an area where the reach random number is stored, and an area where the fluctuation pattern random number is stored. That is, a jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number are stored in each of the storage units 204a to 204h.

Here, each random number is stored in order from the first storage unit 204a. More specifically, for example, when no random number is stored in any of the first storage unit 204a to the eighth storage unit 204h, the acquired random number is stored in the first storage unit 204a. Further, for example, when a random number is already stored in the first storage unit 204a to the fourth storage unit 204d, the acquired random number is stored in the fifth storage unit 204e.

FIG. 23 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3) of the effect control unit 300 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23A is a block diagram showing the configurations of the reserved storage areas 305 and 306, and FIG. 23B is a block diagram showing the configurations of the storage units shown in FIG. 23A.
As shown in FIG. 23 (a), the RAM 303 includes a first hold storage area 305 and a second hold storage area 306 as hold status storage areas for storing the situation in which the hold ball is held. The first reserved storage area 305 and the second reserved storage area 306 correspond to a hold for winning a prize in the first starting port 121 and a holding for winning a prize in the second starting port 122, respectively, and each has four storage units. Have. Specifically, the first reserved storage area 305 has a first storage unit 305a, a second storage unit 305b, a third storage unit 305c, and a fourth storage unit 305d. Further, the second reserved storage area 306 has a first storage unit 306a, a second storage unit 306b, a third storage unit 306c, and a fourth storage unit 306d.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23B, each of these storage units 305a to 305d and 306a to 306d has a hold flag storage area for turning on / off the hold flag and a notification flag storage for turning on / off the notification flag. Has an area and. The hold flag is a flag for identifying the presence or absence of the hold ball for each of the storage units 305a to 305d and 306a to 306d. That is, for example, when the number of holdings due to winning the first starting port 121 is 3, the holding flag is turned ON in the three holding flag storage areas of the first to third storage units 305a, 305b, and 305c. The notification flag is a flag for setting whether or not to perform the advance notice effect for each reserved ball based on the preliminary determination result. In the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can set whether or not to perform the advance notice effect based on the preliminary determination result according to the game state and the state of the effect. Therefore, the notification flag is turned ON when the advance notice effect is performed, and the notification flag is turned OFF when the advance notice effect is not performed. For example, when the advance notice effect is given to the third reserved ball among the above three reserved balls, the notification flag is turned ON in the notification flag storage area of the third storage unit 305c.

Further, although not particularly shown, apart from the configuration shown in FIG. 22 (a), the RAM 203 has an area in which the pre-determination information is stored (hereinafter referred to as a pre-determination information storage area). The pre-determination information is information obtained by the pre-determination process (see S904 and S911 in FIG. 9) based on each of the above random numbers. The content of the pre-judgment information is the same as the information obtained as various judgment results in the special symbol processing (see FIG. 11). If it is, it is information for indicating the type of the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is the length at which the reach effect can be executed, or the content of the fluctuation pattern. The pre-judgment information stored in the pre-judgment information storage area is unique to the information regarding the hold corresponding to the winning ball (holding ball) for which the pre-judgment processing has been performed (hereinafter referred to as hold information), or separately from this hold information. At the timing, it is included in the pre-determination result command and sent from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300.

[Preliminary judgment processing]
Next, the preliminary determination process (see S904 and S911 in FIG. 9) will be described in detail.
In the pre-determination process in the present embodiment, the game control unit 200 performs pre-determination as follows using a random number table similar to the random number configuration example described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the contents of the preliminary determination process (S904, S911 in FIG. 9) according to the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 24, the game control unit 200 first determines whether or not the game state is a high-probability state (S2401), and if it determines that the game state is a high-probability state (Yes in S2401), the game control unit 200 is for the high-probability state. A table is selected and the jackpot random number and the jackpot symbol random number are pre-determined (S2402). On the other hand, when it is determined as No in S2401, the table for the low probability state is selected, and the jackpot random number and the jackpot symbol random number are pre-determined (S2403).

After the pre-determination of the jackpot random number and the jackpot symbol random number of S2402 or S2403, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (S2404), and determines that the game state is the time saving state (Yes in S2404). A table for the time saving state is selected, and the reach random number is pre-determined (S2405). Further, a table for the time saving state is selected, and the fluctuation pattern random number is pre-determined (S2406).
On the other hand, when it is determined as No in S2404, the table for the time saving stateless state is selected and the reach random number is preliminarily determined (S2407). Further, a table for time saving and no state is selected, and the fluctuation pattern random number is pre-determined (S2408).

After that, the game control unit 200 obtains the result of the pre-determination of the jackpot random number obtained as described above, the result of the pre-determination of the jackpot symbol random number, the result of the pre-determination of the reach random number, and the result of the pre-determination of the fluctuation pattern. It is stored in the pre-determination information storage area as the pre-determination information (S2409). Further, in order to transmit the advance determination information to the effect control unit 300, the advance determination result command including the advance determination information is set in the RAM 203 (S2410).

Here, the above-mentioned pre-determination includes a random number value (see S903 and S910 in FIG. 9) acquired according to the winning of the game ball to the starting ports 121 and 122, and a determination table used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 20). This was done using a judgment table having the same configuration as (see). That is, the determination itself after selecting the determination table to be used is the same as the determination in the jackpot determination process (see S1201 in FIG. 12). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the subroutine of the jackpot determination process (see S1108 and FIG. 12 in FIG. 11) used in the special symbol process (see FIG. 11) is called to determine the random number in the above-mentioned preliminary determination.

With such a configuration, in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to prepare a processing function (subroutine) for determining a random number separately from the jackpot determination process in order to determine the random number in the pre-determination process. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of control instructions and suppress an increase in the size of the program related to the jackpot determination process and the pre-determination process. Further, as described above, when the determination table used for the pre-judgment has the same configuration as the determination table used for the jackpot determination, the determination table used for the jackpot determination may also be used for the pre-determination.

Further, although only the preliminary determination (whether or not it is a big hit) regarding the special symbol lottery has been described here, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern when performing the variation display and the stop display of the special symbol is also pre-reading (preliminary determination). I do. For the selection of the variation pattern in the special symbol lottery, the random value for the variation pattern selection (see S903 and S910 in FIG. 9) and the variation pattern table (see FIG. 21) acquired according to the winning of the game ball to the starting ports 121 and 122. (See) and (see S1109 and FIG. 13 in FIG. 11). Therefore, even in the look-ahead of the fluctuation pattern, the random value for selecting the fluctuation pattern acquired at the time of winning and the look-ahead table having the same configuration as the fluctuation pattern table used in the fluctuation pattern selection processing of the special symbol processing are used for selection. Fluctuation patterns can be pre-read.

In this case, in order to pre-read the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process, the subroutine of the variation pattern selection process used in the special symbol process (see FIG. 11) (see S1109 and FIG. 13 in FIG. 11) is called and used. be able to. Further, as for the look-ahead table used for the look-ahead of the variation pattern selection, the variation pattern table used in the variation pattern selection process of the special symbol processing may be used. With this configuration, the number of control instructions related to look-ahead of variation pattern selection can be reduced, and an increase in the size of the program can be suppressed.

If the pre-judgment process and the jackpot judgment process at the time of special symbol change are performed by the same subroutine using the same judgment table group, the execution time of each process is different, so that the pre-judgment result and the special symbol change time. The judgment result by the jackpot judgment processing may be different. That is, after the execution of the pre-determination process, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (whether it is a high-probability state or a low-probability state, a time-saving state or a time-saving no state) has changed by the start of the special symbol change. In this case, since different types of determination tables are used depending on the game state, the specific determination table used for determination differs between the execution of the pre-determination process and the execution of the jackpot determination process. .. Therefore, even if the same random number value acquired at the time of winning the starting ports 121 and 122 is used, the preliminary determination result and the determination result of the jackpot determination process may differ. In such a case, if the game state changes by the start of the special symbol change after the pre-determination process is executed in the effect control unit 300, the effect based on the pre-determination result is not executed (prohibited) control or the like. You may do.

In addition, according to the command output from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 as described above, the effect control unit 300 controls, for example, the image display unit 114, the board lamp 116, the speaker 156, the frame lamp 157, and the like. For example, when the effect control unit 300 receives a command indicating the start of a door opening error, the effect control unit 300 displays a message "Please call a staff member" or an image indicating an abnormal state. It is displayed on 114. Further, the effect control unit 300 limits the output of an alarm or the like indicating an abnormal state from the speaker 156 and the output of music, voice, sound effects, or the like. Further, the effect control unit 300 lights the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 in red, for example, as an embodiment showing an abnormal state.

In addition, here, it has been explained that the effect control unit 300 uses all of the image display unit 114, the panel lamp 116, the speaker 156, and the frame lamp 157 to notify that an error has occurred, but one of these has been described. It may be an embodiment using a unit. Further, the mode of notification may be switched according to the content of the error. For example, when the door opening error of the area 020 in FIG. 24-3 occurs, all of the image display unit 114, the panel lamp 116, the speaker 156, and the frame lamp 157 may be used as described above. Further, when the payout error of the area 02 1 in FIG. 24-3 occurs, the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156 notify that the error has occurred. This makes it possible for a clerk of a gaming store (pachinko hall) or the like to easily determine the urgency of an error that has occurred in a gaming machine.

[Operation of production control unit]
Next, the operation of the effect control unit 300 will be described.
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the operation of the effect control unit 300.
The operation of the effect control unit 300 includes the main process shown in FIG. 25 (a) and the interrupt process shown in FIG. 25 (b). Referring to FIG. 25A, the effect control unit 300 first makes initial settings at startup (S2501), sets the cycle of the CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) (S2502), and then follows the set cycle. , While updating the random number used in the effect control (S2503), the interrupt process is accepted.

The interrupt processing is periodically performed according to the cycle set in S2502. Referring to FIG. 25B, in this interrupt process, the effect control unit 300 receives a command from the game control unit 200 and performs a command reception process (S2511). In this command reception process, the effect content (effect pattern) is selected. Further, the effect control unit 300 performs an effect button process for accepting an operation of the effect button 161 or the like by the player (S2512). After that, the effect control unit 300 performs a command transmission process of transmitting a command including information of the selected effect pattern to the image / sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 (S2513). As a result, the image display and sound output to the image display unit 114, the operation of the movable accessory 115, the light emission of the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157, and the like are performed.

[Command reception processing by the effect control unit]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command reception process (S2511 in FIG. 25B).
In this command reception process, the effect control unit 300 first determines whether or not the pre-determination result command and the hold number increase command have been received (S2601). The pre-determination result command and the hold number increase command are set in the game control unit 200 in the start port switch process shown in FIG. 9 (S906, S907, S913, S914), and the output process (S806) shown in FIG. ) Is a command transmitted to the effect control unit 300.
Then, when it is determined that the pre-determination result command and the hold number increase command have been received (Yes in S2601), the effect control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the hold number held in the RAM 303 (S2602). Further, the effect control unit 300 performs the pre-determination effect selection process based on the pre-determination result command and the hold number increase command (S2603). The content of the pre-determination effect selection process will be described later.

When the received command is not the pre-determination result command or the hold number increase command (No in S2601), the effect control unit 300 determines whether or not the received command is the fluctuation start command (S2604). This fluctuation start command is a command set in the game control unit 200 in the special symbol processing shown in FIG. 11 (S1111) and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output processing (S806) shown in FIG.
If the received command is a variable start command (Yes in S2604), the effect control unit 300 executes the effect selection process (S2605). Further, when the fluctuation start command is received, the random value for effect control used in the effect selection process is acquired. This random number value is a random number value that is periodically updated in S2503 of the main process shown in FIG. 25 (a). The details of the effect selection process will be described later.

When the received command is not a pre-determination result command, a hold number increase command, or a fluctuation start command (No in S2601 and S2604), the effect control unit 300 determines whether or not the received command is a fluctuation stop command (S2606). This fluctuation stop command is a command set in the game control unit 200 in the special symbol processing shown in FIG. 11 (S1114) and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output processing (S806) shown in FIG.
If the received command is a variable stop command (Yes in S2606), the effect control unit 300 executes the process during the end of the variable effect (S2607). In the process during the end of the variation effect, the effect control unit 300 analyzes the received variation stop command and sets the variation effect end command for instructing the end of the effect of the symbol variation in the RAM 303.

If the received command is not a pre-judgment result command, a hold number increase command, a fluctuation start command, or a fluctuation stop command (No in S2601, S2604, and S2606), the effect control unit 300 starts the opening operation of the jackpot game with the received command. It is determined whether or not the command is an opening command (S2608). This opening command is a command set in the stopped processing shown in FIG. 14 (S1418) and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output processing (S806) shown in FIG.
When the received command is an opening command (Yes in S2608), the effect control unit 300 executes the jackpot effect selection process (S2609). The details of the jackpot effect selection process will be described later.

When the received command is not a pre-judgment result command, a hold number increase command, a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, or an opening command (No in S2601, S2604, S2606, and S2608), the effect control unit 300 receives a jackpot game. It is determined whether or not it is an ending command for starting the ending operation of (S2610). This ending command is a command set in the large winning opening process shown in FIG. 17 (S1713) and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process (S806) shown in FIG.
When the received command is an ending command (Yes in S2610), the effect control unit 300 executes the ending effect selection process (S2611). The details of the ending effect selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not a pre-judgment result command, a hold count increase command, a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, or an ending command (No in S2601, S2604, S2606, S2608, and S2610), then the effect control unit 300 , The customer waiting command reception process for shifting the received command to the customer waiting state is executed (S2612). The details of the customer waiting command reception process will be described later.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pre-determination effect selection process (S2603) and the effect selection process (S2605) of FIG. 26.
In the pre-determination effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the pre-determination result command received from the game control unit 200 (S2801). Further, the effect control unit 300 analyzes the hold number increase command received from the game control unit 200 (S2802). Then, the effect control unit 300 selects an effect pattern (pre-determination effect pattern) used in the pre-determination effect based on the pre-determination result command and the hold number increase command (S2803).

Here, as the pre-determination effect pattern, various effect patterns can be provided so as to give notice of the random number determination result by the special symbol processing before the start of the fluctuation based on the random number determination result by the special symbol processing. For example, an effect such as a hold display effect or a continuous advance notice effect can be provided as a pre-determination effect pattern. In the present embodiment, when a reserved ball is generated, a display indicating the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first special symbol hold indicator 218 and the second special symbol hold indicator 219 of the display 130 (see FIG. 2). At the same time, a hold display suggesting the occurrence of hold and the number of holds is performed on the image display unit 114 (hold display effect). Therefore, in this hold display effect, by reflecting the pre-judgment result in the display mode of the hold display, etc., the player is informed of the judgment result when the random number is subsequently determined by the special symbol processing for the hold ball. It can be a suggestive pre-judgment effect.

Here, the case where the hold display effect is used as the pre-judgment effect has been described, but by reflecting it in various effect contents performed before the start of the fluctuation based on the random number determination result by the special symbol processing, various advance notice effects are produced. Will be able to do. For example, an effect using an effect image displayed on the image display unit 114, an effect by emitting light from a board lamp 116 or a frame lamp 157, an effect by the operation of a movable accessory, an effect by acoustic output such as music or sound effects, etc. are performed in advance. It can be set as a judgment effect pattern.

Further, the pre-determination effect is executed in accordance with the symbol change for other winning balls performed before the symbol change for the winning ball (reserved ball) for which the pre-determination is performed. In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is four per one starting port (first starting port 121 or second starting port 122) (see FIG. 9). In addition, priority shall be given to the digestion of the reserved ball at the second starting port 122. In this case, for example, if a preliminary determination is made for a reserved ball having a second starting port 122, a change currently being changed (referred to as the change) is included before the symbol change for the held ball is performed. A maximum of four winning balls will be changed in design. In the advance notice effect related to the reserved ball for which the pre-judgment has been made, if the symbol change is performed multiple times before the symbol change is performed for the reserved ball, the advance notice effect (continuous notice effect) spanning the multiple symbol change. ) May be performed.

Then, the effect control unit 300 sets the hold number command including the value of the hold number after addition and the information of the pre-determination effect pattern selected in the pre-determination effect selection process in the RAM 303 (S2804). The hold number command includes information indicating the pattern in order to notify the CPU 311 of the image / sound control unit 310 of the selected pre-determination effect pattern. By receiving the hold number command, the CPU 311 draws an image or sound corresponding to the selected pre-determination effect pattern on the VDP 314 and creates a display list or the like for output processing. The VDP 314 reads image data and acoustic data for expressing the selected pre-determination effect pattern from the CGROM 315 and SNDROM 316 based on the display list and the like, and expresses the pre-determination effect using the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156. ..

In the effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received fluctuation start command (S2811). Further, the value of the number of holds held in the RAM 303 is subtracted by 1 (S2812). Then, the effect control unit 300 displays on the image display unit 114 based on various setting information (information such as the type of jackpot, the game state after the jackpot game, the fluctuation pattern, etc.) obtained from the analysis result of the fluctuation start command. A variation effect pattern of symbol variation due to an image is selected (S2813).

Finally, the effect control unit 300 sets the variable effect start command in the RAM 303 to instruct the execution start of the selected effect (S2814). The variation effect start command includes information indicating the pattern in order to notify the CPU 311 of the selected variation effect pattern. By receiving the variation effect start command, the CPU 311 draws an image or sound corresponding to the selected variation effect pattern on the VDP 314 and creates a display list or the like for output processing. The VDP 314 reads out image data and acoustic data for expressing the selected variation effect pattern from the CGROM 315 and SNDROM 316 based on the display list and the like, and expresses the variation effect by using the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156.

Although not described in detail, in the selection process of the variation effect pattern of the symbol variation in S2813, the variation effect pattern is determined based on the variation pattern. Based on the variable effect pattern determined here, the variable display of the decorative pattern, the background effect, the advance notice effect, and the like are determined. The decorative symbol variation display is an effect display performed by the image display unit 114 in accordance with the variation display of the special symbol performed by the first special symbol display 221 or the second special symbol display 222. In the variable display of this decorative pattern, a reach effect or the like is executed. In addition, unlike the present embodiment, when a plurality of variation effect patterns are set for the variation pattern, it is one of the effect random numbers (random number updated in S2503 of FIG. 25A). , The effect random number value is acquired when the variation start command is received), and the variation effect pattern may be selected by lottery.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot effect selection process (S2609) of FIG. 26.
In this jackpot effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received opening command (including information about the type of the jackpot symbol) (S3001), and selects an effect pattern (big hit effect pattern) (S3002). .. Then, the effect control unit 300 reads the image data and the acoustic data used for the effect by the selected jackpot effect pattern from the ROM 302, sets the jackpot effect start command instructing the selected effect together with these data in the RAM 303, and sets the RAM 303. The jackpot effect selection process ends (S3003). As a result, the production during the big hit is determined. In the selection of the jackpot effect pattern (S3002), the determination may be made based on the random number value acquired at the time of receiving the command.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending effect selection process (S2611) of FIG. 26.
In this ending effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received ending command (including information about the type of the jackpot symbol) (S3101), and selects the effect pattern (ending effect pattern) (S3102). .. Then, the effect control unit 300 reads the image data and the acoustic data used for the effect by the selected ending effect pattern from the ROM 302, sets the ending effect start command instructing the selected effect together with these data in the RAM 303, and sets the RAM 303. The ending effect selection process ends (S3103). In the selection of the ending effect pattern (S3102), the determination may be made based on the random number value acquired at the time of receiving the command.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting command reception process (S2612) of FIG.
The effect control unit 300 determines whether or not a customer waiting command for shifting to the customer waiting state has been received (S3201). When the customer waiting command is received (Yes in S3201), the effect control unit 300 starts measuring the elapsed time (S3202) and turns on the measurement flag in the RAM 303 (S3203). On the other hand, when the received command is not a customer waiting command (No in S3201), the effect control unit 300 determines whether or not the measurement flag held in the RAM 303 is ON (S3204). If the measurement flag is OFF (No in S3204), the customer waiting command reception process is terminated.

When the measurement flag is ON (after Yes in S3204 or ON in S3203), the effect control unit 300 then determines whether or not the measurement time has reached a predetermined time-up time (for example, 10 seconds). Is determined (S3205). If the time is not up (No in S3205), the customer waiting command reception process is terminated. On the other hand, when the time is up (Yes in S3205), the effect control unit 300 turns off the measurement flag held in the RAM 303 (S3206), and issues a customer wait effect command for performing the customer wait effect (demo effect) in the RAM 303. Is set to and the customer waiting command reception process is terminated (S3207).

When the command reception process is completed as described above, any one of the variable effect start command, the variable effect end command, the jackpot effect start command, the ending effect start command, and the customer waiting effect command is set in the RAM 303.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect button processing (S2512 in FIG. 25B).
In this effect button process, the effect control unit 300 first determines whether or not the operation means such as the effect button 161 by the player has been operated during the predetermined reception period (valid period) (S3301). Here, the operation of the operating means includes pressing the effect button 161 to turn it on, and pressing the center key and surrounding keys of the effect key 162 to turn it ON. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is provided with an operation device other than the effect button 161 and the effect key 162 such as a touch panel, the operation of the device is detected. The effect control unit 300 receives an operation signal from the controller of these devices and detects that the operation has been performed.

If an operation means such as the effect button 161 is operated (Yes in S3301), the effect control unit 300 sets an effect button command including information indicating the operation content of the operation means in the RAM 303 and ends the effect button process. (S3302).

After that, the effect control unit 300 performs the command transmission process (S2513) of FIG. 25B, and issues the command set in the RAM 303 by the above command reception process and effect button process to the image / sound control unit 310 and the lamp. It is transmitted to the control unit 320. Then, based on the received command, the image / acoustic control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 display an image on the image display unit 114, sound output, operate the movable accessory 115, emit light from the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157, and the like. To execute the set effect.

[Variable production pattern table]
32 and 33 are diagrams showing an example of setting a variable effect pattern and a table used in the variable effect pattern selection (S2813) in the effect selection process of FIG. 27 (b). Note that FIG. 32 shows a variable effect pattern table for big hits in the low-probability time-saving no-game state, and FIG. 33 shows a variable effect pattern table for small hits and misses in the low-probability time-saving no-game state.

In the variation effect pattern table for big hits shown in FIG. 32, a plurality of variation effect patterns are set. For the variation patterns "PA1" to "PA6", "PB1" to "PB14", and "PC1 to PC2" set using FIG. 21 above, the variation effect patterns "EA1" to "EA6", ""EB1" to "EB14" and "EC1 to EC2" are associated with each other on a one-to-one basis.
Further, in the variation effect pattern table for small hits and misses shown in FIG. 33, a plurality of variation effect patterns are set. The variation effect patterns "ES1 to ES2" and "ER1" to "ER10" are one-to-one with respect to the variation patterns "PD1 to PD2" and "PR1" to "PR10" set using FIG. 21 above. It is associated.

Here, the variable effect is an effect for notifying the determination result of the special symbol lottery (that is, whether or not a big hit) in a dramatic manner by displaying the decorative symbol in a variable manner and then stopping the display.
Further, in the illustrated variation effect pattern, "pseudo continuous number of times", "normal", "SP reach", "SPSP reach" and "stop symbol" are set. In addition, "-" in each column of the illustrated table indicates that the corresponding effect is not executed.

Here, the "pseudo-continuous number of times" is the number of times of pseudo-continuous production (pseudo-ream). This pseudo-continuous effect is an effect that makes it appear as if a plurality of times of variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in the variable display of one variation of the special symbol. In the pseudo-continuous effect, the effect control unit 300 changes the decorative symbol, temporarily stops the decorative symbol, and then starts the variable display of the decorative symbol again before the reach state is reached. In other words, in the pseudo-continuous production, after the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol are repeated for the set pseudo-continuous number of times, and then the fixed stop is performed to make one change of the special symbol. Finish the variable display. Here, the temporary stop is a pseudo stop state in which the decorative symbol seems to be stopped at first glance, but the symbol is actually slightly swaying. In other words, the temporary stop of the decorative symbol is treated as if the fluctuation is continuing in terms of game control. Further, the fixed stop of the decorative symbol means a state in which the fixed symbol is fixed as a stop symbol in the variable display for one variation of the special symbol.
In the illustrated example, the "pseudo-continuous number" is set to "-", "1", "2", "3", that is, between 0 and 3 times. In addition, the number of pseudo-consecutive times is set in association with the degree of expectation (reliability) that makes a big hit expected. That is, it is set so that the degree of expectation increases as the number of pseudo-consecutive times increases.

"Normal" indicates the type of reach effect. In the illustrated example, any one of "N1", "N2", and "N3" is executed as the type of reach effect.
"SP reach" indicates the type of SP reach effect. In the illustrated example, any one of "SP1", "SP2", and "SP3" is executed as the type of SP reach effect. Further, in the order of "SP1", "SP2", and "SP3", the larger the number, the higher the expectation.

“SPSP reach” indicates the type of SPSP reach effect. In the illustrated example, any one of "SPSP1", "SPSP2", and "SPSP3" is executed as the type of SPSP reach effect. Further, in the order of "SPSP1", "SPSP2", and "SPSP3", the larger the number, the higher the expectation.

The "stop symbol" indicates a combination of decorative symbols displayed as a stop symbol. In the illustrated example, the type of the stop symbol is "777", "666", "444", "RRR", "5X5" and the like. In the illustrated example, the type of the stop symbol is set according to the jackpot type. For example, in the low-probability symbol A and the low-probability symbol B, which are jackpots that are in a low-probability state after the jackpot, even-numbered stop symbols "444" and "666" are set. Further, in the high-probability symbol A and the high-probability symbol C, which are jackpots that are in a high-probability state after the jackpot, odd-numbered stop symbols "777" and "111" are set.

Now, the effect control unit 300 determines the variable effect pattern based on the table shown in FIG. 32. Specifically, the effect control unit 300 selects a variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern set in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 13) based on the table shown in FIG. 32.
For example, in FIG. 32, when the "big hit symbol" is "high probability symbol A" and the variation pattern is "PB1", "EB1" is selected as the variation effect pattern. Then, in this variable effect pattern "EB1", the "pseudo-continuous number of times" is "-", that is, the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed. Further, "N1" is executed as "normal", "SP1" is executed as "SP reach", and "SPSP1" is executed as "SPSP reach".

[Direction image]
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
As shown in FIG. 34, the effect image is displayed on the image display unit 114 under the control of the effect control unit 300. In the present embodiment, the effect image displayed on the image display unit 114 includes a decorative symbol 41, a variable image 51, a reserved image 52, a reserved number display 55, and a fourth symbol 56.
Hereinafter, each of the above-mentioned production images will be described.

[Decorative pattern 41]
As shown in FIG. 34 (1), three decorative symbols 41 are displayed on the image display unit 114. When explaining each of the three symbols constituting the decorative symbol 41 individually, the symbol arranged on the left side is the "left decorative symbol 41", the symbol arranged in the center is the "middle decorative symbol 41", and the right side. The symbol arranged in is referred to as "right decorative symbol 41". Further, when the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 are collectively described, they are referred to as "left and right decorative symbols 41".

The decorative symbol 41 of the present embodiment is composed of a combination of a plurality of image elements. In the present embodiment, as image elements that can form the decorative symbol 41, a number element 411 indicating a number, a number decoration element 412 for decorating the number element 411, and a character element 413 indicating a character are provided. Further, in the present embodiment, a shimmering image (so-called aura) is displayed around the character as a part of the character element 413.

In the variable effect of the decorative symbol 41, the effect control unit 300 first temporarily stops the left decorative symbol 41 (for example, the number "1") after displaying the three decorative symbols 41 in a variable manner by, for example, vertical scrolling. Next, the right decorative symbol 41 (for example, the number "6") is temporarily stopped, then the middle decorative symbol (for example, the number "5") is temporarily stopped, and finally all the decorative symbols 41 are fixedly stopped. In addition, the combination "213" of the decorative symbol 41 which was stopped and displayed, shown in FIG. 34 (1), is an example of the combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. Further, the decorative symbol 41 in which the three are not aligned in this way is referred to as a decorative symbol 41 at the edge. Further, the area in which the left decorative symbol 41 is variablely displayed in the display area of the image display unit 114 is an example of the first area. Further, the area in which the right decorative symbol 41 is variablely displayed in the display area of the image display unit 114 is an example of the second area. Further, among the display areas of the image display unit 114, the area in which the intermediate decorative symbol 41 is variablely displayed is an example of the third area.

[Variable image 51]
As shown in FIG. 34 (1), the image display unit 114 indicates that the special symbol is being changed (during the variation display of the decorative symbol 41) by the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 (see FIG. 5 and the like). The variation image 51 shown is displayed. That is, the variable image 51 is displayed as an image related to the variable display of the special symbol during the variable display of the special symbol. Then, the variable image 51 is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed (in the illustrated example, the lower central portion in the display area of the image display unit 114) at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the special symbol is displayed. The display disappears when the fluctuation stops. Further, a variable pedestal is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed.

Here, the display mode of the variable image 51 is determined based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process. Further, in the variable image 51, for example, the display mode of a color, a pattern, a shape, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “color, etc.”) changes, and the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot is based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process. Is notified or suggested.

[Reserved image 52]
As shown in FIG. 34 (1), the image display unit 114 displays the reserved image 52 based on the information in the storage area corresponding to the current reserved ball in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3 and the like). That is, the reserved image 52 is an image showing that the right to determine the jackpot is reserved. Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image 52 on the screen is determined based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process.
Further, a variable pedestal is displayed in the area where the reserved image 52 is displayed. The variable pedestal of the variable image 51 and the variable pedestal of the reserved image are displayed in different modes.

Further, the reserved image 52 notifies or suggests the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot based on the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination process, for example, by changing the display mode such as color. Further, when the pre-judgment result by the pre-judgment process is a big hit, the color of the type having a higher expectation is displayed than when it is out of order. For example, when white, blue, yellow, green, red, and gold are set as the colors of the reserved image 52, the expected degree may be set to be higher in this order.

Here, as described above, the winning at the first starting port 121 causes a maximum of four holds. Therefore, by winning a prize at the first starting port 121, a maximum of four reserved images 52 are displayed on the image display unit 114. Further, in the present embodiment, the plurality of reserved images 52 are displayed side by side in the region on the right side of the variable image 51 from the position closer to the variable image 51 toward the position away from the variable image 51, that is, from the left side to the right side. To.

Although not shown, a maximum of four holds will occur even if a prize is won at the second starting port 122. Therefore, due to the winning at the second starting port 122, a maximum of four reserved images 52 are displayed on the image display unit 114.
Further, in the present embodiment, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are basically composed of the same or similar forms, respectively.

Further, in the following description, with respect to the four reserved images 52 displayed at the maximum, the "first reserved image 52", the "second reserved image 52", and the "third" are arranged in the order of proximity to the variable image 51, respectively. It may be referred to as "holding image 52" or "fourth holding image 52".

[Holding number display 55]
As shown in FIG. 34 (1), the image display unit 114 displays the hold number display 55 based on the information of the storage area corresponding to the hold ball in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3 and the like). The hold number display 55 is an image showing the hold number. Here, the number of the reserved images 52 displayed on the image display unit 114 changes according to the number of reserved images for winning each of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122.

[4th symbol 56]
As shown in FIG. 34 (1), the image display unit 114 has a special symbol on the image display unit 114 based on the winning of the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 by the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 (see FIG. 5 and the like). The fourth symbol 56, which indicates that the decorative symbol 41 is being varied (during display of variation of the decorative symbol 41), is displayed. The fourth symbol 56 is controlled by the effect control unit 300 and is displayed in a different manner according to the fluctuation and stop of the special symbol.
When explaining each of the three symbols constituting the fourth symbol 56 individually, the symbol arranged on the left side is the "left fourth symbol 56" and the symbol arranged in the center is the "middle fourth symbol 56". , The symbol arranged on the right side is referred to as "right fourth symbol 56". Further, when the left fourth symbol 56 and the right fourth symbol 56 are collectively described, they are referred to as "left and right fourth symbols 56".

In the illustrated example, the fourth symbol 56 is three images corresponding to the decorative symbol 41, respectively, and is displayed in the lower left corner of the image display area of the image display unit 114. The fourth symbol 56 is displayed as an image having a smaller dimension than the decorative symbol 41. Further, as will be described later, the decorative symbol 41 may be displayed in a display mode with high decorativeness or displayed in a display mode with low decorativeness, but the fourth symbol 56 has low decorativeness. It is displayed in the display mode.

The fourth symbol 56 is displayed (for example, vertically scrolled) in an manner indicating that the special symbol is changing due to the winning of the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122. Then, the fourth symbol 56 stops when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. In the illustrated example, the number indicated by the fourth symbol 56 stopped and displayed coincides with the number indicated by the decorative symbol 41. Further explaining, in the example of FIG. 34 (1), the number corresponding to "213" is displayed as the fourth symbol 56.

[Variable production example 1]
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the variation effect (variation effect example 1) of the decorative symbol 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 will be specifically described. The variation effect example 1 is an example of variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 in a low-probability time-saving non-game state.
As shown in FIG. 34 (1), the highly decorative decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114 as the variation of the previous special symbol is completed by the effect control unit 300. And. At this time, the decorative symbol 41, the variable image 51, the reserved image 52, the reserved number display 55, and the fourth symbol 56 are displayed on the image display unit 114.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 34 (2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. In this way, when the variation display of the next special symbol is started, the second, third, and fourth reserved images 52 move toward the position where the variation image 51 is displayed. Further, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51 when the variable display of the next special symbol is started. Further, when the variation display of the next special symbol is started, the hold number display 55 is switched from "4" to "3".
When it is shown in the drawing that the decorative symbol 41 is variablely displayed at a particularly high speed, the decorative symbol 41 is indicated by an arrow (↓) for easy understanding.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 34 (3), the left decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped at a position where it has been fixedly stopped until the start of the change, as shown in FIG. 34 (4), after being changed at a low speed. Ru. The left decorative symbol 41 operates when it is temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, the left decorative symbol 41 (number "4") raises the right hand when temporarily stopped. When the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped in the drawing, it is expressed by using the same display as the double quotation mark in the vicinity of the decorative symbol 41 for easy understanding.
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 34 (5), the right decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped at a position where it has been fixedly stopped until the start of the change, as shown in FIG. 34 (6), after being changed at a low speed. To. The right decorative symbol 41 operates when it is temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, when the right decorative symbol 41 (number "1") is temporarily stopped, the right hand is raised.

When the left and right decorative symbols 41 were temporarily stopped, the middle decorative symbol 41 was fluctuated at a low speed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), and then, as shown in FIG. 34 (7), the middle decorative symbol 41 was fixedly stopped until the start of the fluctuation. Temporarily stopped at the position. The intermediate decorative symbol 41 operates when it is temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, the intermediate decorative symbol 41 (number "2") raises its right hand when it is temporarily stopped.
When the middle decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the three decorative symbols 41 continue to be temporarily stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), and then are confirmed as shown in FIG. 34 (8) as the special symbol stops changing. It will be stopped. The combination “421” of the decorative symbols 41 that have been stopped and displayed, which is shown in FIG. 34 (8), is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. In addition, the fourth symbol 56 also stops as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops.

In this way, the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped and fixedly stopped at the position (variation start position) when the variation display is started. As a result, the next decorative symbol 41 can be smoothly changed without moving the decorative symbol 41 during the temporary stop or the fixed stop to the change start position.
The intermediate decorative symbol 41 is displayed so as to be visible behind the left and right decorative symbols 41 at the time of fluctuation, temporary stop, and fixed stop. In other words, the middle decorative symbol 41 is varied, temporarily stopped, and fixedly stopped while being overlapped on the back side of the left and right decorative symbols 41.

[Variable production example 2]
35 to 37 are views showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 2) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37. In the following description, the points that are different from the variation effect example 1 will be mainly described, and the points that are the same as the variation effect example 1 may be omitted.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, an effect mode according to the gaming state is provided. Specifically, an A mode as an effect mode in a low-probability time-saving non-game state and a B mode as an effect mode in a high-probability time-saving game state are provided.
In the A mode, as shown in FIG. 35 (A-1), a highly decorative decorative symbol 41 is used. As shown in FIG. 35 (A-2), the hold number display 55 is switched from "1" to "0" as the decorative symbol 41 starts to change. Further, after the change of the decorative symbol 41 starts, the left decorative symbol 41 (the number "4" in the illustrated example) is changed at a low speed as shown in FIG. 35 (A-3), and then in FIG. 35 (A). As shown in -4), it is temporarily stopped at the fluctuation start position.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 36 (A-5), the right decorative symbol 41 (the number “4” in the illustrated example) is temporarily stopped at the fluctuation start position. As a result, the temporarily stopped left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 are aligned to establish a reach, and the reach effect is executed. Here, in the present embodiment, when the reach is established, the reach-time design effect, which is an effect using the decorative symbol 41, is performed.

When the reach is established, as shown in FIG. 36 (A-6), a character symbol enlarged display effect is performed in which the character element 413 in the highly decorative left and right decorative symbols 41 is enlarged and displayed as the reach time design effect. .. Specifically, when the reach is established, the character element 413 of the left and right decorative symbols 41 has a wider display area in the image display unit 114 than before the reach is established. On the other hand, the numerical element 411 and the numerical decorative element 412 of the left and right decorative symbols 41 are not enlarged and displayed even if the reach is established.

Further, as a reach time design effect, a separation effect is performed in which the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 are separated from each other. More specifically, when the reach is established, the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 move in a direction away from each other. More specifically, the left decorative symbol 41 is right beside the display area of the image display unit 114 and moves to the left, and the right decorative symbol 41 is right beside the display area of the image display unit 114 and moves to the right. do. In other words, the left and right decorative symbols 41 move in a direction away from the middle decorative symbol 41. In this variation effect, the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 move in a direction away from each other while expanding when the reach is established.

When the separation effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 36 (A-7), the left decorative symbol 41 moves to the left end portion in the display area of the image display unit 114, and the right decorative symbol 41 is the image display unit 114. Move to the right edge of the display area. The display position after the left and right decorative symbols 41 are moved by the separation effect is hereinafter referred to as a separation position.

When the separation effect is performed, the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 are reduced and displayed. Specifically, when the separation effect is performed, the display area of the character element 413 of the left and right decorative symbols 41 in the image display unit 114 is narrowed. In the illustrated example, the display size of the character element 413 of the left and right decorative symbols 41 returns to the display size before the establishment of reach.
Further, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are partially displayed so as to be cut off from the display area of the image display unit 114. Specifically, the character element 413 of the left decorative symbol 41 is cut off from the tip on the left side of the display area of the image display unit 114. In the illustrated example, a part of the aura of the character element 413 of the left decorative symbol 41 and the right hand are cut off from the display area of the image display unit 114. Further, the character element 413 of the right decorative symbol 41 is cut off from the tip on the right side of the display area of the image display unit 114. In the illustrated example, a part of the aura of the character element 413 of the right decorative symbol 41 and the back hair are cut off from the display area of the image display unit 114. On the other hand, the numerical element 411 and the numerical decorative element 412 of the left and right decorative symbols 41 are contained in the display area of the image display unit 114.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 36 (A-8), the intermediate decorative symbol 41 is fluctuated at a low speed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). At this time, the middle decorative symbol 41 is varied on the front side of the left and right decorative symbols 41. Further, at this time, the middle decorative symbol 41 is varied in display size larger than that of each of the left and right decorative symbols 41. In other words, the middle decorative symbol 41 is varied in a manner in which the display area in the image display unit 114 is wider than that of each of the left and right decorative symbols 41. Specifically, the number element 411 of the middle decorative symbol 41 has a wider display area than the number element 411 of each of the left and right decorative symbols 41, and the number decorative element 412 of the middle decorative symbol 41 is the left and right decorative symbols 41. The display area is wider than each number decorative element 412, and the character element 413 of the middle decorative symbol 41 has a wider display area than each character element 413 of the left and right decorative symbols 41.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 37 (A-9), the intermediate decorative symbol 41 (the number “5” in the illustrated example) is temporarily stopped. At this time, the middle decorative symbol 41 is displayed so as to be visible on the front side of the left and right decorative symbols 41. In other words, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are superimposed and displayed on the back side of the middle decorative symbol 41.

When the decorative symbol 41 of the deviation is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 37 (A-10), the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 of the decorative symbols 41 of the deviation move closer to each other. The close-up display effect to be displayed is performed. More specifically, the operation of moving the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 in a direction approaching each other is performed. More specifically, the operation of moving the left decorative symbol 41 to the right side of the display area of the image display unit 114 is performed, and the right decorative symbol 41 is directly beside the display area of the image display unit 114 and moves to the left side. The operation to move to is performed. In other words, the operation of moving the left and right decorative symbols 41 in a direction approaching the middle decorative symbol 41 is performed. As a result, the left and right decorative symbols 41 return to the fluctuation start position. Then, the left and right decorative symbols 41 fit into the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the intermediate decorative symbol 41 is reduced and displayed. Specifically, the numerical element 411, the numerical decorative element 412, and the character element 413 of the intermediate decorative symbol 41 have a narrower display area in the image display unit 114 than when the intermediate decorative symbol 41 is fluctuating at a low speed. .. In the illustrated example, the display size of the intermediate decorative symbol 41 is the same as the display size of the intermediate decorative symbol 41 at the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 35 (A-1)). Further, in this variable effect, the intermediate decorative symbol 41 is reduced and displayed during the execution of the close-up display effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 37 (A-11), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixedly stopped. At this time, the middle decorative symbol 41 is displayed so as to be visible behind the left and right decorative symbols 41. In other words, the middle decorative symbol 41 is displayed so as to be superimposed on the back side of the left and right decorative symbols 41. Further, with the fixed stop of the decorative symbol 41, the fourth symbol 56 is also stopped.

On the other hand, in the B mode, as shown in FIG. 35 (B-1), a decorative symbol 41 having low decorativeness is used. As image elements that can form the decorative symbol 41 used in the B mode, a numerical element 411 and a numerical decorative element 412 are provided. On the other hand, the character element 413 is not provided as an image element that can form the decorative symbol 41 used in the B mode. Further, the display size of the numerical element 411 of the decorative symbol 41 used in the B mode is larger than the display size of the numerical element 411 of the decorative symbol 41 used in the A mode. Further, the display size of the numerical decorative element 412 of the decorative symbol 41 used in the B mode is larger than the display size of the numerical decorative element 412 of the decorative symbol 41 used in the A mode.

Further, the right-handed image 79 is displayed on the image display unit 114, and it is notified that the right-handed image 79 is in a so-called right-handed state, which is advantageous to the player by right-handed. Further, the variable pedestal of the variable image 51 is switched from the display mode before the big hit game (for example, see FIG. 34 (1)) as the gaming state shifts to the high-probability time-saving gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 35 (B-2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started, and then, as shown in FIG. 35 (B-3), the left decorative symbol 41 (the number “4” in the illustrated example). Is temporarily stopped at the fluctuation start position.
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 35 (B-4), the right decorative symbol 41 (the number “4” in the illustrated example) swings up and down, and the same right decorative symbol 41 as the left decorative symbol 41 temporarily stops. A reach-inspiring production is performed to incite the possibility of being done. In this reach fanning effect, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are enlarged and displayed. Specifically, in the reach fanning effect, the display area of the number element 411 in each of the left and right decorative symbols 41 is wider than the display area of the number element 411 in each of the left and right decorative symbols 41 before the reach fanning effect. Further, in the reach fanning effect, the display area of the number decorative element 412 in each of the left and right decorative symbols 41 is wider than the display area of the number decorative element 412 in each of the left and right decorative symbols 41 before the reach fanning effect.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 36 (B-5), the right decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped, and the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 are aligned to execute the reach effect. Here, even in the B mode, when the reach is established, the reach-time design effect, which is an effect using the decorative symbol 41, is performed.
When the reach is established, a numerical enlargement display effect is performed in which the numerical elements 411 of the left and right decorative symbols 41 are enlarged and displayed as the reach time design effect. Specifically, when the reach is established, the display area of the numerical element 411 in each of the left and right decorative symbols 41 becomes wider than the display area of the numerical element 411 in each of the left and right decorative symbols 41 at the time of the reach fanning effect. .. Further, when the reach is established, the display area of the numerical decorative element 412 in each of the left and right decorative symbols 41 becomes wider than the display area of the numerical decorative element 412 in each of the left and right decorative symbols 41 at the time of the reach fanning effect. Further, since the left and right decorative symbols 41 are enlarged and displayed, the distance between the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 is shorter than that before the reach was established.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 36 (B-6), the three decorative symbols 41 are hidden after the transition effect in which the transition image 60 is displayed. As the transition effect, for example, the screen of the image display unit 114 is temporarily whitened (whiteout) or blackened (blackout) so that the decorative pattern 41 is hidden. Can be done.
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 36 (B-7), the SP reach effect is developed. In the present embodiment, the SP reach effect image 61 is displayed as the SP reach effect. This SP reach production image 61 is an image in which a character eating food (inadvertently Sunabei) is drawn.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (B-8), the missed suggestion image 62 suggesting that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery may be missed, specifically, the character (inadvertently Sunabei) ate. An image is displayed showing that the food was not delicious.
Subsequently, after the transition effect shown in FIG. 37 (B-9), the decorative symbol 41 at the deviation is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 37 (B-10). At this time, the decorative symbol 41 at the edge has returned to the display size before the reach fanning effect, that is, the display size at the start of the fluctuation. Further, at this time, the decorative symbol 41 at the deviation is displayed at the fluctuation start position. Then, as shown in FIG. 37 (B-12), after the light emission effect in which the three temporarily stopped decorative symbols 41 shine is performed, the three decorative symbols 41 are shown in FIG. 37 (B-12). Is fixedly stopped.

As described above, in the variation effect example 2, in the B mode, the number enlargement display effect is performed after the reach is established. On the other hand, in the A mode, after the reach is established, the numerical enlargement display effect is not performed. Here, in the A mode, the area in which the effect image other than the numerical element 411 such as the character element 413 can be displayed becomes wider because the numerical element 411 of the left and right decorative symbols 41 is not enlarged and displayed after the reach. Further, in the B mode, since the numerical elements 411 of the left and right decorative symbols 41 are enlarged and displayed after the reach, it is possible to give the player a stronger impression as to which symbol the reach was established. That is, depending on the mode (game state), the effect of focusing on the effect image other than the number element 411 of the decorative pattern 41 and the effect of impressing the player which decorative symbol 41 is aligned to establish the reach. You can switch.

Further, in the variation effect example 2, in the A mode, when the decorative symbol 41 of the deviation is temporarily stopped after the reach is established, the approach display effect is performed and the decorative symbol 41 of the deviation is displayed at the variation start position. To. On the other hand, in the B mode, when the decorative symbol 41 at the deviation is temporarily stopped after the reach is established, the decorative symbol 41 at the deviation is displayed at the variation start position without performing the approach display effect.

Here, when the approach display effect is performed after the three decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped, the player pays attention to the left and right decorative symbols 41 that operate. Then, when the left and right decorative symbols 41 operate, the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 approach each other toward the middle decorative symbol 41, so that the player can combine the three decorative symbols 41 with any of the decorative symbols 41. It becomes easier to recognize whether it is displayed in.
On the other hand, in the high-probability time-saving game state in which the variable effect is performed by the B mode, it becomes easier for the player to expect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit as compared with the low-probability time-saving non-game state. If the decorative symbol 41 on the outlier is temporarily stopped after the reach is established, the player is likely to be discouraged. In this case, if a close-up display effect is performed so that the player pays attention to the decorative symbol 41 on the outskirts, the player's interest may be reduced.

Therefore, in the case of temporarily stopping the decorative symbol 41 of the gap after the reach is established in the high-probability short-time game state, the player is not focused on the decorative symbol 41 of the gap by not performing the close-up display effect. In addition, it suppresses the decline in the interest of the player. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to switch whether or not to make the player pay attention to the decorative symbol 41 of the deviation depending on the game state.
In the B mode, the close-up display effect is not performed, but when the decorative symbol 41 at the deviation is displayed at the fluctuation start position, the decorative symbol 41 at the deviation is temporarily stopped and fixedly stopped. The next fluctuation can be started smoothly.

Further, in the variation effect example 2, in the A mode, the number enlargement display effect is not performed after the reach is established (0%), and in the B mode, the number enlargement display effect is always performed after the reach is established (100%). However, it is not limited to this. For example, in the A mode, after the reach is established, the numerical enlargement display effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. Further, in the B mode, after the reach is established, the numerical enlargement display effect may not be performed with a predetermined probability. However, when the reach is established, the B mode is controlled to perform the numerical enlargement display effect with a higher probability than the A mode. In other words, when the reach is established, the B mode is controlled so that the numerical enlargement display effect is easier to be performed after the reach is established in the B mode than in the A mode. Here, in order to make it easier to perform the number enlargement display effect after the reach is established in the B mode than in the A mode, the number enlargement display effect is always performed after the reach is established in the B mode (100%), and the reach is performed in the A mode. It also includes not performing the numerical enlargement display effect (0%) after the establishment.

Further, the numerical element 411 is taken as a specific identification element for identifying the symbol among the decorative symbols 41. That is, in the present embodiment, when the reach is established, the B mode is controlled so that the specific identification element can be enlarged and displayed more easily after the reach is established in the B mode than in the A mode. Further, in performing the numerical enlargement display effect, the number decorative element 412 may or may not be enlarged and displayed.

Further, in the variable effect example 2, in the A mode, the reach fanning effect, that is, the enlarged display of the numerical element 411 in the left and right decorative symbols 41 is not performed (0%) before the reach is established, and in the B mode, the reach is Before the establishment, the numerical element 411 in the left and right decorative symbols 41 is always enlarged (100%), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the A mode, the reach fanning effect, that is, the numerical element 411 of the left and right decorative symbols 41 may be enlarged and displayed with a predetermined probability before the reach is established. Further, in the B mode, it is not necessary to enlarge and display the numerical element 411 of the left and right decorative symbols 41 with a predetermined probability before the reach is established. However, in the B mode, the probability is higher than in the A mode, and the numerical element 411 of the left and right decorative symbols 41 is controlled to be enlarged and displayed before the reach is established. In other words, the B mode controls the number elements 411 of the left and right decorative symbols 41 so as to be easier to expand before the reach is established in the B mode than in the A mode. Here, in the B mode, it is easier to expand the numerical elements 411 of the left and right decorative symbols 41 before the reach is established than in the A mode. It is also included that the 411 is always enlarged (100%), and in the A mode, the numerical element 411 in the left and right decorative symbols 41 is not enlarged (0%) before the reach is established.
In addition, in performing the reach fanning effect, the number decorative element 412 may or may not be enlarged and displayed.

Further, in the variation effect example 2, both the left and right decorative symbols 41 are enlarged and displayed as the reach fan effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, one of the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 may be enlarged and displayed, and the other may not be enlarged. Further, for example, both the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 may be enlarged and displayed, and one of the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 may be further enlarged and displayed than the other.

Further, in the variation effect example 2, when the decorative symbol 41 of the misalignment is temporarily stopped after the reach is established in the A mode, the approach display effect is always performed (100%), and the reach is established in the B mode. Later, when the decorative symbol 41 of the misaligned stitch is temporarily stopped, the approach display effect is not performed (0%), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even in the case where the decorative symbol 41 of the misalignment is temporarily stopped after the reach is established in the A mode, the approach display effect may not be performed with a predetermined probability. Further, even in the case where the decorative symbol 41 of the misalignment is temporarily stopped after the reach is established in the B mode, the approach display effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. However, when the decorative symbol 41 at the deviation is temporarily stopped after the reach is established, the A mode is controlled to perform the approach display effect with a higher probability than the B mode. In other words, when the decorative symbol 41 of the misaligned stitch is temporarily stopped after the reach is established, the A mode is controlled so as to be closer and easier to perform the display effect than the B mode. Here, when the decorative symbol 41 of the gap is temporarily stopped after the reach is established, the decorative symbol of the gap after the reach is established in the A mode is easier to perform the closer display effect than the B mode. When the 41 is temporarily stopped, the close-up display effect is always performed (100%), and when the decorative symbol 41 of the misalignment is temporarily stopped after the reach is established in the B mode, the close-up display effect is not performed (0%). Is also included.

[Variable production example 3]
38 to 40 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 3) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40. In the following description, the points that are different from the variation effect example 2 will be mainly described, and the points that are the same as the variation effect example 2 may be omitted.
Similar to the variable effect example 2, the variable effect example 3 also has an A mode as an effect mode in the low probability time saving non-game state and a B mode as an effect mode in the high probability time saving game state.

In the A mode, first, the same effect as described with reference to FIGS. 35 (A-1) to 35 (A-4) and 36 (A-5) to 36 (A-8). Is done. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 38 (A-1), the effect button image 63 imitating the effect button 161 is displayed during the variable display of the intermediate decorative symbol 41.

When the player operates the effect button 161 while the effect button image 63 is displayed, the decorative symbol 41 undergoes the transition effect shown in FIG. 38 (A-2) and is as shown in FIG. 38 (A-3). The image is moved upward in the display area of the image display unit 114 while being reduced. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 41 moves to the upper left corner in the display area of the image display unit 114, and the right decorative symbol 41 moves to the upper right corner in the display area of the image display unit 114. Further, at this time, the decorative symbol 41 displayed on the image display unit 114 is a decorative symbol 41 having low decorativeness. That is, the decorative symbol 41 displayed on the image display unit 114 is provided with the numerical element 411 and the numerical decorative element 412, but is not provided with the character element 413. Further, at this time, the intermediate decorative symbol 41 is hidden.
And it develops into SP reach production. As the SP reach effect, the SP reach pre-stage image 64 is displayed. This SP reach first stage image 64 is an image in which a character (inadvertently Sunabei) who cooks food is drawn.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 38 (A-4), the SP reach effect image 61 is displayed and the effect button image 63 is displayed. When the player operates the effect button 161 while the effect button image 63 is displayed, the cut-in image 65 is displayed as shown in FIG. 39 (A-5). This cut-in image 65 is an image depicting the appearance scene of a character (Yushichi, a windmill) as a cooking assistant. At this time, the three decorative symbols 41 are hidden.
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 39 (A-6), the SPSP reach pre-stage image 66 is displayed as the SPSP reach effect. This SPSP reach first stage image 66 is an image depicting a scene in which Sunabei and Yushichi of the windmill inadvertently cooperate to cook a dish.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 39 (A-7), the SPSP reach subsequent image 67 is displayed. The latter part image 67 of this SPSP reach is an image depicting a scene in which Sunabei and Yushichi of the windmill inadvertently eat food. Further, at this time, another effect button image 68 different from the effect button image 63 is displayed. Further, at this time, the effect button 161 protrudes and has a mode similar to that of another effect button image 68.
Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the other effect button image 68 is displayed, it is suggested that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit as shown in FIG. 39 (A-8). The jackpot suggestion image 69 is displayed. This jackpot suggestion image 69 is an image showing that the food that Sunabei and Yushichi of the windmill inadvertently ate was delicious.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 40 (A-9), the three highly decorative symbols 41 are enlarged and displayed in the combination of "444". Specifically, each of the three decorative symbols 41 is displayed in a display size larger than the display size of each of the left and right decorative symbols 41 enlarged and displayed by the character symbol enlarged display effect. Further, at this time, a part of the left decorative symbol 41 and a part of the right decorative symbol 41 are overlapped on the back side of the middle decorative symbol 41, and the middle decoration is more than the display areas of the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41. The display area of the symbol 41 is wider.
The decorative symbol 41 in which all three are aligned is hereinafter referred to as a doublet decorative symbol 41.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 40 (A-10), the doublet decorative symbol 41 is reduced and displayed. Specifically, the display size of each of the doublet decorative symbols 41 returns to the display size of the left and right decorative symbols 41 before the reach is established. Further, at this time, the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 move in the direction of approaching each other. As a result, the doublet decorative symbol 41 returns to the variable start position.

Then, as shown in FIG. 40 (A-11), after the temporarily stopped doublet decorative symbol 41 is light-emitting, the doublet decorative symbol is shown in FIG. 40 (A-12). 41 is fixedly stopped. Further, as the doublet decorative symbol 41 is stopped, the fourth symbol 56 is also stopped. The combination “444” of the decorative symbols 41 that are stopped and displayed, which is shown in FIG. 40 (A-12), is an example of the combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit.

On the other hand, in the B mode, first, it is the same as the effect described with reference to FIGS. 35 (B-1) to 35 (B-4), 36 (B-5) and 36 (B-6). The production is done. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 38 (B-1), the SP reach effect is developed. As the SP reach effect, the SP reach pre-stage image 64 is displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 38 (B-2), the SP reach effect image 61 is displayed. At this time, the effect button image 63 is displayed. When the player operates the effect button 161 while the effect button image 63 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 38 (B-3), a second suggestion that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. The jackpot suggestion image 70 is displayed. This second jackpot suggestion image 70 is an image showing that the food that Sunabei inadvertently ate was delicious.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 38 (B-4), the three decorative symbols 41 having low decorativeness are enlarged and displayed in the combination of "444". Specifically, each of the three decorative symbols 41 is displayed in a display size larger than the display size of the decorative symbol 41 before the reach is established. At this time, a part of the left decorative symbol 41 and a part of the right decorative symbol 41 are overlapped on the back side of the middle decorative symbol 41, and the middle decorative symbol 41 is larger than the display area of the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41. The display area of is wider.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 39 (B-5), the doublet decorative symbol 41 is reduced and displayed. The display size of each of the doublet decorative symbols 41 at this time is larger than the display size of the decorative symbols 41 that have been fixedly stopped (see FIG. 35 (B-1)). Further, at this time, the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 move in the direction of approaching each other. The doublet decorative symbol 41 is displayed at a position different from the fluctuation start position.
Then, as shown in FIG. 39 (B-6), after the temporarily stopped doublet decorative symbol 41 is light-emitting, the doublet decorative symbol 41 is shown in FIG. 39 (B-7). 41 is fixedly stopped. Further, as the doublet decorative symbol 41 is stopped, the fourth symbol 56 is also stopped.

As described above, in the variation effect example 3, in both the A mode and the B mode, the doublet decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a larger size than the display size before the reach is established. As a result, it is possible to produce an impact by using the doublet decorative pattern 41.
Further, in both the A mode and the B mode, the doublet decorative symbol 41 is enlarged and then reduced. At this time, the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 move in a direction approaching each other (see FIGS. 39 (B-5) and 40 (A-10)). As a result, it is possible to more strongly impress the player that the three decorative symbols 41 are aligned.

In the variation effect example 3, it has been described that in the A mode, the enlarged doublet decorative symbol 41 returns to the variation start position while being reduced and displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a result of the enlarged display of the doublet decorative symbol 41 being reduced and displayed, the doublet decorative symbol 41 is displayed at a position different from the fluctuation start position, and the doublet decorative symbol 41 emits light at this position. And may be doublet.
Further, it has been explained that in the B mode, the enlarged doublet decorative symbol 41 is displayed at a position different from the fluctuation start position as a result of the reduced display, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a result of the enlarged display of the doublet decorative symbol 41 being reduced and displayed, the doublet decorative symbol 41 is displayed at the variable start position, and at this position, the light emission effect and the confirmation stop of the doublet decorative symbol 41 are performed. It may be done.

Further, in the variation effect example 3, in the A mode, the display size of each of the doublet decorative symbols 41 reduced and displayed after the enlarged display returns to the respective display sizes of the left and right decorative symbols 41 before the reach is established. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the display size of each of the doublet decorative symbols 41 reduced after the enlarged display may be larger than the respective display sizes of the left and right decorative symbols 41 before the reach is established.
Further, it has been explained that in the B mode, the display size of each of the doublet decorative symbols 41 reduced and displayed after the enlarged display is larger than the display size of the decorative symbols 41 that have been fixedly stopped, but the present invention is limited to this. Not done. For example, the display size of each of the doublet decorative symbols 41 that has been reduced and displayed after the enlarged display may return to the display size of the decorative symbols 41 that have been fixedly stopped.

[Variable production example 4]
41 to 43 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 4) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43. Further, in the following description, the points that are different from the variable effect example 2 and the variable effect example 3 will be mainly described, and the points that are the same as the variable effect example 2 and the variable effect example 3 may be omitted.

First, after the same effect as described with reference to FIGS. 35 (A-1) to 35 (A-4) and 36 (A-5) to 36 (A-7) is performed. As shown in FIG. 41 (1), the intermediate decorative symbol 41 is variablely displayed in the same manner as the effect described with reference to FIG. 36 (A-8).
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 41 (2), the effect button image 63 may be displayed during the variable display of the intermediate decorative symbol 41.

When the player operates the effect button 161 while the effect button image 63 is displayed as shown in FIG. 42 (2) (FIG. 41 (2)), a special symbol is displayed as shown in FIG. 42 (4). A second loss suggestion image 74 suggesting that the lottery result of the lottery may be missed is displayed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 42 (5), the decorative symbol 41 at the deviation is temporarily stopped without developing into the SP reach effect.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 42 (6), a close-up display effect is performed. At this time, the intermediate decorative symbol 41 is reduced and displayed. After the decorative symbol 41 of the deviation is temporarily stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), the decorative symbol 41 of the deviation is fixedly stopped as shown in FIG. 42 (7). The effect described with reference to FIGS. 42 (6) and 42 (7) is the same as the effect described with reference to FIGS. 37 (A-10) and 37 (A-11).

Further, after the variation display of the middle symbol 41 shown in FIG. 41 (1) is performed, a transition effect may be performed as shown in FIG. 41 (3). Then, the decorative symbol 41 moves upward in the display area of the image display unit 114 while being reduced as shown in FIG. 43 (8) through the transition effect shown in FIGS. 43 (3) (FIG. 41 (3)). do. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 41 moves to the upper left corner in the display area of the image display unit 114, and the right decorative symbol 41 moves to the upper right corner in the display area of the image display unit 114. Further, at this time, the decorative symbol 41 displayed on the image display unit 114 is provided with a decorative symbol 41 having low decorativeness, that is, a number element 411 and a number decoration element 412, while a character element 413 is provided. There is no decorative pattern 41.
In addition, it develops into SP reach production. As the SP reach effect, the SP reach pre-stage image 64 is displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 43 (9), the SP reach effect image 61 is displayed. Further, at this time, another effect button image 68 is displayed. Further, at this time, the effect button 161 protrudes and has a mode similar to that of another effect button image 68. When the player operates the effect button 161 while the other effect button image 68 is displayed, the detachment suggestion image 62 is displayed as shown in FIG. 43 (10). Further, at this time, the medium decorative symbol 41 (the number "5" in the illustrated example) having low decorativeness is temporarily stopped. The display size of the middle decorative symbol 41 is larger than that of the left and right decorative symbols 41.

Subsequently, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a state of being switched to a highly decorative mode as shown in FIG. 43 (12) through the transition effect shown in FIG. 43 (11), and is provisionally displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds). It will be stopped. At this time, the display size of the left and right decorative symbols 41 has returned to the display size of the left and right decorative symbols 41 before the character symbol enlarged display effect. Further, at this time, the display position of the left and right decorative symbols 41 in the image display unit 114 has returned from the separated position to the fluctuation start position. That is, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are returned to the fluctuation start position without the approach display effect being performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (13), the light emission effect of the temporarily stopped decorative symbol 41 of the outlier is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. 43 (14), the decorative symbol 41 of the outlier is fixedly stopped. Will be done.

As described above, in the variable effect example 4, after the reach is established, if the decorative symbol 41 of the gap is temporarily stopped without developing into the SP reach effect, the approach display effect is performed and the left and right decorative symbols 41 are performed. The display position of is returned from the separation position to the fluctuation start position. On the other hand, when the SP reach effect is developed after the reach is established and the decorative symbol 41 at the deviation is temporarily stopped after that, the display positions of the left and right decorative symbols 41 are separated from each other without the approach display effect being performed. It has returned to the fluctuation start position.

Here, when the approach display effect is performed after the three decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped, the player pays attention to the left and right decorative symbols 41 that operate. Then, when the left and right decorative symbols 41 operate, the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 approach each other toward the middle decorative symbol 41, so that the player can combine the three decorative symbols 41 with any of the decorative symbols 41. It becomes easier to recognize whether it is displayed in.
On the other hand, when the variable effect develops into the SP reach effect, the decorative symbol 41 at the gap is easier to expect from the player that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit compared to the case where it does not develop. When displayed, the player is likely to be discouraged. In this case, if a close-up display effect is performed so that the player pays attention to the decorative symbol 41 on the outskirts, the player's interest may be reduced.

Therefore, when the decorative symbol 41 of the deviation is temporarily stopped after the development to the SP reach effect, the player is prevented from paying attention to the decorative symbol 41 of the deviation by not performing the close-up display effect. , It suppresses the decline of the player's interest. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to switch whether or not to make the player pay attention to the decorative symbol 41 of the deviation depending on whether or not the SP reach effect is developed.
In addition, after the reach is established, it develops into the SP reach effect, and when the decorative symbol 41 at the gap is temporarily stopped after that, the approach display effect is not performed, but the left and right decorative symbols 41 are changed from the separated position to the start position. By returning to, the next fluctuation can be started smoothly.

Further, in the variable effect example 4, if the decorative symbol 41 of the deviation is temporarily stopped without developing into the SP reach effect after the reach is established, the approach display effect is always performed (100%). .. Further, when the SP reach effect is developed after the reach is established and the decorative symbol 41 at the deviation is temporarily stopped after that, the approach display effect is not performed (0%), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, even if the decorative symbol 41 at the gap is temporarily stopped without developing into the SP reach effect after the reach is established, the approach display effect may not be performed with a predetermined probability. Further, even if the SP reach effect is developed after the reach is established and the decorative symbol 41 at the deviation is temporarily stopped after that, the approach display effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. However, when the decorative symbol 41 at the deviation is temporarily stopped after the reach is established, there is a higher probability that the approach display effect effect will be performed when the SP reach effect does not develop than when the SP reach effect develops. To control. In other words, when the decorative symbol 41 on the outlier is temporarily stopped after the reach is established, it is easier to perform the closer display effect when it does not develop into the SP reach effect than when it develops into the SP reach effect. Control. Here, in the case where the decorative symbol 41 of the misalignment is temporarily stopped after the reach is established, it is easier to perform the closer display effect in the case where the SP reach effect is not developed than in the case where the SP reach effect is developed. , If the SP reach effect does not develop after the reach is established, the approach display effect is always performed (100%), and if the SP reach effect develops after the reach is established, the approach display effect may not be performed (0%). included.

Further, in the variable effect example 4, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the effect button image 63 is displayed (see FIG. 42 (2)), the second off-limitation suggestion image 74 (FIG. 42 (4)). See), but is not limited to this. For example, if the player operates the effect button 161 while the effect button image 63 is displayed, the jackpot suggestion image 69 (see FIG. 39 (A-3)) may be displayed. That is, at the first timing in the variable effect, the first winning effect is selectively performed in either the display of the second outlier suggestion image 74 or the display of the jackpot suggestion image 69 based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. You may.
Further, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the other effect button image 68 is displayed (see FIG. 43 (9)), the detachment suggestion image 62 (see FIG. 43 (10)) is displayed. , Not limited to this. For example, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the other effect button image 68 is displayed, the second jackpot suggestion image 70 (see FIG. 38 (B-3)) may be displayed. That is, in the variation effect, at the second timing after the first timing, either the display of the outlier suggestion image 62 or the display of the second jackpot suggestion image 70 is selectively displayed based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. You may perform the second winning effect.

Further, the effect button image 63 is displayed when the first winning effect is performed, and another effect button image 68 is displayed when the second winning effect is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, in the case of performing the first winning effect, another effect button image 68 may be displayed instead of the effect button image 63. Further, in the case of performing the second winning effect, the effect button image 63 may be displayed instead of the other effect button image 68. However, when the first winning effect is performed, the effect button image 63 is controlled so as to be easier to display than when the second winning effect is performed. In other words, when the second winning effect is performed, the other effect button image 68 is controlled so as to be easier to display than when the first winning effect is performed.

Further, in the variable effect example 4, it was explained that the time for temporarily stopping the decorative symbol 41 at the outskirts is longer in the case of developing into the SP reach effect than in the case of not developing into the SP reach effect after the reach is established. , Not limited to this.
For example, depending on the variable effect, when the SP reach effect is not developed after the reach is established, the temporary stop time of the decorative symbol 41 at the deviation may be longer than when the SP reach effect is developed. However, in the case of developing into the SP reach effect, there is a higher probability than in the case of not developing into the SP reach effect after the reach is established, and the temporary stop time of the decorative symbol 41 at the deviation is controlled to be longer. In other words, in the case where the SP reach effect is developed, the temporary stop time of the decorative symbol 41 at the deviation is controlled to be longer than in the case where the SP reach effect is not developed after the reach is established.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is explained that the temporary stop time of the decorative symbol 41 at the outskirts is longer in the case of developing the SP reach effect than in the case where the reach is not established as in the variation effect example 1. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, depending on the variable effect, the temporary stop time of the decorative symbol 41 at the outskirts may be longer in the case where the reach is not established than in the case where the SP reach effect is developed. However, in the case of developing the SP reach effect, the temporary stop time of the decorative symbol 41 at the deviation is controlled to be longer with a higher probability than in the case where the reach is not established. In other words, in the case of developing the SP reach effect, the temporary stop time of the decorative symbol 41 at the deviation is controlled to be longer than in the case where the reach is not established.

Further, in the variable effect example 4, when the SP reach effect is developed, the light emission effect of the three decorative symbols 41 is always performed (100%), and when the reach is not established, the three decorative symbols 41 are not developed into the SP reach effect. It has been explained that the light emission effect of the decorative symbol 41 is not performed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, if the SP reach effect does not develop after the reach is established, the light emission effect of the three decorative symbols 41 may be performed with a predetermined probability. Further, when the SP reach effect is developed, the light emission effect of the three decorative symbols 41 may not be performed with a predetermined probability. However, it is controlled so that the light emission effect of the three decorative symbols 41 is performed with a higher probability in the case where the SP reach effect is developed than in the case where the SP reach effect is not developed after the reach is established. In other words, it is controlled so that the light emission effect of the three decorative symbols 41 is more likely to be performed when the SP reach effect is developed than when the SP reach effect is not developed after the reach is established.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the light emission effect of the three decorative symbols 41 is not performed when the reach is not established as in the variation effect example 1, but the present invention is not limited to this and the reach is not established. In this case, the light emission effect of the three decorative symbols 41 may be performed with a predetermined probability. However, it is controlled so that the light emission effect of the three decorative symbols 41 is performed with a higher probability when the SP reach effect is developed than when the reach is not established. In other words, it is controlled so that the light emission effect of the three decorative symbols 41 is more likely to be performed when the SP reach effect is developed than when the reach is not established.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the variable effect when the number of reservations is three as in the variation effect example 1, when the decorative symbol 41 at the deviation is temporarily stopped, the approach display effect is not performed (0). %), but it is not limited to this.
For example, in the variable effect when the number of reservations is 3, when the decorative symbol 41 at the deviation is temporarily stopped, the approach display effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. However, when the decorative symbol 41 on the outskirts is temporarily stopped, there is a higher probability that the variable effect when the number of holds is 0 is closer to the display than the variable effect when the number of holds is 3. Control to perform the production. In other words, when the decorative symbol 41 on the outskirts is temporarily stopped, the variable effect when the number of holds is 0 is closer to the display effect than the variable effect when the number of holds is 3. Control to make it easier to do. That is, when the decorative symbol 41 at the deviation is temporarily stopped, the smaller the number of holdings at the time of the variable effect, the easier it is to control the closer display effect.

[Modification 1]
Next, a modified example of the variation effect example (variation effect example 2) described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37 will be described.
44 and 45 are diagrams showing a modification (modification example 1) of the variation effect example of the B mode as the effect mode in the high-probability time-saving gaming state in the variation effect example 2. In the following description, the points that are different from the variation effect example 2 will be mainly described, and the points that are the same as the variation effect example 2 may be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 44 (1) to 44 (3), after the variation of the decorative symbol 41 having low decorativeness starts, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped, and the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 are aligned. Reach is established. When the reach is established, the left and right fourth symbols 56 (the number "4" in the illustrated example) are also temporarily stopped.
Further, when the reach is established, as shown in FIG. 44 (4), the numerical enlargement display effect and the separation effect are performed as the reach time drawing effect.

When the separation effect is performed, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are reduced and displayed at the separation position as shown in FIG. 44 (5). Further, at this time, the numerical element 411 and the numerical decorative element 412 of the left and right decorative symbols 41 are partially displayed in such a manner that they are cut off from the display area of the image display unit 114.
Subsequently, the decorative symbol 41 is hidden through the transition effect shown in FIG. 44 (6).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 44 (7), the SP reach effect image 61 is displayed as the SP reach effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (8), the out-of-order suggestion image 62 is displayed. Further, at this time, the intermediate decorative symbol 41 (the number "5" in the illustrated example) is temporarily stopped. Further, at this time, the middle fourth symbol 56 (the number "5" in the illustrated example) is temporarily stopped.
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 45 (9), a transition effect is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. 45 (10), the decorative symbol 41 at the deviation is temporarily stopped. At this time, the display size of the left and right decorative symbols 41 has returned to the display size of the left and right decorative symbols 41 before the reach was established. Further, at this time, the left and right decorative symbols 41 have returned from the separated positions to the fluctuation start positions. Then, as shown in FIG. 45 (11), the light emission effect of the temporarily stopped decorative symbol 41 of the outlier is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. 45 (12), the decorative symbol 41 of the outlier is fixedly stopped. Will be done. In addition, along with the fixed stop of the decorative symbol 41 at the deviation, the three fourth symbols 56 that have been temporarily stopped are also fixedly stopped.

As described above, even in the B mode, the separation effect may be performed as the reach time drawing effect. Further, in the B mode, when the decorative symbol 41 of the misaligned stitch is temporarily stopped after the reach is established, the left and right decorative symbols 41 may be returned from the separated position to the variable start position without performing the approach display effect.

Further, when the reach is established, the left and right fourth symbols 56 may be aligned and temporarily stopped. Further, the three fourth symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped while the decorative symbol 41 at the deviation is temporarily stopped.
The display mode of the fourth symbol 56 described above is not limited to the case of the high-probability time-saving gaming state, and may be performed in the case of the low-probability time-saving non-game state.

[Modification 2]
Next, a variation example (variation effect example 2) described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37 and a modification of the variation effect example (variation effect example 4) described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43 will be described. ..
FIGS. 46 to 48 are diagrams showing a variation effect example of the A mode as an effect mode in a low-probability time-saving non-game state and a modification (modification example 2) of the variation effect example 4 among the variation effect examples 2. In the following description, the points that are different from the variation effect example 2 and the variation effect example 4 will be mainly described, and the points that are the same as the variation effect example 2 and the variation effect example 4 may be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 46 (1) to 46 (3), after the variation of the highly decorative decorative symbol 41 starts, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped, and the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 (in the figure) are temporarily stopped. In the example, the numbers "7") are aligned and the reach is established.
When the reach is established, as shown in FIG. 46 (4), the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 move in the direction of approaching each other. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 41 is right beside the display area of the image display unit 114 and moves to the right, and the right decorative symbol 41 is right beside the display area of the image display unit 114 and moves to the left. .. In other words, the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 move toward the middle decorative symbol 41 in a direction approaching each other. As a result, the distance between the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 becomes shorter than before the reach was established. At this time, the reach notification image 71 is displayed. The reach notification image 71 is an image that notifies which decorative symbols 41 are aligned and the reach is established, and in the illustrated example, it is an image on which the message "7 Tempai!" Is drawn.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 46 (5), a separation effect is performed, and in the left and right decorative symbols 41, as shown in FIG. 46 (6), the character element 413 is cut off from the display area of the image display unit 114. It is displayed in.
Subsequently, the intermediate decorative symbol 41 is variablely displayed at a low speed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). After that, the decorative symbol 41 moves upward in the display area of the image display unit 114 while being reduced as shown in FIG. 47 (8) through the transition effect shown in FIG. 46 (7). Specifically, the left decorative symbol 41 moves to the upper left corner in the display area of the image display unit 114, and the right decorative symbol 41 moves to the upper right corner in the display area of the image display unit 114. Further, at this time, the decorative symbol 41 displayed on the image display unit 114 is a decorative symbol 41 having low decorativeness. Further, at this time, the SP reach pre-stage image 64 is displayed as the SP reach effect.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 47 (9), the SP reach effect image 61 is displayed. At this time, the effect button image 63 is displayed. When the player operates the effect button 161 while the effect button image 63 is displayed, the cut-in image 65 is displayed as shown in FIG. 47 (10).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 47 (11), the SPSP reach pre-stage image 66 is displayed as the SPSP reach effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (12), the SPSP reach subsequent image 67 is displayed. Further, at this time, another effect button image 68 is displayed. Further, at this time, the effect button 161 protrudes and has a mode similar to that of another effect button image 68.
If the player operates the effect button 161 while the other effect button image 68 is displayed, it is suggested that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery may be out of order as shown in FIG. 47 (13). The third outlier suggestion image 72 is displayed. The third outlier suggestion image 72 is an image showing that the food eaten by the two characters (inadvertently Sunabei and Yuchi of the windmill) was not delicious.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 47 (14), a transition effect is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. 47 (15), the decorative pattern 41 at the deviation is displayed in a highly decorative manner. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 41 return from the separated position to the variable start position without the approach display effect being performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (16), the light emission effect of the decorative symbol 41 of the deviation is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. 48 (17), the decorative symbol 41 of the deviation is fixedly stopped.

As described above, in the modified example 2, when the reach is established, the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 move in the direction of approaching each other. By doing so, it is possible to give a stronger impression to the player which decorative symbols 41 are aligned and the reach is established.

In the second modification, the character symbol enlarged display effect is not performed after the reach is established, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character symbol enlarged display effect may be performed after the reach is established. In this case, the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 may be moved in a direction approaching each other after the character symbol enlarged display effect is performed. Further, the operation of moving the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 in a direction approaching each other may be performed while the character symbol enlarged display effect is performed. Further, the character symbol enlarged display effect may be performed after the operation of moving the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 in a direction approaching each other is performed.

Further, it has been described that when the reach is established, the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 move in a direction approaching each other, but the operation of the left and right decorative symbols 41 is not limited to this. For example, when the reach is established, at least one of the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 may operate so as to approach the other.

Further, even in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the operation of moving the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 in a direction approaching each other may be performed after the reach is established. Further, at this time, the left and right decorative symbols 41 may be enlarged and displayed. In this case, after the left and right decorative symbols 41 are enlarged and displayed, the operation of moving the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 in a direction approaching each other may be performed. Further, the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 may be moved in a direction approaching each other while the left and right decorative symbols 41 are enlarged and displayed.

[Modification 3]
Next, a modification of the variation effect example 2 and the variation effect example 4 will be described.
FIGS. 49 and 50 are diagrams showing a variation effect example of the A mode as an effect mode in a low-probability time-saving non-game state and a modification (modification example 3) of the variation effect example 4 of the variation effect example 2. In the following description, the points that are different from the variation effect example 2 and the variation effect example 4 will be mainly described, and the points that are the same as the variation effect example 2 and the variation effect example 4 may be omitted.

First, the same effect as described with reference to FIGS. 35 (A-1) to 35 (A-4) and 36 (A-5) to 36 (A-7) is performed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 49 (1), the special symbol 42 as one aspect of the intermediate decorative symbol 41 is changed at a low speed. This special symbol 42 is a symbol that confirms that when it is stopped and displayed, it subsequently develops into an SP reach effect. The special symbol 42 is varied so that it can be seen on the front side of the left and right decorative symbols 41. Further, the special symbol 42 has a wider display area than the intermediate decorative symbol 41 (see FIG. 37 (A-9)), which is expanded and changed after the reach is established.
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 49 (2), when the special symbol 42 is stopped and displayed, then, as shown in FIG. 49 (3), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are hidden.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 49 (4), a transition effect is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. 49 (5), the SP reach pre-stage image 64 is displayed as the SP reach effect. Further, at this time, the decorative symbol 41 having low decorativeness is displayed on the upper side of the display area of the image display unit 114 with a display size smaller than that of the decorative symbol 41 before the reach is established. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the upper left corner of the display area of the image display unit 114, and the right decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the image display unit 114.
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 49 (6), the SP reach effect image 61 is displayed and the effect button image 63 is displayed. When the player operates the effect button 161 while the effect button image 63 is displayed, the cut-in image 65 is displayed as shown in FIG. 49 (7).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 49 (8), the SPSP reach pre-stage image 66 is displayed as the SPSP reach effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 50 (9), the SPSP reach latter stage image 67 is displayed, and another effect button image 68 is displayed. Further, at this time, the effect button 161 protrudes and has a mode similar to that of another effect button image 68. When the player operates the effect button 161 while the other effect button image 68 is displayed, the third off-limitation suggestion image 72 is displayed as shown in FIG. 50 (10).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 50 (11), a transition effect is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. 50 (12), the decorative symbol 41 at the deviation is temporarily stopped in a highly decorative manner. At this time, the display size of the left and right decorative symbols 41 has returned to the display size before the character symbol enlarged display effect was performed. Further, the left and right decorative symbols 41 have returned from the separated positions to the fluctuation start positions. Further, the middle decorative symbol 41 is displayed so as to be visible behind the left and right decorative symbols 41. Then, as shown in FIG. 50 (13), after the light emission effect of the decorative symbol 41 of the deviation is performed, the decorative symbol 41 of the deviation is fixedly stopped as shown in FIG. 50 (14).

As described above, in this variation effect example, when the special symbol 42 is stopped and displayed, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are hidden. Here, when the special symbol 42 is stopped and displayed, the SP reach effect is subsequently developed, but the displayed left and right decorative symbols 41 and the special symbol 42 are not the same decorative symbols 41. Therefore, when the player sees the displayed left and right decorative symbols 41 and the special symbol 42, the player may mistakenly recognize that the decorative symbol 41 at the deviation is displayed. Therefore, when the special symbol 42 is stopped and displayed, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are hidden to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the decorative symbol 41 at the deviation is displayed.

[Modification 4]
Next, a modification of the variation effect example 2 and the variation effect example 4 will be described.
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a variation effect example of the A mode as an effect mode in a low-probability time-saving non-game state and a modification (modification example 4) of the variation effect example 4 of the variation effect example 2. In the following description, the points that are different from the variation effect example 2 and the variation effect example 4 will be mainly described, and the points that are the same as the variation effect example 2 and the variation effect example 4 may be omitted.

First, FIGS. 35 (A-1) to 35 (A-4), 36 (A-5) to 36 (A-7), 41 (1), 43 (3), and 43 (3). 8) The same effect as that described with reference to FIG. 43 (11) is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 51 (1), the decorative symbol 41 at the deviation is temporarily stopped in a highly decorative manner. At this time, the display size of the left and right decorative symbols 41 has returned to the display size before the character symbol enlarged display effect was performed. Further, the left and right decorative symbols 41 have returned from the separated positions to the fluctuation start positions. Further, the middle decorative symbol 41 is displayed so as to be visible behind the left and right decorative symbols 41.

Further, the decorative symbol 41 at the deviation is temporarily stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds). Specifically, in the variation effect example 4, the decorative symbol 41 at the deviation is temporarily stopped longer than the temporary stop time of the decorative symbol 41 at the deviation shown in FIGS. 43 (12) and 43 (13).

Then, a revival production is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 51 (2), the movable accessory 115 moves to the front side of the image display unit 114 to cover a part of the image display unit 114, and the revival effect is performed. A revival effect image 73 indicating that the process is being performed is displayed. This revival production image 73 is an image showing that the food that Sunabei inadvertently ate was delicious. Further, as shown in FIG. 51 (3), three highly decorative patterns 41 are enlarged and displayed in combination with "444". Specifically, each of the doublet decorative symbols 41 is displayed in a display size larger than the display size of each of the left and right decorative symbols 41 enlarged and displayed by the character symbol enlarged display effect. At this time, a part of the left decorative symbol 41 and a part of the right decorative symbol 41 are overlapped on the back side of the middle decorative symbol 41, and the middle decorative symbol 41 is more than the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41. The decorative symbol 41 of doublet is displayed in a manner in which the display area is wide.
In addition, the revival effect is an effect of temporarily stopping the decorative symbol that notifies that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order, and then changing it to a decorative symbol that notifies that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. Is. In this revival effect, for example, after "454" is temporarily stopped as a decorative symbol, "444" is displayed as a stop symbol.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 51 (4), the doublet decorative symbol 41 is reduced and displayed. Specifically, the display size of each of the doublet decorative symbols 41 returns to the display size before the character symbol enlarged display effect is performed. Further, at this time, the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 perform an operation of moving in a direction approaching each other. As a result, the doublet decorative symbol 41 returns to the variable start position.
Then, as shown in FIG. 51 (5), after the temporarily stopped doublet decorative symbol 41 is light-emitting, the doublet decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped as shown in FIG. 51 (6). Will be doublet.

As described above, in the modified example 4, the revival effect is performed after the decorative symbol 41 at the outlier is temporarily stopped. Here, when the left and right decorative symbols 41 of the staggered decorative symbols 41 are displayed at the separated positions, the revival effect is not performed, and the left and right decorative symbols 41 of the staggered decorative symbols 41 are at the variable start positions. When it is displayed in, the revival effect is performed. In other words, the revival effect is not performed until the left and right decorative symbols 41 of the eccentric decorative symbols 41 move to the fluctuation start position, and the revival effect is performed after moving to the fluctuation start position.

Here, if the revival effect is performed when the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed at the separated positions, the player will change this when the decorative symbols 41 at the deviation start are displayed at the fluctuation start position. In the production, it is judged that the revival production will not be performed, and there is a risk that the interest of the player will be reduced. Therefore, by performing a revival effect after the left and right decorative symbols 41 return from the separated position to the variable start position, after the left and right decorative symbols 41 of the outlier decorative symbols 41 move to the variable start position. Even so, the players are expected to have a resurrection effect.

In the modified example 4, when the light emitting effect of the three decorative symbols 41 is performed, the revival effect is not performed thereafter. On the other hand, when the revival effect is performed, the light emission effect of the three decorative symbols 41 is subsequently performed.
Further, in the modified example 4, the doublet decorative symbol 41 is returned to the variable start position, but the light emission effect and confirmation are performed in a state where the doublet decorative symbol 41 is displayed at a position different from the variable start position. The stop may be done.

[Modification 5]
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a modified example (modified example 5) of the character symbol enlarged display effect.
In the above description, as the character symbol enlarged display effect, the character element 413 in the left and right decorative symbols 41 is enlarged and displayed, and the numerical element 411 and the numerical decorative element 412 are not enlarged and displayed after the reach is established. Here, the mode of the enlarged display of the decorative symbol 41 by the character symbol enlarged display effect is not limited to the above example.

For example, the reach is established as shown in FIG. 52 (1), and then, as shown in FIG. 52 (2), the number element 411, the number decoration element 412, and the character element 413 of the left and right decorative symbols 41 are established. May be enlarged and displayed respectively. In other words, the display areas of the number element 411, the number decoration element 412, and the character element 413 of the left and right decorative symbols 41 may be widened.
Further, after the reach is established, as shown in FIG. 52 (3), the number element 411 and the number decoration element 412 of the left and right decorative symbols 41 are enlarged and displayed, and the character element 413 is not enlarged and displayed. May be good. In other words, the display area of the number element 411 and the number decoration element 412 of the left and right decorative symbols 41 may be widened, and the display area of the character element 413 may not be widened.
Further, when the left and right decorative symbols 41 are enlarged and then reduced and displayed, the enlarged and displayed portion of the decorative symbols 41 may be reduced and displayed. Further, the left and right decorative symbols 41 may not be reduced and displayed during the reach effect after being enlarged and displayed.
Further, by enlarging the left and right decorative symbols 41, the distance between the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 may be shorter than before the reach was established.

In the above description, an example in which the decorative symbol 41 with high decorativeness is used in the low-probability time-saving non-game state and the decorative symbol 41 with low decorativeness is used in the high-probability time-saving gaming state has been described. , Not limited to this. For example, the decorative symbol 41 having low decorativeness may be used in a low-probability time-saving non-game state. Further, the decorative symbol 41 with high decorativeness may be used in the high-probability short-time gaming state. Further, when the character symbol enlarged display effect is performed on the highly decorative decorative symbol 41 used in the high-probability time-saving game state, any aspect of the character symbol enlarged display effect described above may be performed.
Further, when the reach is established, the character element 413 may be easily enlarged and displayed after the reach is established in the low-probability time-saving non-game state than in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Here, when the reach is established, the character element 413 can be easily enlarged and displayed after the reach is established in the low-probability time-saving non-game state than in the high-probability time-saving non-game state. It is also included that the character element 413 is always enlarged and displayed (100%) after the establishment of, and the character element 413 is not enlarged and displayed (0%) after the reach is established in the high-probability time-saving game state. In addition, when the reach is established, the character element 413 can be enlarged and displayed more easily in the low-probability time-saving non-game state than in the high-probability time-saving non-game state. It is also included that the character element 413 is enlarged and displayed with a predetermined probability after the establishment, and the decorative symbol 41 having low decorativeness is used in the high probability time-saving game state, and the character element 413 is not enlarged and displayed (0%). In addition, when the character element 413 is enlarged and displayed, the number decoration element 412 may or may not be enlarged and displayed.

Further, when the reach is established, it may be easier to enlarge and display both the numerical element 411 and the character element 413 after the reach is established in the low-probability time-saving non-game state than in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Here, when the reach is established, the low-probability time-saving non-game state is easier to enlarge and display both the number element 411 and the character element 413 after the reach is established in the low-probability time-saving non-game state than in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. In the non-game state, both the number element 411 and the character element 413 are always enlarged (100%) after the reach is established, and in the high-probability time-saving game state, both the number element 411 and the character element 413 are expanded after the reach is established. It also includes not displaying (0%). Further, when the reach is established, the low-probability time-saving non-game state is easier to enlarge and display both the number element 411 and the character element 413 after the reach is established in the low-probability time-saving non-game state than in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. In the game state, both the number element 411 and the character element 413 are enlarged and displayed with a predetermined probability after the reach is established, and in the high probability time-saving game state, the decorative symbol 41 with low decorativeness is used and the number element 411 and the character element 413 are used. It is also included that both of them are not enlarged (0%). In addition, when both the number element 411 and the character element 413 are enlarged and displayed, the number decoration element 412 may or may not be enlarged and displayed.

Further, in the above explanation, when the reach is established, it is easier to perform the numerical enlargement display effect after the reach is established in the high-probability time-saving gaming state than in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. ..
For example, when the reach is established, it may be easier to perform the numerical enlargement display effect after the reach is established in the low-probability time-saving non-game state than in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Here, when the reach is established, the low-probability time-saving non-game state is easier to perform the numerical enlargement display effect after the reach is established than the high-probability time-saving non-game state. It is also included that the number enlargement display effect is always performed later (100%), and the number enlargement display effect is not performed after the reach is established in the high probability time-saving game state (0%).

Further, the character element 413 of the decorative symbol 41 may be regarded as a specific identification element. Further, the numerical element 411 and the character element 413 of the decorative symbol 41 may be regarded as specific identification elements.

[Modification 6]
53 and 54 are views showing a modified example (modified example 6) of the reach map effect.
In the above explanation, it has been explained that in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, after the reach is established, the separation effect is performed while the character symbol enlarged display effect is performed, and then the left and right decorative symbols 41 are reduced and displayed. .. Here, the timing of the character symbol enlarged display effect, the timing of the separation effect, and the timing of the left and right decorative symbols 41 being reduced and displayed are not limited to the above example.

For example, the reach is established as shown in FIG. 53 (1), then the character symbol enlarged display effect is performed as shown in FIG. 53 (2), and then the separation is performed as shown in FIG. 53 (3). The production may be performed. Further, after that, as shown in FIG. 53 (4), the left and right decorative symbols 41 may be reduced and displayed.
Further, for example, after the reach is established, the character symbol enlarged display effect is performed as shown in FIG. 53 (5), and then the left and right decorative symbols 41 are reduced and displayed as shown in FIG. 53 (6). You may. Further, after that, as shown in FIG. 53 (7), a separation effect may be performed.

Further, for example, the reach is established as shown in FIG. 54 (8), then the character symbol enlarged display effect is performed as shown in FIG. 54 (9), and then as shown in FIG. 54 (10). In addition, the separation effect may be performed while the left and right decorative symbols 41 are reduced and displayed.
Further, any aspect of the modified example 6 may be performed with respect to the timing at which the decorative symbol 41 is enlarged and displayed, the timing at which the decorative symbol 41 is moved, and the timing at which the decorative symbol 41 is reduced and displayed after the reach is established in the high-probability time-saving gaming state.

[Modification 7]
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a modified example (modified example 7) in which the highly decorative decorative symbol 41 is displayed so as to be cut off from the display area of the image display unit 114.
In the above description, in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, the separation effect is performed after the reach is established, so that a part of the character element 413 of the left and right decorative symbols 41 is cut off from the display area of the image display unit 114 and displayed. Explained that it will be done. Here, the mode in which the left and right decorative symbols 41 are cut off from the display area of the image display unit 114 and displayed is not limited to the above example.

For example, as shown in FIG. 55 (1), a part of the number decorative element 412 of the left and right decorative symbols 41 is cut off from the display area of the image display unit 114, and the character element 413 and the number element 411 are the image display unit. It may be displayed in a manner that cannot be seen from the display area of 114.
Further, as shown in FIG. 55 (2), of the left and right decorative symbols 41, a part of the number element 411, a part of the number decoration element 412, and a part of the character element 413 are displayed by the image display unit 114. It may be displayed in a manner that can be cut off from the area.

Further, as shown in FIG. 55 (3), of the left and right decorative symbols 41, a part of the number element 411 and a part of the number decoration element 412 are cut off from the display area of the image display unit 114, and the character element 413 is It may be displayed in a manner that cannot be seen from the display area of the image display unit 114.
Further, as shown in FIG. 54 (4), of the left and right decorative symbols 41, a part of the number decorative element 412 and a part of the character element 413 are cut off from the display area of the image display unit 114, and the number element 411 is It may be displayed in a manner that cannot be seen from the display area.

Further, depending on the decorative symbol 41, the elements of the number element 411, the number decoration element 412, and the character element 413 that can be seen from the display area of the image display unit 114 may differ.
Further, the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 may have different elements that can be seen from the display area of the image display unit 114 among the numerical element 411, the numerical decorative element 412, and the character element 413. Further, the width of the area that can be seen from the display area of the image display unit 114 may differ between the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41.

Even if the number element 411 of the decorative symbol 41 is cut off from the display area of the image display unit 114, more than half of the area occupied by the number element 411 is within the display area of the image display unit 114. Is displayed. Therefore, even when the numerical element 411 of the decorative symbols 41 is cut off from the display area of the image display unit 114, the player can recognize which symbols are aligned and the reach is established. However, an area of half or more of the area occupied by the numerical element 411 may be cut off from the display area of the image display unit 114.

[Modification 8]
Next, a modification (modification 8) of the display mode of the fourth symbol 56 will be described.
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a modified example (modified example 8) of the display mode of the fourth symbol 56. In the following description, the points that are different from the modified example 1 will be mainly described, and the points that are the same as the modified example 1 may be omitted.

First, the same effect as described with reference to FIGS. 44 (1) to 44 (7) is performed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 56 (1), from the state in which the left and right fourth symbols 56 (both "4" in the illustrated example) are temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 56 (2). The fourth symbol 56 moves at high speed, and it becomes difficult to visually recognize which fourth symbol 56 is displayed.
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 56 (3), the fourth symbol 56 returns to the original display area and is temporarily stopped. At this time, as the left and right fourth symbols 56, the fourth symbol 56 of "3" is temporarily stopped.

As described above, in this modified example, after the reach is established, a change effect is performed in which the left and right symbols aligned in the temporarily stopped state are changed. Here, in the present embodiment, the symbol of "3" after the change has a higher probability of shortening the time after the end of the jackpot game when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot than the symbol of "4" before the change. There is a high probability that you will be in a gaming state.
Therefore, by changing the left and right fourth symbols 56, it is further expected that the player will be in a high-probability time-saving gaming state after the jackpot game is completed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. Can be made to.

It should be noted that the effect of changing the fourth symbol described above is not limited to the case of the high-probability time-saving gaming state, and may be performed in the case of the low-probability time-saving non-game state.
Moreover, the change effect of the decorative symbol 41 may be performed. For example, the left and right decorative symbols 41 having low decorativeness shown in FIG. 38 (A-3) may be changed.

[Modification 9]
Next, a modification of the variation effect example 2 described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37 will be described.
FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a modified example (modified example 9) of the variable effect example of the A mode as the effect mode in the low-probability time-saving non-game state in the variable effect example 2. In the following description, the points that are different from the variation effect example 2 will be mainly described, and the points that are the same as the variation effect example 2 may be omitted.

First, the same effect as described with reference to FIGS. 35 (A-1) to 35 (A-4) and 36 (A-5) to 36 (A-7) is performed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 57 (1), when the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed at the separated positions, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off, and then the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored for the game. When a command relating to power-on is transmitted from the control unit 200, the effect control unit 300 displays the power-restoring image 75 on the image display unit 114, as shown in FIG. 57 (2). More specifically, the image / acoustic control unit 310 that has received a command related to power-on from the effect control unit 300 causes the image display unit 114 to display the image 75 during power restoration.

Then, the effect control unit 300 transmits a power restoration end command, which is a command indicating that the power restoration is completed, after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from displaying the power restoration in progress image 75. Upon receiving this power restoration end command, the image / acoustic control unit 310 causes the image / acoustic control unit 310 to display the decorative symbol 41, the fourth symbol 56, and the like on the image display unit 114 (see FIG. 57 (3)). The decorative symbol 41 and the fourth symbol 56 displayed at this time are initial symbols (default symbols) that are predetermined to be displayed when the power is restored. In the illustrated example, the decorative symbol 41 and the fourth symbol 56 are displayed in the combination of "123".

The decorative symbol 41 displayed in the combination of "123" as the default symbol is defined regardless of the result of the previous symbol change or the pattern change being executed. In addition, the background image displayed on the background of the decorative symbol 41 displayed in the combination of "123" is also defined regardless of the background image displayed at the time of the previous symbol change.

Then, as shown in FIG. 57 (3), when the decorative symbol 41 or the like is displayed and the special symbol is changing, that is, when the decorative symbol 41 is being displayed in a variable manner, until the special symbol change is completed. The display of the decorative symbol 41 of the default symbol "123" is maintained until the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. At this time, the decorative symbol 41 does not perform the approach display effect. Further, at this time, the display size of the left and right decorative symbols 41 has returned to the display size of the left and right decorative symbols 41 before the character symbol enlarged display effect. Further, at this time, the display position of the left and right decorative symbols 41 in the image display unit 114 has returned from the separated position to the fluctuation start position. That is, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are returned to the fluctuation start position without the approach display effect being performed.

If the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order, the display of the decorative symbol 41 of the default symbol "123" is continued to notify that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. .. Further, the image / acoustic control unit 310 executes the customer waiting effect when the customer waiting command is received from the effect control unit 300 after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the decoration symbol 41 starts from the default symbol "123" and the lottery result of the big hit special symbol lottery as well as the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. Is switched to the combination in the case of a big hit (for example, "11-11"). As a result, it is notified that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. Even in this case, the display size of the left and right decorative symbols 41 after switching is returned to the display size of the left and right decorative symbols 41 before the character symbol enlarged display effect. Further, the display position on the image display unit 114 of the left and right decorative symbols 41 after switching has returned from the separation position to the fluctuation start position. That is, the left and right decorative symbols 41 after switching are returned to the fluctuation start position without the approach display effect being performed.

As described above, in this modification, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off after the reach time drawing effect is performed and then the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored, the approach display effect is performed. The left and right decorative symbols 41 return to the fluctuation start position without any problem.
In the above description, the case where the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and the power is restored after the reach is established and before the SP reach effect is performed is not limited to this. For example, the case where the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and the power is restored after the reach is established and the SP reach effect is started is the same as that described with reference to FIGS. 57 (2) and 57 (3). Image display may be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the character element 413 of the decorative symbol 41 operates when the decorative symbol 41 with high decorativeness is temporarily stopped has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, when the variation of the decorative symbol 41 starts, the character elements 413 of the three decorative symbols 41 may each perform an operation according to the decorative symbol 41. Further, when the reach is established, the character element 413 of the left decorative symbol 41 and the character element 413 of the right decorative symbol 41 may be operated. Further, after performing the enlarged display and the reduced display of the doublet decorative symbol 41 described with reference to FIGS. 40 (A-9) and 40 (A-10), a light emission effect (FIG. 40 (A-11)) is performed. ) May be performed before the character element 413 of the doublet decorative symbol 41 is activated.
Further, the operation performed when the character element 413 of the decorative symbol 41 starts to fluctuate, the operation performed when the temporary stop is established, the operation performed when the reach is established, and the operation performed by the character element 413 of the doublet decorative symbol 41 are They may be operated differently or may be the same operation.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 move in a direction approaching each other as a close-up display effect, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, one of the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 may perform an operation of moving in a direction approaching the other, and the other may not perform an operation of moving in a direction approaching one. May be regarded as a close-up display effect. Further, any one of the left decorative symbol 41 and the middle decorative symbol 41 may perform an operation of moving in a direction approaching the other, and this operation may be regarded as an approaching display effect. Further, one of the right decorative symbol 41 and the middle decorative symbol 41 may be moved in a direction approaching the other, and this operation may be regarded as a close-up display effect. That is, at least one of the three decorative symbols 41 and the other symbol may operate so as to approach the other.
Further, when the decorative symbol 41 of one of the three decorative symbols 41 approaches the other decorative symbol 41, at least one of the one decorative symbol 41 and the other decorative symbol 41 is enlarged and displayed. It is also included that the distance between this one decorative symbol 41 and the other decorative symbol 41 is shortened.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that the character effect is performed when the revival effect is performed, but the condition for performing the character effect is not limited to the case where the revival effect is performed.
For example, the accessory effect may be performed when the cut-in image 65 is displayed, or the accessory effect may be performed when the jackpot suggestion image 69 or the second jackpot suggestion image 70 is displayed. .. In this case, the character effect performed when the revival effect is performed, the character effect performed when the cut-in image 65 is displayed, and the jackpot suggestion image 69 and the second jackpot suggestion image 70 are displayed. The moving character effect may be the same effect as the movable accessory 115, or may be different from each other.

Further, in the present embodiment, the transition is made when the SP reach effect is performed or after the SP reach effect in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, and when the SP reach effect is performed or after the SP reach effect is performed in the high-probability time-saving game state. I explained that the production will be performed, but it is not limited to this.
For example, after the jackpot suggestion image 69 and the second jackpot suggestion image 70 are displayed, the transition effect may be performed immediately before or immediately after the doublet decorative symbol 41 is displayed.
Further, each transition effect may have the same effect mode or a different effect mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the special symbol 42 is displayed after the reach is established, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the special symbol 42 may be stopped and displayed after the right decorative symbol 41 different from the left decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped. Further, for example, when any one of the three decorative symbols 41 is temporarily stopped and the other two decorative symbols 41 are changing, the special symbol 42 may be stopped and displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the A mode as the effect mode in the low-probability time-saving non-game state and the B mode as the effect mode in the high-probability time-saving game state are provided, but the present invention is limited to this. Will not be done. For example, as the effect mode in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, A mode and B mode may be provided according to the display mode of the decorative symbol 41 at the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol 41 (before the reach is established). Further, for example, as the effect mode in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, A mode and B mode may be provided according to the display mode of the decorative symbol 41 at the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol 41 (before the reach is established).

[Second Embodiment]
[Direction image]
FIG. 58 is a diagram showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 58, in the second embodiment, the effect image is displayed on the image display unit 114 under the control of the effect control unit 300. In the present embodiment, the effect image displayed on the image display unit 114 includes a decorative symbol 41, a variable image 51, a reserved image 52, a reserved number display 55, and a fourth symbol 56. Further, the image display unit 114 has a transition image 60, an effect button image 63, a right-handed image 87, an SP image 91, an SPSP image 93, an introduction image 94, an effect name notification image 95, a round number display image 96, and an ending image 97. , The end suggestion image 98, the probability change mode end image 99, and the power restoration in progress image 89 may be displayed. Further, although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the four-division effect is executed. The decorative frame 81, the reach line image 83, and the development frame suggestion image 85 are included as the effect images displayed on the image display unit 114 in this four-division effect.
Hereinafter, each of the above-mentioned production images will be described. Although the effect images that overlap with the first embodiment will be described here, the description of some of the effect images that overlap with the first embodiment may be omitted. ..

[Decorative pattern 41]
As shown in FIG. 58 (1), three decorative symbols 41 are displayed on the image display unit 114. When explaining each of the three symbols constituting the decorative symbol 41 individually, the symbol arranged on the left side is the "left decorative symbol 41", the symbol arranged in the center is the "middle decorative symbol 41", and the right side. The symbol arranged in may be referred to as "right decorative symbol 41". Further, when the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 are collectively described, they may be referred to as "left and right decorative symbols 41".

The decorative symbol 41 of the present embodiment is composed of a combination of a plurality of image elements. In the present embodiment, as image elements that can form the decorative symbol 41, a number element 411 indicating a number, a number decoration element 412 for decorating the number element 411, and a character element 413 indicating a character are provided. Further, in the present embodiment, an effect image (so-called aura) is displayed around the character as a part of the character element 413.

Here, in the present embodiment, as the display mode of the decorative symbol 41, there are a mode with high decorativeness and a mode with low decorativeness. For example, as shown in FIG. 58 (1), in a highly decorative display mode, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed by the number element 411, the number decoration element 412, and the character element 413. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 64 (1), in a mode with low decorativeness, the character element 413 is not displayed, and the decorative symbol 41 is displayed by the number element 411 and the number decoration element 412. Here, the display mode of the decorative symbol 41 is switched according to a change in the gaming state, a progress of the effect, or the like. Details will be described later, but for example, the decorative symbol 41 in a display mode with low decorativeness is displayed in an effect executed in a high-probability time-saving game state, an SP effect, and a 4-split effect (described later), and is displayed in a display mode with high decorativeness. The decorative symbol 41 of is displayed in cases other than these.

In the variable effect of the decorative symbol 41, the effect control unit 300 first temporarily stops the left decorative symbol 41 (for example, the Chinese numeral "two") after displaying the three decorative symbols 41 in a variable manner by, for example, vertical scrolling. Then, the right decorative symbol 41 (for example, the Chinese numeral "3") is temporarily stopped, and then the middle decorative symbol (for example, the Chinese numeral "1") is temporarily stopped. After all the decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped in this way, finally, all the decorative symbols 41 are fixedly stopped in accordance with the stop display of the special symbol. In addition, the combination "213" of the decorative symbol 41 which is stopped and displayed, which is shown in FIG. 58 (1), is an example of the combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. Further, the decorative symbol 41 in which the three are not aligned may be referred to as the decorative symbol 41 at the edge.

It should be noted that here, the switching between the two display modes of the decorative pattern 41 having a high decorativeness and a low decorativeness has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display mode of the decorative symbol 41 may be switched in three or more modes. Further explaining, for example, the display mode may be switched according to the size of the decorative symbol 41. Specifically, it may have a plurality of modes having low decorativeness, in which the character element 413 is not displayed as the decorative symbol 41. Then, when the size of each decorative symbol is relatively small as in the 4-split effect (described later), a display mode with lower decorativeness is adopted, and the size of the decorative symbol is relatively large as in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. If it is large, a display mode with higher decorativeness may be adopted.

[Variable image 51]
As shown in FIG. 58 (1), the image display unit 114 indicates that the special symbol is being changed (the decorative symbol 41 is being changed and displayed) by the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 (see FIG. 5 and the like). The variable image 51 shown is displayed. That is, the variable image 51 is displayed as an image related to the variable display of the special symbol during the variable display of the special symbol. Then, the variable image 51 is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed (in the illustrated example, the lower central portion in the display area of the image display unit 114) at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the special symbol is displayed. The display disappears with the stop display. Further, a variable pedestal is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed.

Here, the display mode of the variable image 51 is determined based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process. Further, the variable image 51 is expected to win a big hit by changing the display mode of, for example, a color, a pattern, a shape, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "color") based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process. Is notified or suggested. For example, when white, blue, yellow, green, red, and gold are set as the colors of the variable image 51, the expected degree may be set to be higher in this order.

[Reserved image 52]
As shown in FIG. 58 (1), the image display unit 114 displays the reserved image 52 based on the information in the storage area corresponding to the current reserved ball in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3 and the like). That is, the reserved image 52 is an image showing that the right to determine the jackpot is reserved. Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image 52 on the screen is determined based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process.
Further, a holding pedestal is displayed in the area where the holding image 52 is displayed. The variable pedestal of the variable image 51 and the reserved pedestal of the reserved image 52 in the illustrated example are displayed in different modes.

Further, the reserved image 52 notifies or suggests the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot by changing the display mode such as color based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process. Further, when the pre-judgment result by the pre-judgment process is a big hit, the color of the type having a higher expectation is displayed than when it is out of order. For example, when white, blue, yellow, green, red, and gold are set as the colors of the reserved image 52, the expectation may be set to be higher in this order.

Here, as described above, the winning at the first starting port 121 causes a maximum of four holds. Therefore, by winning a prize at the first starting port 121, a maximum of four reserved images 52 are displayed on the image display unit 114. Further, in the present embodiment, the plurality of reserved images 52 are displayed side by side in the region on the right side of the variable image 51 from the position closer to the variable image 51 toward the position away from the variable image 51, that is, from the left side to the right side. To.

Although detailed description will be omitted, a maximum of four holds will occur even if a prize is won at the second starting port 122. Therefore, a maximum of four reserved images 52 are displayed on the image display unit 114 due to the winning at the second starting port 122.
Further, in the present embodiment, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are basically composed of the same or similar forms, respectively.

Further, in the following description, with respect to the four reserved images 52 displayed at the maximum, the "first reserved image 52", the "second reserved image 52", and the "third" are arranged in the order of proximity to the variable image 51, respectively. It may be referred to as "holding image 52" or "fourth holding image 52".

[Holding number display 55]
As shown in FIG. 58 (1), the image display unit 114 displays the hold number display 55 based on the information of the storage area corresponding to the hold ball in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3 and the like). The hold number display 55 is an image showing the hold number. Here, the number of the reserved images 52 displayed on the image display unit 114 changes according to the number of reserved images for winning each of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122.

[Fourth symbol 56]
As shown in FIG. 34 (1), the image display unit 114 has a special symbol on the image display unit 114 based on the winning of the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 by the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 (see FIG. 5 and the like). The fourth symbol 56, which indicates that the decorative symbol 41 is being varied (the decorative symbol 41 is being displayed), is displayed. The fourth symbol 56 is controlled by the effect control unit 300 and is displayed in a different manner according to the fluctuation and stop of the special symbol.
When explaining each of the three symbols constituting the fourth symbol 56 individually, the symbol arranged on the left side is the "left fourth symbol 56" and the symbol arranged in the center is the "middle fourth symbol 56". , The symbol arranged on the right side may be referred to as "right fourth symbol 56". Further, when the left fourth symbol 56 and the right fourth symbol 56 are collectively described, they may be referred to as "left and right fourth symbols 56".

In the illustrated example, the fourth symbol 56 is three images corresponding to the decorative symbol 41, respectively, and is displayed in the lower left corner of the image display area of the image display unit 114. The fourth symbol 56 is displayed as an image having a smaller dimension than the decorative symbol 41. Further, as described above, the decorative symbol 41 may be displayed in a highly decorative display mode or in a less decorative display mode, but the fourth symbol 56 may be displayed in a less decorative display mode. Only displayed in.

The fourth symbol 56 is displayed (for example, vertically scrolled) in an manner indicating that the special symbol is changing due to the winning of the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122. Then, the fourth symbol 56 stops together with the stop display of the special symbol. In the illustrated example, the number indicated by the fourth symbol 56 stopped and displayed coincides with the number indicated by the decorative symbol 41. Further explaining, in the example of FIG. 58 (1), the number corresponding to "213" of the decorative symbol 41 is displayed as the fourth symbol 56.

[Transition image 60]
As shown in FIG. 59-2 (10), the image display unit 114 displays a transition image 60 suggesting (notifying) that the SP reach effect is executed. Here, the transition image 60 displays a predetermined image, but may be a monochromatic image displayed in the entire display area of the image display unit 114. For example, a so-called whiteout may be executed by displaying a white image as the transition image 60 on the image display unit 114. Further, a so-called blackout may be executed by displaying a black image as the transition image 60 on the image display unit 114. As the transition image 60 is displayed, the decorative symbol 41 may be hidden. This makes it easier for the player to concentrate on the SP reach executed after the transition.

[Button operation image 63]
As shown in FIG. 59-2 (9), the image display unit 114 displays a button operation image 63, which is an image prompting the player to operate the effect button 161 (see FIG. 2B). .. By displaying this button operation image 63, it is possible to recognize that it is the timing for the player to operate the effect button 161.

[Right-handed image 87]
As shown in FIG. 64 (1), the right-handed image 87 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The right-handed image 87 is an image for notifying the player that the player is in an advantageous state by hitting right (by changing the hitting force of the game ball).

[SP image 91]
As shown in FIG. 59-2 (11), the SP image 91, which is an image indicating that the SP reach effect is being executed, is displayed on the image display unit 114. The SP image 91 is, for example, a moving image in which a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 plays a mini game.

[SPSP image 93]
As shown in FIG. 59-2 (12), the image display unit 114 displays the SPSP image 93, which is an image indicating that the SPSP reach effect is being executed. The SPSP image 93 is, for example, a moving image in which a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 fights against an enemy character.

[Introduction image 94]
As shown in FIG. 67 (3), the image display unit 114 displays an introductory image 94, which is an image that encourages whether or not the four-division effect (described later) is executed. In other words, the introductory image 94 is an image suggesting that the quadrant effect is executed before the start of the quadruple effect. The introductory image 94 in the illustrated example is a cross-shaped figure whose dimensions increase with the passage of time, and is an image that becomes a part of the decorative frame 81 described later. In addition, the introductory image 94 has a shape reminiscent of the decorative frame 81. It is not necessary to execute the four-division effect after the introduction image 94 is displayed. That is, the introductory image 94 may be executed as a so-called ghost.

[Direction name notification image 95]
As shown in FIG. 68-1 (2), the effect name notification image 95, which is an image for notifying the player of the start of the jackpot game, is displayed on the image display unit 114. The effect name notification image 95 is displayed when the jackpot game is started, and notifies the type of the jackpot game.

[Round image 96]
As shown in FIG. 68-1 (3), the image display unit 114 displays a round image 96, which is an image for notifying the player of the number of rounds of the jackpot game currently being executed in the jackpot game. ..

[Ending image 97]
As shown in FIG. 68-1 (5), the image display unit 114 displays an ending image 97, which is an image for notifying the player of the end of the jackpot game. This ending image 97 is displayed when the jackpot game ends, and suggests (notifies) to the player that the jackpot game ends. The ending image 97 in the illustrated example includes the name of the effect mode set after the big hit and the character string of "probability change mode entry !!" suggesting (notifying) that the effect mode is set. This ending image 97 suggests (notifies) that the gaming state after the big hit is a high-probability time-saving gaming state. Further, the ending image 97 is hidden at the end of the ending time.

[End suggestion image 98]
As shown in FIG. 68-2 (9), the image display unit 114 displays an end suggestion image 98, which is an image for notifying the player that the timing for ending the high-probability time-saving gaming state is approaching. .. The end suggestion image 98 is displayed at the same time as the start of the variation display of the special symbol immediately before the end of the high-probability time-saving gaming state. The end suggestion image 98 in the illustrated example includes a character string of "last !!" suggesting that the high-probability time-saving gaming state ends with the stop display of the changing special symbol. The end suggestion image 98 is hidden as the special symbol immediately before the end of the high-probability time-saving gaming state is stopped and displayed.

[Probability change mode end image 99]
As shown in FIG. 68-2 (11), the image display unit 114 displays a probability variation mode end image 99, which is an image for notifying the player that the high-probability time-saving gaming state has ended. The probability variation mode end image 99 is displayed when the high-probability time-saving gaming state ends, that is, when the fluctuation of the special symbol immediately before is stopped. The probability variation mode end image 99 in the illustrated example is an image that prompts the player to change the hitting force of the game ball and hit left after the state that is advantageous to the player ends by hitting right. The probability change mode end image 99 suggests (notifies) that the gaming state in the next variation is a low-probability time-saving non-gaming state. Further, the probability variation mode end image 99 is hidden after a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the high-probability time-saving gaming state.

[Image 89 during power restoration]
As shown in FIG. 69 (3) described later, the image 89 during power restoration is displayed on the image display unit 114 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on. The image 89 during power restoration is an image showing that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is undergoing restoration processing. The power-restoring image 89 is hidden after a predetermined time has elapsed from the power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 100.

[Example of production using decorative pattern 41]
In the present embodiment, various effects are executed using the decorative symbol 41 performed in the image display unit 114. For example, the effect example using the decorative symbol 41 includes a reach fanning effect, a reach time drawing effect, a stop time drawing effect, and a four-division effect. Hereinafter, each production will be described.

[Reach fan production]
As shown in FIG. 58 (4), the reach fanning effect is an effect of fanning whether or not the reach effect is executed. Specifically, in the reach fanning effect, after the left decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped, the scrolling right decorative symbol 41 slows down, and the symbol that matches the symbol displayed as the left decorative symbol 41 stops. A production that incites scrolling is performed. In addition, while the reach fanning effect is executed in the decorative symbol 41, the reach fanning effect is not executed in the fourth symbol 56.

[Reach time drawing production]
As shown in FIG. 59-1 (6), the reach effect is an effect executed by the decorative symbol 41 when the reach effect is executed. More specifically, in the reach effect, the effect using the decorative symbol 41 is executed, such as the character of the decorative symbol 41 moving when the reach effect is executed. The reach-time design effect includes, for example, changing the position of the area where the decorative symbol 41 is displayed, changing the size of the decorative symbol 41, and the like. Specifically, there is an operation in which the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 approach each other, and an operation in which the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 become larger. Further, as the reach time design effect, an effect of changing the color and shape of the effect image in the character element 413 of each decorative symbol 41 is executed, and the color and shape of the numerical decorative element 412 of each decorative symbol 41 is changed. It includes performing the production to be performed. In the illustrated example, the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 are separated from each other. It should be noted that while the decorative symbol 41 executes the reach time-designed effect, the fourth symbol 56 does not execute the reach time-designed effect.

[Production when stopped]
As shown in FIG. 59-2 (13), the stop drawing effect is an effect executed by the temporarily stopped decorative symbol 41. More specifically, in the stop-time design effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the decorative symbol 41, such as the movement of the character of the decorative symbol 41 when temporarily stopped, is executed. The stop-time design effect includes, for example, changing the position of the area where the decorative symbol 41 is displayed, changing the size of the decorative symbol 41, and the like. Further, as the stop-time design effect, an effect of changing the color and shape of the effect image in the character element 413 of each decorative symbol 41 is executed, and the color and shape of the numerical decorative element 412 of each decorative symbol 41 is changed. Includes performing the production to be done.

[4 division production]
In the present embodiment, the four-division effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 61 (1), in the four-division effect, a predetermined area (for example, the central portion of the image display unit 114) is divided into a plurality of areas in the image display unit 114. Then, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in each of the divided areas. At this time, in each area, three symbols constituting the decorative symbol 41 are displayed. Assuming that the decorative symbols 41 of the three symbols displayed in each area are one set of decorative symbols 41, in the four-division effect, the decorative symbols 41 of a plurality of sets (for example, four sets) are used to display the variation of the decorative symbols 41. Is done.

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (1), one set of decorative symbols 41 is displayed in a state where the four-division effect is not executed, whereas as shown in FIG. 61 (1). In the state where the four-division effect is executed, a plurality of sets of decorative symbols 41 are displayed. By executing such a four-division effect, it is possible to provide a surprise to the player. Further, by executing the variable display in each of the plurality of sets of decorative symbols 41, it is possible to make the player feel that the chances of aligning the symbols have increased, and to provide the player with a so-called profitable feeling.

Here, the timing at which the four-division effect is executed will be described. In the present embodiment, the quadrant effect is executed according to the progress of the effect, the change in the gaming state, and the like. For example, the quadrant effect is executed according to the result of a lottery using an effect random number which is one of the random numbers updated in S2503 of FIG. 25 (a). Further, the quadrant effect is executed based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process. Further, the 4-split effect may be executed when the gaming state is switched from the high-probability time-saving gaming state (so-called right-handed state) to the low-probability time-saving non-game state. Specifically, when the gaming state is switched from the high-probability time-saving gaming state to the low-probability time-saving non-game state, the four-division effect may be executed without fail. Here, the execution rate at which the four-division effect is executed is higher in the low-probability time-saving non-game state than in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, that is, the right-handed state. It should be noted that the 4-split effect may be controlled so as not to be executed in the so-called right-handed state.

By the way, in the four-division effect, the decorative frame 81, the reach line image 83, and the development frame suggestion image 85 are displayed. Hereinafter, each of the decorative frame 81, the reach line image 83, and the development frame suggestion image 85 will be described in order.

[Decorative frame 81]
As shown in FIG. 61 (1), the decorative frame 81 is displayed on the image display unit 114 when the four-division effect is executed. The decorative frame 81 can be captured as an image notifying that the four-division effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, the decorative frame 81 divides the central portion of the image display unit 114, that is, the area where the decorative symbol 41 is displayed into four. Here, of the areas divided by the decorative frame 81, the upper left frame is the first frame 81A, the upper right frame is the second frame 81B, the lower left frame is the third frame 81C, and the lower right frame is the fourth frame 81D. do. Further, in the following description, the decorative symbols 41 displayed in each of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D are the first set decorative symbol 41A, the second set decorative symbol 41B, the third set decorative symbol 41C, and the third set decorative symbol 41C. It may be called the 4th set decorative pattern 41D.

Here, in the illustrated example, the decorative frame 81 has four frames, that is, the area where the decorative symbol 41 is displayed is divided into four by the decorative frame 81, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the area in which the decorative symbol 41 is displayed may be divided into two or three, or may be divided into five or more. Further explaining here, it will be described that the effect is performed by using four sets of decorative symbols 41 as the four-divided effect, but two sets, three sets, or five or more sets of decorative symbols 41 may be used.

Further, in the illustrated example, the decorative frame 81 includes orthogonal lines, but the mode of the decorative frame 81 is not particularly limited as long as the area for displaying each set of decorative symbols 41 can be divided. For example, the area for displaying each set of decorative symbols 41 may be color-coded. Further, a plurality of sets of decorative symbols 41 may be displayed at different positions on the image display unit 114 without dividing the area by the decorative frame 81 or the like.

Here, the color of the decorative frame 81 is set so as to change according to the degree of expectation. For example, when white, blue, yellow, green, red, and gold are set as the colors of the decorative frame 81, the degree of expectation may be set to be higher later in this order.

Further, as described above, the variable display is executed for each of the four sets of decorative symbols 41. Then, the reach effect may be executed by the decorative symbol 41 of each set. Here, among the four sets of decorative symbols 41, the number of sets in which the reach effect is executed is set to change according to the degree of expectation. For example, the higher the number of pairs in which the reach effect is executed, the higher the expectation may be. Specifically, when the reach effect is executed by all four sets of decorative symbols 41, the degree of expectation is higher than when the reach effect is executed by one set of decorative symbols 41.

In addition, the quadrant effect is an effect that is started before the reach effect is executed in the decorative symbol 41. In other words, the decorative frame 81 is an image displayed before the reach effect is executed in the decorative symbol 41. In addition, unlike this example, the start timing of the quadrant effect and the display start timing of the decorative frame 81 may be after the reach effect is executed.

Further, although the details will be described later, the timing at which the decorative symbol 41 of each group temporarily stops or the timing at which the decorative symbol 41 of each group is fixedly stopped may be different for each group in the four-division effect, or may be the same for all groups at the same time. good.

[Reach line image 83]
As shown in FIG. 62-1 (4), the reach line image 83 is an image suggesting that the reach effect has been executed. Further explaining, the reach line image 83 in the illustrated example suggests a set of the reach decorative symbols 41 among the plurality of sets of decorative symbols 41 displayed when the four-division effect is being executed.

Here, the decorative symbol 41 displayed when the 4-division effect is executed in the same gaming state (for example, the low-probability time-saving non-game state) is displayed when the 4-division effect is not executed. The size of the decorative symbol 41 is displayed smaller than that of the decorative symbol 41. Therefore, even if the reach effect is executed by the small decorative symbol 41, it can be assumed that the player will overlook it. Therefore, the reach line image 83 is displayed in order to distinguish the set of the decorative symbols 41 that became the reach from the set of the decorative symbols 41 that did not reach.

The reach line image 83 in the illustrated example is a set of decorative symbols 41 on which the reach effect is executed, that is, an image of a straight line crossing the three decorative symbols 41. In other words, the reach line image 83 is an image additionally displayed on the decorative symbol 41. The reach line image 83 is different from the reach-time design effect in that the image is additionally displayed on the decorative symbol 41, such that the decorative symbol 41 itself is deformed to perform the effect.

Further, the reach line image 83 in the illustrated example is an image displayed in each frame of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D. Here, the reach line image 83 will be described as an image displayed when the four-division effect is being executed, but of course, it may be displayed when the four-division effect is not being executed.

[Development frame suggestion image 85]
As shown in FIG. 62-1 (5), the development frame suggestion image 85 displays which frame of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D is selected when the four-division effect is executed. It is an image to be executed. In the illustrated example, one of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D is selected, and the development frame suggestion image 85 is displayed in the selected frame. The development frame suggestion image 85 is an image that distinguishes the selected frame, that is, the selected set of decorative symbols 41 from the non-selected set of decorative symbols 41. In the illustrated example, the subsequent effects (SP reach effect in the illustrated example) are executed using the frame selected from the four-split screen, that is, the decorative symbol 41 of the set in which the development frame suggestion image 85 is displayed. Will be done.

[Variable production example 1]
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the variation effect (variation effect example 1) of the decorative symbol 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 will be specifically described. The variation effect example 1 is an example of variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 in a low-probability time-saving non-game state. Further, the variation effect example 1 is an example of variation effect when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order.

As shown in FIG. 58 (1), the highly decorative decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114 as the variation of the previous special symbol is completed by the effect control unit 300. And. At this time, the decorative symbol 41, the variable image 51, the reserved image 52, the reserved number display 55, and the fourth symbol 56 are displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed. Further, the hold number display 55 of the first start port 121 indicates "1", and the hold number display 55 of the second start port 122 indicates "0".

Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 starts with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. In this way, when the variation display of the next special symbol is started, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variation image 51. Further, when the variation display of the next special symbol is started, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121 is switched from "1" to "0". When it is shown in the drawing that the decorative symbol 41 is variablely displayed (scrolled) at a particularly high speed, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed by an arrow for easy understanding. Further, the variable display is also started in the fourth symbol 56.

Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (3), the left decorative symbol 41 scrolls at a low speed and then temporarily stops at a position where it has been fixedly stopped until the start of fluctuation. At this time, the character element 413 of the left decorative symbol 41 executes the operation. In the illustrated example, the character element 413 of the left decorative symbol 41 (number "4") raises the right hand when temporarily stopped. When the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped in the drawing, it is expressed by using the same display as the double quotation mark in the vicinity of the decorative symbol 41 for easy understanding.

Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (4), the reach fanning effect is executed. Specifically, the effect that the right decorative symbol 41 scrolls at a low speed while displaying the same symbol as the left decorative symbol 41 (the number "4"), and temporarily stops at the same symbol as the left decorative symbol 41. To execute.

Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (5), the right decorative symbol 41 scrolling at a low speed is temporarily stopped at a position where the right decorative symbol 41 has been fixedly stopped until the start of fluctuation. At this time, the right decorative symbol 41 temporarily stops at the symbol of the number "five", which is a symbol that does not match the left decorative symbol 41. That is, the reach is not established. Further, the character element 413 of the right decorative symbol 41 executes an operation when temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, the character element 413 of the right decorative symbol 41 raises the right hand when temporarily stopped.

Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (6), the intermediate decorative symbol 41 scrolls at a low speed and temporarily stops at a position where it has been fixedly stopped until the start of fluctuation. The character element 413 of the intermediate decorative symbol 41 executes an operation when temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, the character element 413 of the intermediate decorative symbol 41 raises its right hand when temporarily stopped.

Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (7), after the three decorative symbols 41 continue to be temporarily stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixedly stopped along with the stop display of the special symbol. Here, the combination “425” of the decorative symbols 41 that are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 58 (7) is an example of a combination in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. In addition, the fourth symbol 56 also stops as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, the combination of the fourth symbol 56 is "425", which matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41.

[Variable production example 2]
FIGS. 59-1 to 59-2 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 2) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59-1 to 59-2. The variation effect example 2 is an example of variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 in a low-probability time-saving non-game state. Further, the variation effect example 2 is an example of variation effect when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. In the following description, the points that are different from the variation effect example 1 will be mainly described, and the points that are the same as the variation effect example 1 may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIGS. 59-1 (1) to 59-1 (4), the decorative symbol 41 starts to change from the state in which the highly decorative decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114. And the reach fanning effect is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59-1 (5), the right decorative symbol 41 scrolling at a low speed temporarily stops. At this time, the right decorative symbol 41 temporarily stops at the symbol of the number "4", which is a symbol that matches the left decorative symbol 41. That is, the reach effect is executed. Further, the character element 413 of the right decorative symbol 41 temporarily stops and executes an operation.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59-1 (6), the reach time drawing effect is executed. Specifically, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are separated from each other (see the white arrow in the figure). Further, in the illustrated example, the character element 413 in the left and right decorative symbols 41 with high decorativeness is enlarged and displayed. The number elements 411 and the number decoration elements 412 of the left and right decorative symbols 41 are not enlarged and displayed even if the reach is established.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59-1 (7), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped in a state of being separated from each other. Specifically, the left and right decorative symbols 41 continue to temporarily stop at positions where they have moved to the left and right sides of the image display unit 114, respectively. At this time, the display size of the character element 413 of the left and right decorative symbols 41 returns to the display size before the establishment of reach.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59-1 (8), the intermediate decorative symbol 41 scrolls at a low speed and temporarily stops at a position where it has been fixedly stopped until the start of fluctuation. At this time, the middle decorative symbol 41 is changed to the front side of the left and right decorative symbols 41. Further, the middle decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped by a symbol of "five" having a number different from that of the left and right decorative symbols 41. That is, the effect as if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59-2 (9), the effect button image 63 is displayed so as to be superimposed on the temporarily stopped intermediate decorative symbol 41. By displaying the effect button image 63 in this way, it is possible to provide a surprise to the player who has once recognized that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery should be.
Then, as shown in FIG. 59-2 (10), the transition image 60 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the decorative symbol 41 is hidden as the transition image 60 is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59-2 (11), the SP image 91 is displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 41 move to the corners (upper left corner and upper right corner) of the image display area in the image display unit 114. The left and right decorative symbols 41 have a small display mode and a low decorative mode. More specifically, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are represented by the numeric element 411 and the numeric decorative element 412, respectively. Further, the intermediate decorative symbol 41 is not displayed. As a result, a large area for displaying the SP image 91 is secured. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state in which the three symbols are variablely displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59-2 (12), the SPSP image 93 is displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the decorative symbol 41 is not displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state in which the three symbols are variablely displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59-2 (13), the decorative symbol 41 is displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a highly decorative manner while performing a stop-time design effect. That is, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed by the number element 411, the number decoration element 412, and the character element 413. Further, in the illustrated example, the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped by the combination of "454". By displaying the decorative symbols 41 in the combination of "454" in this way, it is suggested (notified) to the player that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state in which the three symbols are variablely displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59-2 (14), the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114 along with the stop display of the special symbol. In addition, "454" is displayed as the fourth symbol 56. That is, the display of the decorative symbol 41 and the reduced symbol 57 are in the same state with the combination of "454". When the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a highly decorative manner. That is, as shown in FIG. 59-1 (1), the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a manner that coincides with the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol 41. As a result, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol 41 can be resumed smoothly.

[Variable production example 3]
FIGS. 60-1 to 60-2 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 3) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60-1 to 60-2. The variation effect example 3 is an example of variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 in a low-probability time-saving non-game state. Further, the variation effect example 3 is an example of variation effect when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. It should be noted that this variation effect example 3 is an effect example corresponding to the variation effect example 2, and in the following description, the points different from the variation effect example 2 will be mainly described, and the points that are consistent with the variation effect example 2 will be described. May omit the explanation.

First, as shown in FIGS. 60-1 (1) to 60-1 (4), the decorative symbol 41 starts to change from the state in which the highly decorative decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114. And the reach fanning effect is executed.
Then, as shown in FIGS. 60-1 (5) to 60-2 (12), the reach effect, the SP reach effect, and the SPSP reach effect are executed on the image display unit 114.

Then, as shown in FIG. 60-2 (13), the decorative symbol 41 is displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a highly decorative manner while performing a stop-time design effect. That is, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed by the number element 411, the number decoration element 412, and the character element 413. Further, in the illustrated example, the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped by the combination of "444". As described above, the display of the decorative symbols 41 in the combination of "444" suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit for the player. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state in which the three symbols are variablely displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 60-2 (14), the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114 along with the stop display of the special symbol. Further, "444" is displayed as the fourth symbol 56. That is, the display of the decorative symbol 41 and the fourth symbol 56 is in a state of matching with the combination of "444". When the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a highly decorative manner.

[Variable production example 4]
FIG. 61 is a diagram showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the variation effect (variation effect example 4) of the decorative symbol 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 will be specifically described. The variation effect example 4 is an example of variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 in a low-probability time-saving non-game state. Further, the variation effect example 4 is an example of variation effect when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. Further, in the variation effect example 4, it is an example of the variation effect in the case where the quadrant effect is executed and the reach effect is not executed. The timing at which the 4-split effect is started will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 61 (1), the effect control unit 300 displays the decorative frame 81 in the image display unit 114, and the first set of decorative symbols 41A to each of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D is displayed. The fourth set decorative pattern 41D is displayed. At this time, each of the first set decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set decorative symbols 41D is displayed in a mode with low decorativeness. That is, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed by the numeric element 411 and the numeric decorative element 412. Here, the first set decorative symbol 41A to the fourth set decorative symbol 41D are displayed as a combination of "156", "212", "213", and "646", respectively. That is, the first set decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set decorative symbols 41D are displayed in different combinations of symbols. Further, "213" is displayed as the fourth symbol 56. That is, the display of the 4th symbol 56 and the 3rd set decorative symbol 41C is in a state of matching with the combination of "213". In addition, the fourth symbol 56 is displayed as a symbol that matches a predetermined set of the first set decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set decorative symbols 41D.

Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 starts with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. At this time, the first set decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set decorative symbols 41D start to change all at once. Further explaining, in each of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D, the decorative symbol 41 is in a state of being variablely displayed (scrolled) at high speed. Further, the variable display is also started in the fourth symbol 56.

Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (3), the first set decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set decorative symbols 41D are temporarily stopped. At this time, the first set decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set decorative symbols 41D are temporarily stopped all at once. That is, in each of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D, each symbol constituting the first set decorative symbol 41A to the fourth set decorative symbol 41D is displayed in a pseudo stopped state in which it is slightly shaken. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state in which the three symbols are variablely displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (4), the first set decorative symbol 41A to the fourth set decorative symbol 41D are fixedly stopped with the stop display of the special symbol. At this time, the first set decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set decorative symbols 41D execute the fixed stop all at once. Further, "213" is displayed as the fourth symbol 56. That is, the display of the 4th symbol 56 and the 3rd set decorative symbol 41C is in a state of matching with the combination of "213". In addition, the fourth symbol 56 is displayed as a symbol that matches a predetermined set of the first set decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set decorative symbols 41D.

In addition, in the variation effect example 4 in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order, the quadrant effect is executed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. That is, as shown in FIG. 61 (1), the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the first set decorative symbol 41A to the fourth set decorative symbol 41D, that is, the decorative symbol 41. As a result, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol 41 can be resumed smoothly.
Further, in the illustrated example, the timing at which each of the first set decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set decorative symbols 41D starts to fluctuate, the timing at which the temporary stop is performed, and the timing at which the fixed stop is performed coincide with each other. This simplifies the control of the decorative symbol 41 by the effect control unit 300.

[Variable production example 5]
62-1 and 62-2 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 62-1 and 62-2, a variation effect (variation effect example 5) of the decorative symbol 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 will be specifically described. The variation effect example 5 is an example of variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 in a low-probability time-saving non-game state. Further, the variation effect example 5 is an example of variation effect when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. Further, in the variation effect example 4, it is an example of the variation effect when the four division effect and the reach effect are executed. This variation effect example 5 is an effect example corresponding to the variation effect example 4, and in the following description, the points different from the variation effect example 4 will be mainly described, and the points corresponding to the variation effect example 4 will be described. May be omitted. Further, the variation effect example 5 executes an effect that partially matches the variation effect example 2. Therefore, in the following description, the description may be omitted with respect to the points that are the same as those of the variation effect example 2.

First, as shown in FIGS. 62-1 (1) and 62-1 (2), the decorative frame 81 and the first set decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set decorative symbols 41D are displayed on the image display unit 114, and each of them is displayed. The fluctuation starts from the state where the fixed stop is stopped.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62-1 (3), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped in each of the first set decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set decorative symbols 41D. Here, among the 1st set decorative symbols 41A to the 4th set decorative symbols 41D, the reach eyes are established in the 3rd set decorative symbols 41C and the 4th set decorative symbols 41D. Further, the middle decorative symbol 41 of the first set decorative symbol 41A to the fourth set decorative symbol 41D continues to be displayed in a variable manner at high speed. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state in which the three symbols are variablely displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62-1 (4), among the first set decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set decorative symbols 41D, the reach of the third set decorative symbol 41C and the fourth set decorative symbol 41D for which the reach eyes are established are reached. The line image 83 is displayed. At this time, the middle decorative symbol 41 of the third set decorative symbol 41C and the fourth set decorative symbol 41D continues to be displayed in a variable manner at high speed. Further, among the 1st set decorative symbols 41A to the 4th set decorative symbols 41D, the reach line image 83 is not displayed in the 1st set decorative symbols 41A and the 2nd set decorative symbols 41B for which the reach stitch is not established, and the middle decoration is performed. The symbol 41 temporarily stops. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state in which the three symbols are variablely displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62-1 (5), the development frame suggestion image 85 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the development frame suggestion image 85 is displayed in order in each of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D, and after inciting which one is selected, the third frame 81C (third set decorative symbol 41C) is displayed. ), The development frame suggestion image 85 is displayed. Here, by displaying the development frame suggestion image 85 in the third frame 81C (third set decorative symbol 41C), the subsequent production is executed using the third frame 81C (third set decorative symbol 41C). Is notified (suggested) to the player. Although it has been described here that one of the four frames of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D, that is, the first set decorative symbol 41A to the fourth set decorative symbol 41D is selected, for example, reach. One of the third set decorative symbol 41C and the fourth set decorative symbol 41D in which the eyes are established may be selected.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62-1 (6), the transition image 60 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the decorative frame 81 and the first set decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set decorative symbols 41D are hidden as the transition image 60 is displayed. On the other hand, the display of the reserved number display 55 and the fourth symbol 56 is maintained. As a result, for example, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the variation of the decorative symbol 41 has ended.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62-1 (7), the SP image 91 is displayed on the image display unit 114 after the transition image 60 is hidden. At this time, the left symbol and the right symbol of the third set decorative symbol 41C selected in FIG. 62-1 (5) are displayed in the corners (upper left corner and upper right corner) of the image display area in the image display unit 114. To. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are small display modes and have low decorativeness. More specifically, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a larger dimension than when they are displayed in the third frame 81C in FIG. 62-1 (5). Further, the middle symbol of the third set decorative symbol 41C is not displayed. As a result, a large area for displaying the SP image 91 is secured. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state in which the three symbols are variablely displayed is maintained. After the transition image 60 is hidden, the first set decorative symbol 41A, the second set decorative symbol 41B, and the fourth set decorative symbol 41D other than the selected third set decorative symbol 41C are hidden. The state is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62-1 (8), the SPSP image 93 is displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the decorative symbol 41 is not displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state in which the three symbols are variablely displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62-2 (9), the decorative symbol 41 is displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a highly decorative manner while performing a stop-time design effect. That is, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed by the number element 411, the number decoration element 412, and the character element 413. Further, in the illustrated example, the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped by the combination of "454". As described above, the display of the decorative symbol 41 in the combination of "454" suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order for the player. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state in which the three symbols are variablely displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62-2 (10), the decorative frame 81 is displayed, and the first set decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set decorative symbols 41D are displayed in each of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D. .. Here, each symbol displayed by the first set decorative symbol 41A to the fourth set decorative symbol 41D corresponds to each pre-development symbol shown in FIG. 62-1 (5). That is, the first set decorative symbol 41A displays the same "456" as before the development, and the second set decorative symbol 41B displays the same "125" as before the development. Further, as the third set decorative symbol 41C, "454" is displayed corresponding to the reach eye displayed before the development. Further, as the 4th set decorative symbol 41D, "3131" is displayed corresponding to the reach eye displayed before the development. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state in which the three symbols are variablely displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62-2 (11), the first set decorative symbol 41A to the fourth set decorative symbol 41D are fixedly stopped with the stop display of the special symbol. In addition, "454" is displayed as the fourth symbol 56. That is, the display of the 4th symbol 56 and the 3rd set decorative symbol 41C is in a state of matching with the combination of "454".

In addition, in the variation effect example 5 in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order, the quadrant effect is executed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. That is, as shown in FIG. 62-1 (1), the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the first set decorative symbol 41A to the fourth set decorative symbol 41D, that is, the decorative symbol 41. As a result, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol 41 can be resumed smoothly.

Further, unlike the illustrated example, the stop display of the special symbol is executed without executing the four-division effect, that is, as shown in FIG. 62-2 (9), the decorative symbol 41 is performed only by the third set decorative symbol 41C. When the final effect is executed, the player makes a special symbol for the set of the decorative symbols 41 that are not selected (in the illustrated example, the first set decorative symbol 41A, the second set decorative symbol 41B, and the fourth set decorative symbol 41D). Cannot be confirmed when the stop is displayed. On the other hand, since the player can confirm the set of the decorative symbols 41 that are not selected in the illustrated example, the player's sense of conviction in the production can be enhanced.

In addition, in the variation effect example 5, in the variation of 1 special symbol, the reach effect is executed in the 3rd set decorative symbol 41C and the 4th set decorative symbol 41D, while the other decorative symbol 41 is a set. The reach effect is not executed in the 1st set decorative symbol 41A and the 2nd set decorative symbol 41B. At this time, the first set decorative symbol 41A and the second set decorative symbol 41B are fixedly stopped at the combination of the decorative symbols 41 for which the reach stitch is not established, that is, the so-called loose stitch. That is, in the variation of 1 special symbol, after the reach effect is performed, the special effect is executed in which the combination of the decorative symbols 41 for which the reach is not established is confirmed and displayed.

[Variable production example 6]
63-1 and 63-2 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 63-1 and 63-2, a variation effect (variation effect example 6) of the decorative symbol 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 will be specifically described. The variation effect example 6 is an example of variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 in a low-probability time-saving non-game state. Further, the variation effect example 6 is an example of variation effect when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. Further, in the variation effect example 6, it is an example of the variation effect when the four division effect and the reach effect are executed. This variation effect example 6 is an effect example corresponding to the variation effect example 5, and in the following description, the points different from the variation effect example 5 will be mainly described, and the points corresponding to the variation effect example 5 will be described. May be omitted.

First, as shown in FIGS. 63-1 (1) and 63-1 (2), the decorative frame 81 and the first set decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set decorative symbols 41D are displayed on the image display unit 114, and each of them is displayed. The fluctuation starts from the state where the fixed stop is stopped.

Then, as shown in FIG. 63-1 (3), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped in each of the first set decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set decorative symbols 41D. Here, among the 1st set decorative symbols 41A to the 4th set decorative symbols 41D, the reach eyes are established in the 2nd set decorative symbols 41B to the 4th set decorative symbols 41D. Further, the middle decorative symbol 41 of the first set decorative symbol 41A to the fourth set decorative symbol 41D continues to be displayed in a variable manner at high speed. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state in which the three symbols are variablely displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 63-1 (4), among the first set decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set decorative symbols 41D, the second set decorative symbols 41B to the fourth set decorative symbols 41D for which the reach eyes are established reach. The line image 83 is displayed. At this time, the middle decorative symbol 41 of the second set decorative symbol 41B to the fourth set decorative symbol 41D continues to be displayed in a variable manner at high speed. Further, in the first set decorative symbol 41A in which the reach stitch is not established, the reach line image 83 is not displayed and the middle decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state in which the three symbols are variablely displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 63-1 (5), the development frame suggestion image 85 is displayed in order in each of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D, and after inciting which one is selected, the third frame The development frame suggestion image 85 is displayed on top of 81C (3rd set decorative pattern 41C).

Then, as shown in FIG. 63-1 (6), the transition image 60 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the decorative frame 81 and the first set decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set decorative symbols 41D are hidden as the transition image 60 is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 63-1 (7), the SP image 91 is displayed on the image display unit 114 after the transition image 60 is hidden. At this time, the left symbol and the right symbol of the third set decorative symbol 41C are displayed in the corners (upper left corner and upper right corner) of the image display area in the image display unit 114. Further, the middle symbol of the third set decorative symbol 41C is not displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state in which the three symbols are variablely displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 63-1 (8), the SPSP image 93 is displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the decorative symbol 41 is not displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state in which the three symbols are variablely displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 63-2 (9), the decorative symbol 41 is displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a highly decorative manner while performing a stop-time design effect. Further, in the illustrated example, the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped by the combination of "444". As described above, the display of the decorative symbols 41 in the combination of "444" suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit for the player. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state in which the three symbols are variablely displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 63-2 (10), the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114 along with the stop display of the special symbol. Further, "444" is displayed as the fourth symbol 56. That is, the display of the decorative symbol 41 and the fourth symbol 56 is in a state of matching with the combination of "444". In addition, unlike the above-mentioned variation effect example 5, the fixed stop of the decorative symbol 41 is executed without executing the four-division effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress the excitement of the player who has been informed that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit.

[Variable production example 7]
FIG. 64 is a diagram showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the variation effect (variation effect example 7) of the decorative symbol 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 will be specifically described. The variation effect example 7 is an example of variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 in a high-probability time-saving gaming state. Further, the variation effect example 7 is an example of variation effect when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. In the following description, the points that are different from the variation effect example 1 will be mainly described, and the points that are the same as the variation effect example 1 may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 64 (1), as the effect control unit 300 ends the variation of the previous special symbol, the decorative symbol 41 having low decorativeness is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114. It is assumed that there is. The right-handed image 87 is displayed on the image display unit 114. Further, in the image display unit 114, the background is displayed in an manner suggesting that the game is in a high-probability time-saving gaming state.
Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 starts with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol.

Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (3), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixedly stopped along with the stop display of the special symbol. Here, the combination “436” of the decorative symbols 41 that are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 64 (3) is an example of a combination in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. In addition, the fourth symbol 56 also stops as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, the combination of the fourth symbol 56 is "436", which matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41.

In addition, in the variation effect example 7, the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped without undergoing a temporary stop. This makes it possible to realize the effect of the decorative symbol 41 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is short (for example, 2 seconds) as compared with the low-probability time-saving non-game state.

[Variable production example 8]
65-1 and 65-2 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 65-1 and 65-2, the variation effect (variation effect example 8) of the decorative symbol 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 will be specifically described. The variation effect example 8 is an example of variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 in a high-probability time-saving gaming state. Further, the variation effect example 8 is an example of variation effect when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. In the following description, the points that are different from the variation effect example 7 will be mainly described, and the points that are the same as the variation effect example 7 may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 65-1 (1), as the effect control unit 300 ends the variation of the previous special symbol, the decorative symbol 41 having low decorativeness is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114. It is assumed that you are doing.
Then, as shown in FIG. 65-1 (2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 starts with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol.

Then, as shown in FIG. 65-1 (3), the left decorative symbol 41 scrolls at a low speed and then temporarily stops at a position where it has been fixedly stopped until the start of fluctuation.
Then, as shown in FIG. 65-1 (4), the reach fanning effect is executed. Specifically, the effect that the right decorative symbol 41 scrolls at a low speed while displaying the same symbol as the left decorative symbol 41 (the number "4"), and temporarily stops at the same symbol as the left decorative symbol 41. To execute.

Then, as shown in FIG. 65-1 (5), the reach effect is executed. Specifically, the right decorative symbol 41, which has been scrolling at a low speed, temporarily stops at a position where it has been fixedly stopped until the start of fluctuation. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 41 execute the reach-time design effect. Specifically, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are enlarged and displayed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 65-1 (6), the transition image 60 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the decorative symbol 41 is hidden as the transition image 60 is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 65-1 (7), the SP image 91 is displayed on the image display unit 114 after the transition image 60 is hidden. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the corners of the image display area in the image display unit 114, and the intermediate decorative symbols 41 are not displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state in which the three symbols are variablely displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 65-1 (8), the SPSP image 93 is displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the decorative symbol 41 is not displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state in which the three symbols are variablely displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 65-2 (9), the decorative symbol 41 is displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a mode with low decorativeness while performing a stop-time design effect. That is, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed by the numeric element 411 and the numeric decorative element 412. Further, in the illustrated example, the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped by the combination of "454". As described above, the display of the decorative symbol 41 in the combination of "454" suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order for the player. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state in which the three symbols are variablely displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 65-2 (10), the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114 along with the stop display of the special symbol. In addition, "454" is displayed as the fourth symbol 56. That is, the display of the decorative symbol 41 and the fourth symbol 56 is in a state of matching with the combination of "454". When the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a mode with low decorativeness. That is, as shown in FIG. 65-1 (1), the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a manner that coincides with the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol 41. As a result, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol 41 can be resumed smoothly.

[Variable production example 9]
66-1 and 66-2 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 9) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66-1 and 66-2. The variation effect example 9 is an example of variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 in a high-probability time-saving gaming state. Further, the variation effect example 9 is an example of variation effect when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. It should be noted that this variation effect example 9 is an effect example corresponding to the variation effect example 8, and in the following description, the points different from the variation effect example 8 will be mainly described, and the points consistent with the variation effect example 8 will be described. May omit the explanation.

First, as shown in FIGS. 66-1 (1) to 66-1 (4), the decorative symbol 41 starts to change from the state in which the decorative symbol 41 having low decorativeness is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114. And the reach fanning effect is executed.
Then, as shown in FIGS. 66-1 (5) to 66-1 (8), the reach effect, the SP reach effect, and the SPSP reach effect are executed on the image display unit 114.

Then, as shown in FIG. 66-2 (9), the decorative symbol 41 is displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a mode with low decorativeness while performing a stop-time design effect. Further, in the illustrated example, the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped by the combination of "444". As described above, the display of the decorative symbols 41 in the combination of "444" suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit for the player. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state in which the three symbols are variablely displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 66-2 (10), the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114 along with the stop display of the special symbol. Further, "444" is displayed as the fourth symbol 56. That is, the display of the decorative symbol 41 and the fourth symbol 56 is in a state of matching with the combination of "444". When the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a mode with low decorativeness.

[Variable effect example 10]
FIG. 67 is a diagram showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the variation effect (variation effect example 10) of the decorative symbol 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 will be specifically described. Here, the variation effect example 10 is an example of the effect executed at the start of the quadrant effect. Further, the variation effect example 10 is an example of variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 in a low-probability time-saving non-game state. Further, the variation effect example 10 is an example of variation effect when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. Further, in the variation effect example 10, the variation effect example is the case where the quadrant effect is executed and the reach effect is not executed. In the following description, the points that are different from the variation effect example 1 will be mainly described, and the points that are the same as the variation effect example 1 may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 67 (1), as the effect control unit 300 ends the variation of the previous special symbol, the highly decorative decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114. It is assumed that there is. At this time, the quadrant effect is not executed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 starts with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol.

Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (3), the introduction image 94 is displayed by the effect control unit 300. In other words, the display of the introductory image 94 suggests to the player that the quadrant effect is executed. Here, in the illustrated example, the decorative symbol 41 is hidden as the introductory image 94 is displayed. This makes it easier for the player to concentrate on the introduced image 94.

Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (4), the introduction image 94 is hidden by the effect control unit 300, the decorative frame 81 is displayed, and the first set of decorative symbols is displayed in each of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D. 41A to the 4th set decorative pattern 41D are displayed. At this time, the first set decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set decorative symbols 41D are in a state of variable display at high speed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (5), the first set decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set decorative symbols 41D are temporarily stopped. At this time, the first set decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set decorative symbols 41D are temporarily stopped all at once. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state in which the three symbols are variablely displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (6), the first set decorative symbol 41A to the fourth set decorative symbol 41D are fixedly stopped with the stop display of the special symbol. At this time, the first set decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set decorative symbols 41D execute the fixed stop all at once. Further, "213" is displayed as the fourth symbol 56. That is, the display of the 4th symbol 56 and the 3rd set decorative symbol 41C is in a state of matching with the combination of "213".

[Variable production example 11]
FIGS. 68-1 and 68-2 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 68-1 and 68-2, a variation effect (variation effect example 11) of the decorative symbol 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 will be specifically described. Here, the variation effect example 11 is an example of the effect executed at the start of the quadrant effect.

Further, in the variation effect example 11, the low-probability time-saving no-game state (first low-probability time-saving no-game state), the high-probability time-saving no-game state, and then the low-probability time-saving no-game state (second low-probability time-saving no-game state) again. ) Is a variation effect example of the decorative symbol 41. Further, the variation effect example 11 is an example of variation effect when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery becomes a big hit in the first low-probability time-saving no-game state. Further, in the variation effect example 11, it is a variation effect example in which the quadrant effect is executed in the second low-probability time-saving non-game state. In the following description, the points that are different from the variation effect example 1 will be mainly described, and the points that are the same as the variation effect example 1 may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 68-1 (1), the effect control unit 300 finishes the variation of the special symbol executed in the first low-probability time-saving no-game state, and the image display unit 114 is decorated. It is assumed that the highly high-quality decorative pattern 41 has been confirmed and stopped by the combination of "444". That is, it is suggested that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit for the player. At this time, the quadrant effect is not executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68-1 (2), the effect name notification image 95 is displayed on the image display unit 114 with the start of the jackpot game. The effect name notification image 95 in the illustrated example includes a character string of "SUPER rehabilitation bonus". At this time, the right-handed image 87 is displayed on the image display unit 114. Further, the decorative pattern 41 is not displayed on the image display unit 114. Similarly, the variable image 51, the reserved image 52, the reserved number display 55, and the fourth symbol 56 are not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68-1 (3), the round image 96 is displayed on the image display unit 114 as the large winning opening 125 (see FIG. 1) is opened. The illustrated round image 96 includes the characters "Round 1" indicating that the round game currently being performed in the jackpot game is the first time.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68-1 (4), as the final round in the jackpot game is started, the round image 96 including the characters "Final Round" indicating the current round game is displayed on the image display unit 114. Is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68-1 (5), the ending image 97 is displayed on the image display unit 114 after the final round is completed. By displaying this ending image 97, it is suggested (notified) to the player that the jackpot game is completed. In addition, by displaying the ending image 97, the effect mode (game state) after the big hit is also suggested (notified). The ending image 97 in the illustrated example includes the name of the effect mode set after the big hit and the character string of "probability change mode entry !!" suggesting (notifying) that the effect mode is set. Here, in the illustrated example, the gaming state after the big hit game is the high-probability time-saving gaming state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68-1 (6), the gaming state shifts from the low-probability time-saving non-game state to the high-probability time-saving gaming state as the jackpot game ends. At this time, the combination "444" of the decorative symbols 41 that have been hit by the jackpot is displayed on the image display unit 114. Further, at this time, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a large display mode and a display mode with low decorativeness.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68-1 (7), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol.
Then, as shown in FIG. 68-1 (8), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixedly stopped along with the stop display of the special symbol. Here, the combination “156” of the decorative symbols 41 that are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 68-1 (8) is an example of a combination in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. In addition, the fourth symbol 56 also stops as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68-2 (9), with the start of the last variable display of the special symbol in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, that is, with the start of the variable display of the special symbol having the lottery number J = 0. The variation of the decorative symbol 41 starts. At this time, the end suggestion image 98 is displayed on the image display unit 114.
Then, as shown in FIG. 68-2 (10), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixedly stopped along with the stop display of the special symbol. Here, the combination “421” of the decorative symbols 41 that are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 58 (7) is an example of a combination in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. In addition, the fourth symbol 56 also stops as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68-2 (11), the probability change mode end image 99 is displayed as the gaming state shifts from the high-probability time-saving gaming state to the low-probability time-saving non-game state. In the illustrated example, the decorative symbol 41 is hidden as the probability variation mode end image 99 is displayed. By displaying the probability change mode end image 99, it is notified that the gaming state shifts to the low-probability time-saving non-gaming state. Further, by displaying the probability change mode end image 99, it is notified that the quadrant effect is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68-2 (12), the effect control unit 300 hides the probability change mode end image 99, displays the decorative frame 81, and displays the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D. One set of decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set of decorative symbols 41D are displayed. At this time, the first set decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set decorative symbols 41D are in a state of variable display at high speed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68-2 (13), the first set decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set decorative symbols 41D are temporarily stopped. At this time, the first set decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set decorative symbols 41D are temporarily stopped all at once. Further, in the fourth symbol 56, the state in which the three symbols are variablely displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68-2 (14), the first set decorative symbol 41A to the fourth set decorative symbol 41D are fixedly stopped with the stop display of the special symbol. At this time, the first set decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set decorative symbols 41D execute the fixed stop all at once. Further, "213" is displayed as the fourth symbol 56. That is, the display of the 4th symbol 56 and the 3rd set decorative symbol 41C is in a state of matching with the combination of "213".

[Variable production example 12]
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the variation effect (variation effect example 12) of the decorative symbol 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 will be specifically described. Here, the variation effect example 12 is an example of an effect when the power supply is cut off and restored while the four-division effect is being executed. Further, the variation effect example 12 is an example of variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 in a low-probability time-saving non-game state. Further, the variation effect example 12 is an example of variation effect when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. In the following description, the points that are different from the variation effect example 4 will be mainly described, and the points that are the same as the variation effect example 4 may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIGS. 69 (1) and 69 (2), the decorative frame 81 and the first set decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set decorative symbols 41D are displayed on the image display unit 114, and each of them is fixedly stopped. The fluctuation starts from the state of being.

Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (3), when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and restored and a command regarding power-on is transmitted from the game control unit 200, the effect control unit 300 sends the image display unit 114 to the image display unit 114. The image 89 during power restoration is displayed. More specifically, the image / acoustic control unit 310 that has received a command related to power-on from the effect control unit 300 causes the image display unit 114 to display the image 89 during power restoration.

Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (4), the effect control unit 300 is a command indicating that the power restoration is completed after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from displaying the power restoration in progress image 89. Send a power recovery end command. Upon receiving this power restoration end command, the image / sound control unit 310 causes the image display unit 114 to display the decorative symbol 41, the fourth symbol 56, and the like. At this time, unlike before the power is restored, the 4-split effect is not executed. Further, the decorative symbol 41 and the fourth symbol 56 to be displayed are initial symbols (default symbols) that are predetermined to be displayed when the power is restored. In the illustrated example, the decorative symbol 41 and the fourth symbol 56 are displayed in the combination of "123".

As described above, when the power is restored in the state where the decorative symbol 41 is variablely displayed in the 4-split effect, the decorative symbol 41 is 1 without the 4-split effect being executed after the display of the image 89 during power restoration. The set is displayed. In other words, the execution of the 4-split effect is reset when the power is restored. In other words, the display mode of the decorative symbol 41 changes as the power is restored.

[Variable production example 13]
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing one aspect of an effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the variation effect (variation effect example 13) of the decorative symbol 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 will be specifically described. Here, the variation effect example 12 is an example of an effect when the power supply is cut off and restored in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Further, the variation effect example 12 is an example of variation effect when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. In the following description, the points that are different from the variation effect example 7 will be mainly described, and the points that are the same as the variation effect example 7 may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 70 (1), as the effect control unit 300 ends the variation of the previous special symbol, the decorative symbol 41 having low decorativeness is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114. It is assumed that there is.
Then, as shown in FIG. 70 (2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 starts with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol.

Then, as shown in FIG. 70 (3), when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored and a command for turning on the power is transmitted from the game control unit 200, the effect control unit 300 displays the image during power restoration to the image display unit 114. Display 89.

Then, as shown in FIG. 70 (4), the effect control unit 300 is a command indicating that the power restoration is completed after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from displaying the power restoration in progress image 89. Send a power recovery end command. Upon receiving this power restoration end command, the image / sound control unit 310 causes the image display unit 114 to display the decorative symbol 41, the fourth symbol 56, and the like. At this time, the decorative symbol 41 having low decorativeness is displayed as before the power is restored. Also, the 4-split effect is not executed. Further, the decorative symbol 41 and the fourth symbol 56 to be displayed are initial symbols that are predetermined to be displayed when the power is restored.

As described above, when the power is restored in the state where the decorative symbol 41 with low decorativeness is variablely displayed in the high-probability time-saving game state, the decorative symbol 41 with low decorativeness becomes 1 after the display of the image 89 during power restoration. The set is displayed. In other words, even when the power is restored, the display mode of the decorative symbol 41 is maintained.

[Relationship of production 1]
Here, the relationship between the variation effect in the variation effect example 5 and the variation effect example 7 will be described. Comparing the variation effect example 5 shown in FIGS. 62-1 and 62-2 with the variation effect example 7 shown in FIG. 64, the times during which the three symbols in the decorative symbol 41 are displayed together are different. For example, in the second set decorative symbol 41B in the variation effect example 5, as shown in FIG. 62-1 (4), after the middle decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped and the three symbols are aligned, the development frame suggestion image is obtained. After the effect of displaying 85, the SP reach effect by the third set decorative symbol 41C, and the SPSP reach effect, the fixed stop is performed along with the stop display of the special symbol (see FIG. 62-2 (11)). On the other hand, the decorative symbol 41 in the variation effect example 5 is fixedly stopped without undergoing a temporary stop (see FIG. 64 (3)). Therefore, when the second set decorative symbol 41B in the variable effect example 5 and the decorative symbol 41 in the variable effect example 7 are compared, the time during which the three symbols that are fixedly stopped are displayed together is longer in the variable effect example 5. .. To further explain, when comparing the case where the 4-split effect is executed and the case where the high-probability time-saving game state is executed, the three symbols that are fixedly stopped when the 4-split effect is executed are aligned. It is displayed for a long time. In this way, by lengthening the time for displaying all three symbols together, it is possible to secure time for the player to confirm each set of decorative symbols 41 to be displayed in a plurality of frames by executing the four-division effect. be able to.

The time when the three symbols are displayed together is the total time of the time when the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped and the time when the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped, but whichever is the time when the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped or the fixed stop time. Either one may be used. Here, the time when the three symbols are displayed together is the time from the temporary stop of the three symbols of the decorative symbol 41 to be fixedly stopped to the fixed stop. Further explaining, during the time when the three symbols are displayed together, the display of each of the three symbols is not switched to the other symbol.

Further, the state in which the three symbols of the second set decorative symbol 41B in the variation effect example 5 are aligned is the state in which the middle decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped and the three symbols are aligned as shown in FIG. 62-1 (4). After that, it can be considered that the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect by the 3rd set decorative symbol 41C are being continued even during the execution. Further, the second set decorative symbol 41B in the variation effect example 5 can be regarded as executing the so-called looseness in which the reach effect is not executed.

Further, unlike the description of the variation effect example 7 shown in FIG. 64, as an example of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, there is also an embodiment in which the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped and then fixedly stopped. Comparing this aspect with the second set decorative symbol 41B in the variation effect example 5, the time from the temporary stop of the three symbols to the fixed stop is longer in the variation effect example 5. To further explain, in comparison between the case where the 4-division effect is executed in the low-probability time-saving no-game state and the case where the high-probability time-saving game state is executed, the 4-division effect is executed in the low-probability time-saving no-game state. If there is, it takes longer time from the temporary stop of the three symbols to the fixed stop.

Here, in the second set decorative symbol 41B in the variation effect example 5, three symbols are temporarily stopped as compared with the case where the so-called looseness is executed in which the reach effect is not executed in the high probability time-saving gaming state. It takes a long time to make a definite stop. Further, the second set decorative symbol 41B in the variation effect example 5 is determined after the three symbols are temporarily stopped, as compared with the case where the second set decorative symbol 41B is in the high probability time-saving gaming state and the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect are executed. It takes a long time to stop.

Further, the second set decorative symbol 41B in the variable effect example 5 and the decorative symbol 41 in the variable effect example 7 can be regarded as having different display modes of each symbol. Further explaining, the second set decorative symbol 41B in the variable effect example 5 and the decorative symbol 41 in the variable effect example 7 can be regarded as having different display modes of the decorative character mainly of the identification character. Further, the second set decorative symbol 41B in the variable effect example 5 and the decorative symbol 41 in the variable effect example 7 can be regarded as having different arrangements of the symbols even if they have the same number. Here, the array means the position of the area where each image is displayed on the image display unit 114. The arrangement is not limited to the position of the area on the image display unit 114, but includes the dimensions and the positional relationship of the area where each image is displayed.

In addition, in the illustrated example, the second set decorative symbol 41B in the above variation effect example 5 and the decoration symbol 41 in the variation effect example 7 are the first mode (normal mode 1, low accuracy) even if the numbers of the same symbols are the same. As an example, the arrangement for displaying the decorative symbol 41 differs between the state (state, non-time saving state, etc.) and the second mode (normal mode 2, high accuracy state, time saving state, 4-division effect execution mode, etc.). can.

Further, the shaking time, which is the time during which the three symbols that are fixedly stopped are displayed together, is longer in the variable effect example 5 than in the variable effect example 7. On the other hand, the degree of expectation of the variable effect example 5 is lower than that of the variable effect example 7. That is, when the second aspect is used as in the variation effect example 7, the time for displaying a plurality of effect symbols in a visually recognizable manner is larger than when the first aspect is used as in the variation effect example 5. Is short and the expectation for big hits is high. By adopting such a configuration, in the game production, the fun of the game is enhanced by lengthening the shaking fluctuation time, and the expectation level rises even if the shaking fluctuation time is short depending on the situation. Can provide surprise and enjoyment to.

[Relationship of production 2]
Next, the relationship between the variation effects in the variation effect example 4 and the variation effect example 8 will be described. Comparing the variation effect example 4 shown in FIG. 61 with the variation effect example 8 shown in FIGS. 65-1 and 65-2, the reach fanning effect is not executed in the variation effect example 4, whereas the variation effect example is not executed. In 8, the reach fanning effect is executed. Further explaining, when comparing the case where the 4-split effect is executed and the case where the high-probability time-saving gaming state is executed, the probability that the reach fan effect is executed is higher when the 4-division effect is executed. Is low. The low probability that the reach fanning effect is executed when the four-division effect is executed includes that the reach fanning effect is not executed, that is, the execution probability is 0%. Further, the high probability that the reach fanning effect in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is executed includes that the reach fanning effect is always executed, that is, the execution probability is 100%.

Further, in the variation effect example 4, the reach time map effect is not executed, whereas in the variation effect example 8, the reach time map effect is executed. Further explaining, when comparing the case where the 4-division effect is executed and the case where the high-probability time-saving gaming state is executed, the reach time-of-creation effect is executed when the 4-division effect is executed. The probability is low. It should be noted that the low probability that the reach time map effect is executed when the four-division effect is executed includes the fact that the reach time map effect is not executed, that is, the execution probability is 0%. Further, the high probability that the reach time map effect in the high probability time-saving game state is executed includes that the reach time map effect is always executed, that is, the execution probability is 100%.

Here, even if the reach fanning effect or the reach time drawing effect is executed in the case where the four-divided effect is executed, the effect obtained when the four-divided effect is not executed can be obtained. do not have. Therefore, when the four-division effect is executed, the control by the effect control unit 300 can be simplified by not executing the reach fanning effect or the reach time drawing effect (or by reducing the execution probability).

It should be noted that the execution probability here indicates the ratio of executing the target effect, and is not limited to a specific probability. For example, it may be the ratio of the number of effect patterns in which the target effect is executed to the total number of all effect patterns executed in the pachinko gaming machine 100. Further, for example, the effect performed by the pachinko gaming machine 100 may be observed a predetermined number of times, and the ratio of the number of times the target effect is executed to the predetermined number of times may be used.

In addition, it is more special after the reach is established when the reach fanning effect or the reach time drawing effect is executed in the high-probability time-saving game state than when the reach fanning effect or the reach time drawing effect is executed in the 4-split effect. The game is easy to execute.

In addition, the reach fanning effect is predetermined, such as applying an effect to the decorative symbol 41, displaying the decorative symbol 41 for a longer time than other display times, or slipping off a symbol different from the symbol to be reached. By directing the symbol (for example, NEXT symbol, pseudo-continuous symbol, continuous effect symbol) to stop, it can be regarded as an effect that incites whether or not to reach.

Further, in the first aspect (high-probability time-saving game state), the ratio of advantageous hits (big hits that become a high-probability state after the end of the big-hit game) is the ratio of unfavorable hits (big hits that become a low-probability state after the end of the big-hit game). It may be higher, and it may be easier for the special effect to succeed with the disadvantageous hit symbol rather than the advantageous hit symbol.

Further, the decorative symbol 41 is second than the case where the special effect (reach fanning effect or reach time design effect) is executed when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first display mode (highly decorative mode). It is easier to perform a special game when a special effect is executed when the display mode (a mode having low decorativeness) is displayed in the second mode (see, for example, the decorative symbol 41 of the variable effect example 4). May be good. Further, the decorative symbol 41 is the first aspect (for example, the aspect having low decorativeness) of the second display aspect (for example, the aspect in which the decorative symbol 41 is less decorative) than the case where the special effect is successfully reached when the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first display aspect. It may be more difficult to perform the special game when the special effect has a successful reach when it is displayed in the decorative pattern 41 of the variable effect example 8).

Further, in a state where each decorative symbol 41 fluctuates at high speed before the reach is established, that is, before the reach effect is executed and the decorative symbol 41 is difficult to see, the first aspect (see, for example, the decorative symbol 41 in the variable effect example 8) is the first. The movable accessory 115 may be easier to operate than the two modes (see, for example, the decorative symbol 41 of the variable effect example 4).

Further, in the first aspect (high probability time saving game state), the possibility that the reach is not successful by performing the reach fanning effect may be higher than in the second aspect (low probability time saving no game state). Further, in the first aspect (high probability time-saving gaming state), the possibility that the reach fanning effect is performed and the reach is not successful may be higher than the possibility that the reach fanning effect is performed and the reach is successful. In addition, the probability of performing a special game is higher in the first mode (high-probability time-saving game state) than in the second mode (low-probability time-saving non-game state) in the fluctuation in which the reach is fanned and the reach is successful. May be good. In addition, the probability of performing a special game is higher in the second mode (low-probability time-saving non-game state) than in the first mode (high-probability time-saving game state) in the fluctuation in which the reach is fanned and the reach is successful. May be good.

[Relationship of production 3]
Next, the relationship between the variation effect and the variation effect example 1 and the variation effect example 5 will be described. Comparing the variation effect example 1 shown in FIG. 58 with the variation effect example 5 shown in FIGS. 62-1 and 62-2, both are in a low-probability time-saving no-game state and are in the same gaming state. On the other hand, the decorative symbol 41 in the variable effect example 1 has a high decorativeness, and the second set decorative symbol 41B in the variable effect example 5 has a low decorativeness. Further, both the variable effect example 1 and the variable effect example 5 have different times for displaying the three symbols in the decorative symbol 41 together. For example, in the second set decorative symbol 41B in the variation effect example 5, the development frame suggestion image 85 is displayed after the three symbols are temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 62-1 (4). After the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect by the third set decorative symbol 41C, the fixed stop is performed along with the stop display of the special symbol (see FIG. 62-2 (11)). On the other hand, the decorative symbol 41 in the variation effect example 1 is fixedly stopped without going through the SP reach effect or the like after the three symbols are temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 58 (6) (FIG. 58 (FIG. 58). See 7)). Therefore, when the second set decorative symbol 41B in the variable effect example 5 and the decorative symbol 41 in the variable effect example 1 are compared, the time during which the three symbols that are fixedly stopped are displayed together is longer in the variable effect example 5. .. Further explaining, when the second set decorative symbol 41B in the variable effect example 5 and the decorative symbol 41 of the variable effect example 1 are compared, the time from the temporary stop of the three symbols to the fixed stop is the variable effect. Example 5 is longer. In this way, by lengthening the time for displaying the three symbols together, the player can confirm each set of the decorative symbols 41 for which the four-division effect is executed and the plurality of symbols are displayed. The time when the three symbols are displayed together is the total time of the time when the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped and the time when the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped, but whichever is the time when the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped or the fixed stop time. Either one may be used. Here, the time when the three symbols are displayed together is the time from the temporary stop of the three symbols of the decorative symbol 41 to be fixedly stopped to the fixed stop. Further explaining, during the time when the three symbols are displayed together, the state in which the three symbols are displayed is maintained, and the display is not switched to another symbol.

[Relationship of production 4]
Next, the relationship between the variation effect and the variation effect example 2 and the variation effect example 4 will be described. Comparing the variation effect example 2 shown in FIGS. 59-1 and 59-2 with the variation effect example 4 shown in FIG. 61, both are in a low-probability time-saving no-game state and are in the same gaming state. On the other hand, in the variation effect example 4 shown in FIG. 61, the reach fanning effect is not executed, whereas in the variation effect example 2 shown in FIGS. 59-1 and 59-2, the reach fanning effect is executed. Comparing the case where the 4-division effect is executed and the case where the 4-division effect is not executed, the probability that the reach fanning effect is executed is lower when the 4-division effect is executed. The low probability that the reach fanning effect is executed when the four-division effect is executed includes that the reach fanning effect is not executed, that is, the execution probability is 0%. Further, the high probability that the reach fanning effect is executed includes that the reach fanning effect is always executed, that is, the execution probability is 100%.

Further, in the variation effect example 4, the reach time map effect is not executed, whereas in the variation effect example 2, the reach time map effect is executed. Further explaining, when comparing the case where the 4-division effect is executed and the case where the 4-division effect is not executed, the reach time-of-creation effect is executed when the 4-division effect is executed. The probability of being done is low. It should be noted that the low probability that the reach time map effect is executed when the four-division effect is executed includes the fact that the reach time map effect is not executed, that is, the execution probability is 0%. Further, the high probability that the reach time map effect is executed when the four-division effect is not executed includes that the reach time map effect is always executed, that is, the execution probability is 100%.

Here, even if the reach fanning effect or the reach time drawing effect is executed in the case where the four-divided effect is executed, the effect obtained when the four-divided effect is not executed can be obtained. do not have. Therefore, when the four-division effect is executed, the control by the effect control unit 300 can be simplified by not executing the reach fanning effect or the reach time drawing effect.

[Relationship of production 5]
Next, the relationship between the variation effect in the variation effect example 10 and the variation effect example 11 will be described. Comparing the variation effect example 10 shown in FIG. 67 with the variation effect example 11 shown in FIGS. 68-1 and 68-2, the time suggesting to the player that the quadrant effect is executed, that is, the advance notice effect The duration of is longer in the variable production example 11. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67 (3), it is shown in FIG. 68-2 (11) as compared with the time when the introduced image 94 is displayed without switching the gaming state in the low probability time-saving non-gaming state. As described above, the time during which the probability variation mode end image 99 is displayed when shifting from the high-probability time-saving gaming state to the low-probability time-saving non-game state is longer. As a result, as compared with the case where the decorative symbol 41 is switched from the highly decorative state to the less decorative state as in the variation effect example 10 shown in FIG. 67, FIGS. 68-1 and 68-2. It is possible to further emphasize the effect performed while switching between the effect symbols having low decorativeness as in the variation effect example 11 shown in 1. Further explaining, by prolonging the display time of the probability change mode end image 99, it is suggested that the quadrant effect gives a surprise and a profitable feeling, and it becomes possible to incite the player.

As shown in FIG. 68-1 (6), the decorative symbol 41 displayed in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is the decorative symbol 41 (FIG. 67) when the four-division effect is executed because the decorativeness is low. (See (5)) in common. Further, the time during which the ending image 97, which is an image for notifying that the high-probability time-saving gaming state is started (see FIG. 68-1 (5)), is an image for notifying that the quadrant effect is executed. It is longer than the time when the introductory image 94 is displayed (see FIG. 67 (3)).

〔command〕
◆ Although the explanation is omitted above, in order to electrically connect between the game control unit 200 and the effect control unit 300, a cable (not shown) for transmitting a control signal (command), a game control board, and an effect A connector provided on each of the control boards and receiving a terminal of a cable (not shown) is used. Here, when the terminal of the cable is inserted into the connector, but the electrical connection between the cable and the connector is insufficient (so-called half-stabbed state), or between the game control unit 200 and the effect control unit 300. The effect control unit 300 may miss the control signal transmitted by the game control unit 200 due to an irregular event such as a communication abnormality. In other words, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect control unit 300 may not be able to receive the control signal from the game control unit 200.

When the control signal is not transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 in this way, an effect different from the variation effect example described above may be executed. More specifically, for example, after the change of the special symbol is started, the change stop command may not be transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300. In this case, as shown in FIG. 61 (4), the first set decorative symbol 41A to the fourth set decorative symbol 41D are not in a state of being fixedly stopped, and as shown in FIG. 61 (3), the first set decorative symbol is decorated. The state in which the symbols 41A to the fourth set decorative symbols 41D are temporarily stopped continues. That is, when the variable stop command is not transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300, the first set decorative symbol 41A to the fourth set decorative symbol 41D are temporarily stopped as compared with the case where the variable stop command is transmitted. The time you spend will be longer. Further explaining, the time during which the decorative symbol 41 is oscillating becomes longer as compared with the case where the control signal is not missed.

The fluctuation stop command is not transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300, and as shown in FIG. 61 (3), the temporary stop by the first set decorative symbol 41A to the fourth set decorative symbol 41D continues. When the effect control unit 300 receives a command other than the variation stop command such as the next variation start command or customer waiting command from the game control unit 200, the effect according to the received command is executed.

In addition, when the above command is missed and the decorative symbol continues to swing, the fluctuation stop command that accompanies the fluctuation of the special symbol after the originally received fluctuation stop command is issued. Upon receiving the command, the effect control unit 300 definitely stops the swinging decorative symbol 41. In this case, the time from the temporary stop of the decorative symbol 41 to the fixed stop is longer than in the case where the command is not missed.

Further, although the description is omitted above, as shown in FIG. 70 (4), the decorative symbol 41 and the fourth symbol 56 displayed after the power is restored are displayed without fluctuation or shaking. Further explaining, the decorative symbol 41 displayed after the power is restored is in a state of being fixedly stopped.

Originally, the effect control unit 300 maintains a state in which the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) upon receiving the fluctuation stop command. On the other hand, after the power is restored, the state in which the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped is maintained beyond this predetermined time. That is, the decorative symbol 41 may be fixedly stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) or longer.

Further, although the details will be described later, the effect image displayed on the image display unit 114 is updated every time the predetermined frame update timing is reached. At this frame update timing, the process of drawing the image is executed, but if a so-called processing omission occurs in which part of the process to be executed is not executed, the image continues until the next frame update timing. Is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 61 (3), the state in which the first set decorative symbol 41A to the fourth set decorative symbol 41D are temporarily stopped continues. Further explaining, when the processing omission occurs, the time during which the first set decorative symbol 41A to the fourth set decorative symbol 41D is temporarily stopped becomes longer than in the case where the processing omission does not occur. In addition, the timing at which sound such as music or voice is output from the speaker 156 does not change depending on whether the processing omission occurs or the processing omission does not occur.

Further, in the above description, it has been described that the character of the decorative symbol 41 moves at the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol 41, at the stop of the fluctuation, or at the time of reaching the design effect. The character's actions performed at each of these timings may differ from timing to timing. Further, the movement of the character may change depending on the determination result of the preliminary determination. For example, a special action performed by a character may be easier to perform when the result of the pre-determination is a big hit than when it is out of order. That is, it may be suggested that the result of the preliminary determination is a big hit due to the special action of the character.

Further, the above-mentioned four-division effect may be executed according to the determination result of the preliminary determination. For example, when the result of the pre-determination is a big hit, the quadrant effect may be more easily executed (the execution ratio may be higher) than in the case of the loss. Here, the preliminary determination may be set so as not to be executed in a predetermined case (so-called prohibition). For example, when the gaming state changes from the high-probability time-saving gaming state to the low-probability time-saving non-game state, or from the low-probability time-saving gaming state to the low-probability time-saving non-game state, the preliminary determination is not executed. Here, as described in FIGS. 68-1 to 68-2, when switching from the high-probability time-saving gaming state to the low-probability time-saving non-game state, in order to maintain the player's interest, the four-division effect is produced. May be set to be executed without fail. In such a setting, for example, when the four-division effect is executed in a scene that does not involve switching of the gaming state as shown in FIGS. 63-1 and 63-2, it may be executed based on the preliminary determination. Therefore, the expectation of the 4-split production is relatively high. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 68-1 to 68-2, if the quadrant effect is executed in a scene involving switching of the gaming state, the case where the quadruple effect is executed based on the prior determination is not included, so the quadruple effect is not included. Expectations are relatively low.

[Modification example]
In the above description, for example, as shown in FIG. 61 (3), in each of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D in the four-division effect, the first set decorative symbol 41A to the fourth set decorative symbol 41D are temporarily stopped. I explained that it does, but it is not limited to this. That is, the changing first set decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set decorative symbols 41D may be fixedly stopped without being temporarily stopped.

Further, in the above description, it has been explained that the reach fanning effect and the reach time-lapse drawing effect are not executed when the four-division effect is executed, but the first set decorative symbol 41A to the fourth set decorative symbol 41D are used. One or both of the reach fanning effect and the reach time drawing effect may be performed.

Further, in the above description, it has been described that the first set decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set decorative symbols 41D are temporarily stopped all at once in each of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D in the four-division effect. Not limited to this. For example, the first set decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set decorative symbols 41D may be temporarily stopped in order. Specifically, for example, in each of the first set decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set decorative symbols 41D, the left and right decorative symbols 41 may be temporarily stopped in order. After that, the development frame suggestion image 85 is displayed in order in each of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D, and which one may be selected may be encouraged.

Further, although the description is omitted above, the backgrounds of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D may be different from each other or may be configured by a common background in the four-division effect. For example, one image such as one map may be formed from the backgrounds in each of the four frames of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D.

Further, although the description is omitted above, a sliding door image covering each of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D may be displayed in the four-division effect. For example, after an image in which the fusuma image is closed all at once is displayed in each of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D, and the first set decorative pattern 41A to the fourth set decorative pattern 41D are covered with the fusuma image. , It may be a mode in which only the fusuma image of the developing frame is opened. In addition, such a fusuma image may be used in place of the development frame suggestion image 85. When white, blue, yellow, green, red, and gold are set as the colors of the fusuma image, the expectation may be set to be higher in this order.

Further, in the above description, it has been explained that the four-division effect is not executed in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the high-probability time-saving game state, the quadrant effect may be executed according to the result of the lottery using the effect random number which is one of the random numbers updated in S2503 of FIG. 25 (a).

Here, when the 4-split effect is executed and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order, the variable effect in which the reach effect is executed is fixedly stopped than the variable effect in which the reach effect is not executed. There may be a high probability that the temporary stop time after one symbol is displayed will be long. Here, the high probability that the temporary stop time after the three symbols for fixed stop are displayed is high includes that the temporary stop time is always long, that is, the probability is 100%.

Further, when the 4-split effect is executed and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order, the variable effect in which the reach effect is executed is more than the variable effect in which the reach effect is not executed. The execution probability of is high. Here, the fact that the execution probability of the stop-time drawing effect is high includes that the stop-time drawing effect is always executed, that is, the execution probability is 100%.

Further, in the above, it has been explained that various effect images are hidden. Here, instead of hiding the various effect images, for example, the color or transparency of the effect image may be changed to reduce the visibility.

Further, in the above, the decorative symbol 41 having a high decorativeness has a configuration having a numerical element 411, a numerical decorative element 412, and a character element 413, and the decorative symbol 41 having a low decorativeness has a numerical element 411 and a numerical decorative element 412. Although the configuration has been described as having the character element 413 while having the character element 413, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the decorative pattern 41 with high decorativeness may have an effect image element such as a so-called aura in addition to the numerical element 411, the numerical decorative element 412, and the character element 413. Further, for example, the decorative design 41 having low decorativeness may include a design such as a mark (for example, a hexagon) in addition to the number element 411 and the number decoration element 412. The decorative design 41 having low decorativeness can be regarded as a display mode mainly composed of the numerical element 411.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, the third embodiment will be described. In the following, for convenience of explanation, each constituent member will be newly added with a reference numeral. That is, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the third embodiment, and the fourth embodiment described later, the same reference numerals may be attached to different members.
(Composition of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

The game machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported by the outer frame 2, and a glass frame 4 rotatably supported by the game board mounting frame 3. A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a through which the game ball flows down is formed.

The outer frame 2 has a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion opens in the front-rear direction, and is a fixing member (for example, a nail, a stopper, etc.) to the island equipment of a game store. ) Is fixed.

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism portion 6 on one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism portion 6 as a fulcrum. Has been done. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed to the front, so that various devices provided on the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 are provided. It is possible to perform maintenance etc.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism portion 7 on one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism portion 7 as a fulcrum. There is. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front portion of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window portion) that opens in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the upper part of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (glass plate, acrylic plate, etc.) is formed so as to close the opening 8 from the rear. Is attached, and the game area 5a can be visually recognized through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, a sound output device 9 composed of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), and a game paid out from a game ball payout device 100 described later. The upper saucer 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as balls, the lower saucer 12 for receiving and storing the game balls that have flowed into the overflow ball flow path described later without being able to fit in the upper saucer 11, and the game balls. A launch operation device 13 that can be operated for firing is provided.

The audio output device 9 is provided at two locations above the glass frame 4 at intervals, and outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), etc. to produce sound (music, voice). It has become. Further, a plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and the lighting is produced by changing the light irradiation direction and the emission color of each lamp (LED). Further, the frame lighting device 10 includes a notification LED 10a (not shown) that is controlled to light / blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or a payout abnormality described later occurs.

In the upper tray 11, the bottom surface of the storage portion 11a of the game ball is inclined downward toward the direction side (right direction) of the launch operation device 13, and the ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. .. When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent out one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 side by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

Further, in the portion on the front side of the center of the upper tray 11, there are an effect button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see FIG. 71) that function as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various effects described later. It is installed side by side on the left and right.

The effect button device 16 includes an effect button 17 (not shown) capable of performing a determination operation (operation input), an effect button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 72) for detecting an operation on the effect button 17, and an effect button. A button drive device 17b (see FIG. 72) having a button drive motor for moving the 17 in the vertical direction is provided, and a player can input predetermined information to the game machine 1.

The selection button device 18 is connected to a cross key 19 (not shown) capable of performing an operation such as a selection operation, and a cross key detection switch 19a (not shown) for detecting an operation on the cross key 19. (See FIG. 72) is provided so that the player can input predetermined information into the game machine 1.

Further, a lending / returning operation unit 20 capable of lending a game ball and returning a storage medium such as a card storing a balance is provided in a portion to the right of the upper tray 11. When the lending button (not shown) of the lending / returning operation unit 20 is operated, the balance stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) attached to the gaming machine 1 is subtracted to lend the gaming ball. Is performed, and when the return button (not shown) of the lending / returning operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

An overflow ball flow path (not shown) for receiving a game ball that does not fit in the upper saucer 11 and guiding the game ball to the lower saucer 12 is formed between the upper saucer 11 and the lower saucer 12. Further, a saucer full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 72) for detecting that the game ball is full in the lower saucer 12 is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path, and the lower saucer 12 is full by the saucer full detection switch 32a. Is detected, the payout of the game ball by the game ball payout device 100, which will be described later, is stopped.

The launch operation device 13 is a touch sensor that detects that the base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, the launch handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, and the launch handle 15 are touched by the player's hand. A firing volume 15b (see FIG. 72) consisting of a 15a (see FIG. 72) and a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the firing handle 15, and a handle light emission for causing the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined mode. A device 15c is provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feed solenoid 11b is activated to feed the game balls one by one.

The handle light emitting device 15c constitutes a front side portion of the firing handle 15 and is formed in a dome shape that bulges forward, and a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an internal space defined by a lens member capable of transmitting light. Has been done. By emitting light from this LED, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect that causes the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined mode. Further, at the front end portion of the handle light emitting device 15c, a blower port 15d which is a blowout port of the wind (air) sent out from the blower device 21 described later is provided.

On the back surface side of the glass frame 4, a blower device 21 for sending wind (air) in a predetermined manner is provided at a position corresponding to the launch operation device 13. The blower device 21 includes a blower unit (not shown) for blowing out wind (air) and a blower motor (not shown) for operating the blower unit, and the blower unit 21 blows out air (air). ) Is sent from the air outlet 15d to the player's hand through the inside of the base 14 of the firing operation device 13 and the handle light emitting device 15c. By operating the blower device 21, it is possible to execute a blower effect of sending wind (air) in a predetermined manner toward the hand of the player who is operating the firing handle 15.

The blower 21 is not provided at a position corresponding to the launch operation device 13, but is provided around the decorative plate 2b of the outer frame 2 or around the transparent member 8a of the glass frame 4, and the wind (air) is directed toward the player. ) May be sent out. Further, a plurality of blower devices 21 may be provided.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion 25 for mounting the game board 5, a game ball launching device 26 for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a, a game board mounting frame 3, and a game board mounting frame 3. A locking mechanism 27 for locking the glass frame 4 in the closed state and an opening detection switch 31a for detecting the opening (opening / closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in a concave chamber shape with a front opening at substantially the center near the upper part of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided in the inner part of the concave chamber of the game board mounting portion 25, and various devices and the like provided on the back surface side of the game board 5 are provided behind the game machine 1 through this opening. Face.

The game ball launching device 26 includes a launching member 28 for launching a game ball, a launching solenoid 28b (see FIG. 72) for driving the launching member 28, and the launching member 28 toward the lower left portion of the game board. A launch rail 29 that inclines up and down, and a stopper 30 that stops the game ball A at a launch position that is the lower end of the incline of the launch rail 29 are provided. Then, when the game ball sent out by the ball feed solenoid 11b is received at the launch position, the game ball A is launched toward the game area 5a by the operation of the launch member 28.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25, and the front end portion of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4. Then, when a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame The lock of 4 is released and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

At positions near the outer edge of the game board 5, a curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 located outside the inner rail 35, and a guiding member for guiding the game ball toward the center of the game area 5a. 37 is provided. A launch ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 to guide the game ball launched by the game ball launcher 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a. Further, an out port 39 for guiding the flowing game ball to the outside of the game area (collection part of the game board mounting frame 3) is formed in the most downstream part of the game area 5a.

At the substantially center of the game area 5a, a frame-shaped decorative frame 40 that regulates the entry of the game ball into the so-called center case is provided, and an effect space 40a is formed inside the decorative frame 40. Further, on the side of the decorative frame 40, a warp device 41 for introducing a game ball flowing down the game area 5a into the decorative frame 40 is provided, and at the lower part of the decorative frame 40, the decorative frame 40 is provided by the warp device 41. There is provided a stage portion 42 that rolls the game ball introduced inside the frame 40 and causes it to flow down below the decorative frame 40.

At the bottom of the game area 5a, a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) general winning openings 43 capable of constantly winning (winning) a game ball are provided at intervals, and these general winning openings are provided. When a game ball winning (winning) in 43 is detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a (see FIG. 72), a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are awarded from the game ball payout device 100 (not shown). It is paid out to the upper saucer 11 as a ball.

On both sides (left side area, right side area) of the game area 5a, a normal map gate 44 (normal map start area) through which the game ball can pass is provided, and the game ball passing through the normal map gate 44 is provided. When it is detected by the gate detection switch 44a (see FIG. 72), a winning lottery (auxiliary game determination) of a normal symbol is performed. The winning lottery for ordinary symbols will be described later.

A first starting port 45 (special drawing starting area) is provided below the game area 5a and directly below the stage portion 42, on which a game ball can always win (win), and the first starting port 45 is provided. When the winning (winning) game ball is detected by the first start port detection switch 45a (see FIG. 72), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are received from the game ball payout device 100 as prize balls. It is supposed to be paid out to 11. In addition to paying out the prize balls, a big hit lottery (special game determination) for the first special symbol (identification information) described later is performed.

Immediately below the first starting port 45, a game ball is impossible or difficult to win (winning) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a winning lottery for a normal symbol). A variable starting portion 46 is provided, which can be converted into an open state (special mode) in which a winning (ball winning) is possible or easy.

The variable starting unit 46 detects a second starting port 47 (special drawing starting area) in which the game ball can win (winning) and a second starting port 47 (special drawing starting area) for detecting the winning (winning) of the game ball in the second starting port 47. A start port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 72), a movable member 48 that converts (variable) the second start port 47 into a closed state and an open state, and a second start port open / close solenoid for opening / closing the movable member 48. 48b (see FIG. 72) is provided. Then, when the second starting port 47 is in the closed state, it becomes impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the second starting port 47 is in the open state, the game ball is won (winning). (Entering the ball) is possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball winning (winning) in the second starting port 47 is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are used as prize balls from the game ball payout device 100. It is designed to be paid out to the upper saucer 11. In addition to paying out the prize balls, a big hit lottery (special game determination) for the second special symbol (identification information) described later is performed.

Above the guide member 37 and downstream of the normal gate 44 on the right side, a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won (winning) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a big hit lottery of a special symbol). A variable winning section 49 is provided, which converts the (basic aspect) into an open state (special aspect) in which a game ball can be won (winning).

The variable winning unit 49 includes a large winning opening 50 in which a game ball can be won (winning), and a large winning opening detection switch 50a for detecting the winning (winning) of a game ball in the large winning opening 50 (Fig.). 72), an opening / closing member 51 that converts (variablely) the large winning opening 50 into a closed state and an open state, and a large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b for opening / closing the opening / closing member 51. When the large winning opening 50 is closed, it becomes impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the large winning opening 50 is open, the game ball is won (winning ball). ) Is possible or easy.

Further, when the game balls that have won (winned) in the large winning opening 50 are detected by the large winning opening detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15) are received from the game ball payout device 100 as prize balls. It will be paid out to 11.

On the back side of the game board 5, the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, and the large winning opening 50 are won, and the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, A winning ball flow path 52 (not shown) is provided, which receives the game balls detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a and the large winning opening detection switch 50a, and causes them to flow down while being collected.

Further, in the downstream portion of the winning ball flow path 52, a winning confirmation detection switch 52a (see FIG. 72) for detecting a game ball that has flowed down the winning ball flow path 52 after being detected by various detection switches is provided. The winning confirmation detection switch 52a detects the game ball again after being detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, and the large winning opening detection switch 50a. It is used to determine whether the prize was a proper prize (ball) or an abnormal prize (ball).

On the outside of the game area 5a, a symbol display device including a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, and a normal symbol display 62, a first special symbol hold display 63, and a second special Symbol hold display 64, and. A hold display device consisting of a normal symbol hold display 65, a round number display 66 (see FIG. 72) that displays the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) described later occurs, and a jackpot game (special game) described later. A right-handed display 67 (see FIG. 72) that prompts the player to launch the game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a during the game state) or the time-saving game state is provided.

The first special symbol display 60 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45. The second special symbol display 61 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol, which is performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 47. It is a variable display, and the normal symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery of the normal symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) at the normal symbol gate 44. It is a vessel.

The big hit lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit judgment random value and a big hit by acquiring a big hit judgment random value etc. (judgment information) when a game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45. It corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "big hit" by comparing it with the determination value. When the big hit lottery of the first special symbol is performed, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 60, and the stop display of the first special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed. Will be. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

The big hit lottery of the second special symbol is the big hit judgment random value and the big hit by acquiring the big hit judgment random value etc. (judgment information) when the game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 47. It corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "big hit" by comparing it with the determination value. When the big hit lottery of the second special symbol is performed, the second special symbol display 61 displays the variation of the second special symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, the stop display of the second special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. Will be. That is, the stop display of the second special symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding indicators blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of each special symbol. do. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode (big hit mode, loss mode) indicating the result of each jackpot lottery.

In addition, in this embodiment, "big hit" means a big hit game (special game state) in the big hit lottery of the first special symbol (special game judgment) or the big hit lottery of the second special symbol (special game judgment). It refers to the state in which the right to execute is acquired. The "big hit game (special game state)" refers to a game state in which a round game in which the big winning opening 50 is opened in a predetermined mode is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times or 15 times).

Although the maximum number of open times and the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 50 in each round game are predetermined, a predetermined number of game balls are set in the large winning opening 50 even before the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time are reached. When (for example, 9 pieces) wins (balls), one round game ends. That is, the "big hit game (special game state)" is an advantageous game state for the player who can easily obtain the prize ball. In this embodiment, it is possible to generate any of a plurality of types of jackpot games (special game states) having different degrees of advantage to the player, which will be described in detail later.

In the winning lottery of the ordinary symbol, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44, the hit judgment random value is acquired, and the acquired hit judgment random value is compared with the hit judgment value to determine whether it is a "hit". Corresponds to determining whether or not. When the winning lottery of the normal symbol is performed, the normal symbol display 62 displays the variation of the normal symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, the stop display of the normal symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

The ordinary symbol display 62 is composed of one or a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variation display of the ordinary symbol. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode (hit mode or loss mode) indicating the result of the winning lottery.

In addition, in this embodiment, "hit" means a state in which the right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) is acquired in a winning lottery of ordinary symbols. The "hit game (auxiliary game)" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

Although the maximum number of times of opening and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the winning game (auxiliary game) are predetermined, the second starting port 47 can be used even before the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time are reached. When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9) are won (winning), the winning game (auxiliary game) ends. That is, the "hit game (auxiliary game)" is in a game state in which the variation display of the second special symbol is easily executed (the start condition of the variation display is easily satisfied). In this embodiment, a plurality of types of hit games (auxiliary games) having different degrees of advantage to the player are provided, which will be described in detail later.

The first special symbol hold display 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is stored when a game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45. The jackpot lottery of the first special symbol (of the first special symbol). It is for displaying the number of rights (first reserved storage) for performing variable display), and is lit or blinks in a mode indicating the number of first reserved storage. In addition, although the first hold storage is stored up to four, it may be less than or more than four.

The second special symbol hold display 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is stored when a game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 47. The second special symbol jackpot lottery (of the second special symbol). It is for displaying the number of rights (second reserved storage) for performing variable display), and is lit or blinks in a mode indicating the number of second reserved storage. The maximum number of the second reserved storages is four, but the number may be less than or more than four.

The normal symbol hold display 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and has the right to perform a winning lottery (variable display of the normal symbol) of the normal symbol stored when the game ball wins (passes) at the normal symbol gate 44. It is for displaying the number of (normal figure hold storage), and is lit or blinks in a mode indicating the number of normal figure hold storage. It should be noted that although the maximum number of reserved storages for the normal figure is four, the number may be less than or more than four.

The first special symbol display 60 and / or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured by a 7-segment LED. For example, if you win the big hit lottery of a special symbol, "7" will be stopped and displayed, if it is lost, "-" will be stopped and displayed, and if it is in a variable display, it will be turned off and "-". It is good to repeat. Before the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the stop result of the previous variation display is displayed by turning on the LED, so when the variation display starts, the variation display can be displayed by starting from turning off the LED. It becomes easier to understand that it has started.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) composed of a liquid crystal display is provided in the back of the effect space 40a, and is below the effect space 40a and in front of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display) composed of a liquid crystal display having a display area smaller than that of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) is provided, and the character's face is above the effect space 40a. A movable effect member 73 imitating the above is provided.
In the present embodiment, the "first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display)" and the "second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display)" may be collectively referred to as an "image display device".

The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display) perform various effect displays according to the progress of the game. As the effect display, a customer waiting demo effect executed when the special symbol variation display is not performed, a variation display of the effect symbol 70a executed when the special symbol variation display is performed, or a notice by a character. There is a production etc.

Further, the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display) is driven by a solenoid, a motor, or the like while executing the variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed by the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display). It is possible to perform a movement effect by moving with the device 75 (see FIG. 72).

Specifically, the standby position (first position) located near the end (lower) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the center side (upper) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). The movement effect is performed by moving (raising, descending) in the vertical direction to and from the effect position (second position) located at. The movement direction of the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal display) may be the left-right direction or the front-back direction, or the movement effect may be performed by operating the effect button 17.

Further, in the display unit (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), three rows of variable display areas such as a left side area, a central area, and a right side area are formed, and each variable display area has three columns of variable display areas. By scrolling the displayed effect symbol 70a in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in this embodiment), the effect symbol 70a is displayed in a variable manner.

The effect symbol 70a is composed of, for example, symbols showing numbers from "1" to "9", and is a variable display of the special symbol executed by the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61. Corresponding to (synchronizing with), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is performed. That is, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped in response to the stop of the variable display of the special symbol. As the effect symbol 70a, a symbol indicating an alphabet such as "A" to "F" may be provided in addition to the symbol indicating a number.

In the stop display of the effect symbol 70a, the effect symbol 70a is stopped for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode (missing mode, jackpot mode, etc.) indicating the result of the jackpot lottery. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same effect symbols such as "777" or a combination of regular effect symbols such as "357", and the loss mode is another mode. be. The mode of variable display of the effect symbol 70a is not limited to this, and may be scrolling in the left-right direction or rotating (rotating) on the spot.

Further, during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, various effect images such as reach effects, background images, characters, and movies are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and the second, depending on the result of the jackpot lottery. By displaying the image on the image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal display), the player's expectation for the occurrence of a big hit (special game state) (hereinafter referred to as "big hit winning expectation") is increased.

Here, the reach effect gives the player a sense of expectation for winning the jackpot, such that a part of the combination of the effect symbols 70a for notifying the jackpot is temporarily stopped and the other effect symbols 70a fluctuate. It means a variation mode. For example, when a combination of three-digit effect symbols 70a of "777" is set as a combination of effect symbols 70a for notifying a jackpot (big hit result mode), two effect symbols 70a are set in the left side region and the right side region. 7 ”is a mode in which the remaining effect symbol 70a is fluctuating in the central region after being temporarily stopped.

In addition, "temporary stop" means that the effect symbol 70a sways slightly or the effect symbol 70a is deformed slightly to make the player appear as if the effect symbol 70a is stopped (completely stopped). (Not) to say the aspect.

Further, in the present embodiment, there are five types of reach effects: "normal reach effect", "SP reach effect", "SPSP reach effect", and "full rotation reach effect".

In the "normal reach effect", two effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the left side area and the right side area, and the remaining one effect symbol 70a is in the center area while the background image before the normal reach effect is displayed. It is a fluctuating reach production.

The "SP reach effect" is a movie (movie) that has a longer time than the movie related to the normal reach effect, with two effect symbols 70a temporarily stopped in the left side area and the right side area, and the remaining one effect symbol 70a fluctuating in the center area. , Animation, etc.) is a flow of reach production.

"SPSP reach effect" is a longer time (feature) than the movie related to SP reach effect, with two effect symbols 70a temporarily stopped in the left side area and the right side area, and the remaining one effect symbol 70a fluctuating in the center area. It is a reach production in which a movie (movie, animation, etc.) is played.

The "full rotation reach effect" is a reach effect that fluctuates at a low speed with all combinations of a plurality of effect symbols 70a for notifying a big hit. In the present embodiment, it is a reach effect that is executed only when the jackpot lottery is won.

In the present embodiment, the expectation of winning a big hit related to the reach effect is higher in the order of normal reach effect <SP reach effect <SPSP reach effect <full rotation reach effect (big hit confirmed).

Further, in order to display the number of first hold icons corresponding to the first special symbol hold number (U1), which is the current number of first hold storages, on the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). 1st hold icon display area 70B and a second hold icon display area 70D for displaying a number of second hold icons corresponding to the current number of second hold icons (U2). And, the icon display area 70C for displaying the icon (related) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) being executed is formed.

The first hold icon display area 70B is partitioned from the side closer to the icon display area 70C in the form of a first display unit 70B1, a second display unit 70B2, a third display unit 70B3, a fourth display unit 70B4, and the like. On the display units 70B1 to 70B4, the number of first hold icons corresponding to the first special symbol hold number (U1) is displayed. That is, the number of the first hold icons is increased or decreased in accordance with the increase or decrease of the first special symbol hold number (U1).

Specifically, the first display unit 70B1 displays the first hold icon H11 indicating the first hold storage in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the second display unit 70B2 displays 2 First, the first hold icon H12 indicating the first hold memory on which the variation display of the first special symbol is executed is displayed, and the variation display of the first special symbol is executed third on the third display unit 70B3. The first hold icon H13 indicating the first hold memory is displayed, and the first hold icon H14 showing the first hold memory on which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed is displayed on the fourth display unit 70B4. Will be done.

The second hold icon display area 70D is partitioned from the side closer to the icon display area 70C in the form of a first display unit 70D1, a second display unit 70D2, a third display unit 70D3, a fourth display unit 70D4, and the like. The display units 70D1 to 70D4 display a number of second hold icons corresponding to the second special symbol hold number (U2). That is, the number of the second hold icons also increases or decreases in accordance with the increase or decrease in the number of the second special symbol hold (U2).

Specifically, the first display unit 70D1 displays the second hold icon H21 indicating the second hold storage in which the variation display of the second special symbol is executed first, and the second display unit 70D2 displays 2 Second, the second hold icon H22 indicating the second hold memory on which the variation display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed third on the third display unit 70D3. The second hold icon H23 indicating the second hold memory is displayed, and the second hold icon H24 showing the second hold memory in which the variation display of the second special symbol is executed fourth is displayed on the fourth display unit 70D4. Will be done. In the present embodiment, the "first special symbol hold number" may be referred to as the "first hold number" and the "second special symbol hold number" may be referred to as the "second hold number".

The icon display area 70C is the first hold icon or the second hold icon displayed on the first display unit 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B corresponding to the start of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). When the second hold icon displayed on the first display unit 70D1 of the hold icon display area 70D moves (shifts), the icon TH is displayed, and at the end of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). The icon TH disappears (erases). The icon may be extinguished in the middle of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). In the present embodiment, the "first hold icon", the "second hold icon", and the "corresponding icon" may be collectively referred to as an "icon".

The movable effect member 73 emits light by a panel lighting device 74 having a plurality of lamps (LEDs and the like) during execution of variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed by the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display). It is possible to perform a light emitting effect, and it is possible to perform a movement effect by moving by a panel drive device 75 (see FIG. 72) composed of a solenoid, a motor, or the like.

Specifically, the light emission effect is performed by emitting light of a plurality of lamps (LEDs and the like) with a predetermined light emission color according to the progress state of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. Further, it is located at a standby position (first position) located near the end (upper side) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and near the center (lower side) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display). The movement effect is performed by moving (raising, descending) in the vertical direction to and from the effect position (second position). It should be noted that the effect may be configured to perform a light emission effect or a movement effect by operating the effect button 17.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, from a game ball payout device 100 for paying out game balls based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize ball, ball lending), island equipment, etc. A main control device 110A (not shown) incorporating a game ball storage unit 101 (not shown) that stores the supplied game balls and supplies them to the game ball payout device 100, and a main control board 110 that collectively controls the progress of the game. ), A payout control device 120A (not shown) having a built-in payout control board 120 that controls the game ball payout device 100 in response to a payout control command from the main control board 110, and an effect control command from the main control board 110. An effect control device 130A (not shown) with a built-in effect control board 130 that controls the effect according to the situation, and a power supply device 160A (not shown) with a built-in power supply board 160 that supplies power supply voltage to various control devices. , A game information output terminal plate 90 (see FIG. 72) for outputting game information (game signal) is provided outside the game machine.

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 72. FIG. 72 is a block diagram of the entire gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

The main control board 110 comprehensively controls the progress (basic operation) of the game. The main control board 110 is a main control one equipped with a main CPU 110a for performing arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b in which a game control program and the like are stored, and a main RAM 110c (corresponding to a volatile storage means) serving as a work area during arithmetic processing. It is equipped with a chip microcomputer 110m, an input port for main control, an output port, and the like. The main CPU 110a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while utilizing the main RAM 110c as a work area, thereby performing arithmetic processing related to the game, thereby controlling devices (various solenoids and various displays). The device) is controlled, and a predetermined command based on the result of the arithmetic processing is transmitted to the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and the like.

Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured so that commands (data) can be communicated in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is the main control board. The command (data) can be communicated in only one direction from the 110 to the effect control board 130.

The input port of the main control board 110 has a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, a large winning opening detection switch 50a, and a winning confirmation detection switch 52a. , Magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, RAM clear switch 55a, payout control board 120 and the like are connected. When detection signals from various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, control processing according to the detection signals is performed.

The output port of the main control board 110 has a second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b, a winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, a normal symbol display 62, and a first special. The symbol hold indicator 63, the second special symbol hold indicator 64, the normal symbol hold indicator 65, the round number indicator 66, the right-handed display 67, the game information output terminal board 90, the effect control board 130, etc. are connected. Has been done. Drive control signals for controlling various solenoids, display control signals for controlling various indicators, and games notified to the outside of the gaming machine (hall computer, etc.) from the game information output terminal board via the output port. Information etc. are output.

The payout control board 120 is a secondary control board that controls the payout of the game ball based on the reception of the payout command from the main control board 110 and also controls the launch of the game ball. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the game ball payout device 100 to control the payout of the game ball, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the game ball launcher 26 to control the launch of the game ball.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores a payout program, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input port for payout control, an output port, and the like. .. The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown), reads out a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, performs arithmetic processing related to payout of the game ball while utilizing the payout RAM 121c as a work area, and performs a game ball payout device. 100 is controlled, and a predetermined command based on the result of arithmetic processing is transmitted to the main control board 110, the effect control board 130, and the like.

The input port of the payout control unit 121 has an open detection switch 31a, a saucer full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the game ball payout device 100, and a ball presence detection switch 101a provided in the game ball storage unit 101. And the like are connected, and the payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100 is connected to the output port of the payout control unit 121.

When the payout control unit 121 receives a payout command from the main control board 110, the payout control unit 121 drives a payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100 to perform control to pay out a predetermined number of game balls, and is controlled by the payout ball detection switch 100a. When the payout of a predetermined number of game balls is detected, the control of paying out the game balls is terminated.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit (not shown), an input port, an output port, and the like. A touch sensor 15a and a firing volume 15b are connected to the input port of the firing control unit 122, and a ball feed solenoid 11b, a firing solenoid 28b, and the like are connected to the output port of the firing control unit 122. ing.

When the launch control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15 by the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, the launch control unit 122 allows the ball feed solenoid 11b and the launch solenoid 28b to be energized. When it is detected that the rotation angle of the launch handle 15 has changed due to the detection signal from the launch volume 15b, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the launch intensity is set according to the rotation angle of the launch handle 15. The solenoid 28b is driven to launch a game ball.

The launching solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the launching member 28 is directly connected to the rotating shaft. When the rotating shaft rotates, the launching member 28 rotates to launch the game ball A. .. Since the operation of the launch solenoid 28b is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the launch control unit 122, the launch of the game ball in one minute. The number is about 99.9 (pieces / minute). That is, the game ball is fired about every 0.6 seconds.

The effect control board 130 is a slave control board (subordinate control means) that controls the effect (performed by the gaming machine 1) related to the game based on the reception of the effect command from the main control board 110. The effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores an effect control program, an effect control unit 130m that includes a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and a first image display device 70 (main). Display / sound control unit 140 that controls the liquid crystal display), the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display), the sound output device 9 (speaker), etc., the frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the button drive device 17b, and the blower device. It is provided with a lamp / drive control unit 150 that controls the 21 and the panel lighting device 74, the panel drive device 75, and the like, and an input port, an output port, and the like for effect control.

The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the game program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the production while utilizing the sub RAM 130c as a work area, thereby receiving a command received from the main control board 110. Controls are performed to cause various control units (display / voice control unit 140, lamp / drive control unit 150) to execute various effects in response to input signals from the effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a (display / voice control unit 140, lamp / drive control unit 150). Output data and commands).

An effect button detection switch 17a, a cross key detection switch 19a, and the like are connected to the input port of the effect control board 130. On the effect control board 130, an effect button detection signal indicating that the effect button 17 has been operated is input from the effect button detection switch 17a, or a cross key detection indicating that the cross key 19 has been operated from the effect key detection switch 19a is detected. When a signal (upper button detection signal, left button detection signal, lower button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, processing is performed to execute an effect according to the detection signal.

The display / voice control unit 140 is controlled to display a predetermined image on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display) in response to a command from the effect control unit 130m. Or control the sound output device 9 to output a predetermined sound.

The display / voice control unit 140 includes a centralized CPU 142 that performs arithmetic processing, an integrated ROM 143 that stores an integrated control program, an integrated control unit 141 that has an integrated RAM 144 that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and VDP as an image processor ( An image control unit 145 consisting of a Video Display Processor), a CGROM 146 in which image data and the like are stored, and a frame buffer and the like provided inside the image control unit 145 and temporarily storing drawing data generated from the image data. It includes a VRAM 147, a voice control unit 148 as a voice processor, a voice ROM 149 in which voice data and the like are stored, an input / output port and the like.

The control CPU 142 receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the display control program stored in the control ROM 143, performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the control RAM 144 as a work area, and receives the command from the effect control unit 130 m. The image control unit 145 and the voice control unit 148 are controlled to execute various effects (data and commands are output) in response to the effect instruction command and the like.

The general ROM 143 is composed of a mask ROM or the like, and displays a display control program for displaying an image, a display list generation program for generating a display list composed of drawing control commands, and an animation of an effect pattern. The animation pattern, animation scene information, etc. for the purpose are stored.

This animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation constituting a specific content of an effect by an image, and the animation pattern is associated with animation scene information, a display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes weight frames (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transparency, etc.), drawing method. , The duty ratio which is a parameter of the brightness of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is included.

The image control unit 145 (VDP) is connected to a CGROM 146 that stores various image data, and is stored in the CGROM 146 and commands (display list, drawing command, etc.) from the general control unit 141 (general CPU 142). The drawing data that is the source of the video signal (RGB signal, etc.) is generated based on the image data. The image data is an image (frame) to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), for example, an effect symbol image and a background image constituting the background of the effect symbol. , Character images, and material data representing individual images such as dialogue images. On the other hand, the drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of the entire frame composed of composite (superimposed) individual images.

The CGROM 146 is composed of a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, etc., and compresses and stores image data (sprites, movies), etc., which are a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information that specifies a color number for each pixel and an α value that indicates the transparency of the image. The CGROM 146 is read out in image data units by the image control unit 145 (VDP), and image processing is performed in image data units of this frame.

Further, the CGROM 146 stores the palette data in which the color number information for designating the color number and the display color information for actually displaying the color are associated with each other without compression. The CGROM 146 may be configured to compress only a part of the image data without compressing all the image data. Further, as the movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

The VRAM 147 is composed of an SRAM having a high speed of writing or reading image data. The VRAM 143 has a display list storage area for temporarily storing a display list output from the control unit 141 (control CPU 142), a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), and a second image display device 71 (sub). It has a frame buffer area and the like corresponding to the liquid crystal display).

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying an image, and further has a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched between the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" at each start of drawing.

Therefore, the image control unit 145 (VDP) uses the drawing data stored in the CGROM 146 as a "drawing frame buffer" in the frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 based on the instruction (display list) from the control unit 141 (control CPU 142). The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), which draws on the image, reads the drawing data from the "display frame buffer" in the frame buffer area, generates a video signal (RGB signal, etc.) based on the read drawing data, and The data is output to the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display various images.

An operating clock is supplied to the image control unit 145 (VDP) from the crystal oscillator, and by dividing the operating clock, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and the second image display are displayed. A synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal / vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is generated, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) Output to. In the present embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps (1/30 second = about 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second. It may be set to 60 fps (1/60 second = about 16.6 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 60 times per second.

Further, a general-purpose image data is converted into a predetermined image format and output between the image control unit 145, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display). The board 72 is connected. The general-purpose board 72 has a bridge function for converting into an image format corresponding to the performance of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) for displaying image data and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display). For example, the difference in resolution between when a 19-inch liquid crystal display device of SXGA (1280 dots x 1080 dots) is connected and when a 17-inch liquid crystal display device of XGA (1024 dots x 768 dots) is connected. Absorb.

The voice control unit 148 is connected to the voice output device 9, and is the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) based on various effect data (including commands) transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m. 2 Control is performed to output audio data, music data (BGM, SE), etc. from the audio output device 9 in accordance with the display of the image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display).

The lamp / drive control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp / drive control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input / output port, and the like.

The lamp CPU 150a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp / drive control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the lamp RAM 150c as a work area, thereby performing arithmetic processing related to the effect from the effect control unit 130 m. In response to the received effect instruction command or the like, control is performed to cause a controlled device such as various lighting devices or various drive devices to perform a predetermined effect (outputs data and commands).

A frame lighting device 10, a handle light emitting device 15c, a button driving device 17b, a blower device 21, and a panel lighting device 74 are connected to the input / output ports of the lamp / drive control unit, and the effect control unit 130m (sub CPU 130a). ), Based on various effect data (including commands) transmitted from), lighting control of various LEDs of the frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, and the panel lighting device 74 is performed to perform light emission effect and the like. Alternatively, an operation effect (the above-mentioned movement effect) or the like is performed by controlling the drive of a drive source such as a button drive device 17b, a blower device 21, and a motor or a solenoid of the panel drive device 75.

The power supply board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for operating the gaming machine from a power supply supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and uses the main power supply as the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, etc.). It is supplied to the effect control board 130 and various electronic components). The power supply board 160 includes a power failure detection circuit 162 that detects whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of the power failure (power failure). A backup power supply circuit 163 for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 when the power is cut off (power failure) is provided.

Further, the power supply board 160 is for switching between an ON state in which the main power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state in which the main power is stopped. The power switch is provided so that it can be operated by a clerk of the game store, and when the power switch is turned on, the main power supply is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. Even if the power switch is in the OFF state, the supply of the backup power supply to the main control board 110 is maintained.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes a predetermined value or less. More specifically, the main CPU 110a in which the power failure detection signal is at a high level is in an operable state, and when the power failure detection signal is in a low level, the main CPU 110a is in an operation stopped state.

The backup power supply circuit 163 is provided with a capacitor that stores electricity when the gaming machine is energized, and when a power failure (power failure) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is applied to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. Supply. As a result, the stored contents of the main RAM 110c and the payout RAM 121c are retained even when the power is cut off (power failure), and the control state of the game is changed to the state before the power cut (power failure) after the recovery from the power failure (power failure). It can be restored. The backup power may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130.

(Explanation of game status)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, the state relating to the jackpot lottery of the special symbol has a "low probability gaming state" and the "high probability gaming state", and the state relating to the movable member 48 possessed by the second starting port 47 is a "non-time saving game". It has a "state" and a "time saving game state".

In this embodiment, the following three gaming states are provided.
(1) Low-probability non-time-saving gaming state that is "low-probability gaming state" and "non-time-saving gaming state" (2) Low-probability time-saving gaming state that is "low-probability gaming state" and "time-saving gaming state" (3) " High-probability time-saving game state that is both "high-probability game state" and "time-saving game state"

The gaming state when the game is started, that is, the initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1, is set to the "low probability non-time saving gaming state", and this gaming state is set to the "normal gaming state" in the present embodiment. I will call it. In the present embodiment, the "low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state" and the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" may be referred to as "specific gaming states" because they are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. ..

In the present embodiment, the "low-probability gaming state" is a big hit in the big hit lottery of the special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball enters the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47. It refers to a gaming state in which the winning probability is set as low as 1/299, for example. On the other hand, the "high probability gaming state" refers to a gaming state in which the jackpot winning probability is improved as compared with the low probability gaming state, and the jackpot winning probability is set as high as, for example, 1 / 59.8. .. Therefore, in the "high-probability gaming state", it is easier to win the jackpot than in the "low-probability gaming state". It should be noted that the change from the low-probability gaming state to the high-probability gaming state is performed after the jackpot game described later is completed.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the high-probability gaming state is referred to as "probability variation jackpot". In addition, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the low-probability gaming state is called "normal jackpot".

In the present embodiment, the "non-time saving game state" is a change in the average of the normal symbols corresponding to the lottery result in the winning lottery of the normal symbols performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 44. It refers to a game state in which the time is set longer than the "short-time game state", and the opening time of the second starting port 47 when a winner is won is set short. For example, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44, a winning lottery for the normal symbol is performed, and the normal symbol display 62 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol. For example, the stop display is displayed after 30 seconds. Then, when the lottery result is a hit, the second start port 47 is controlled in the open mode for, for example, 0.2 seconds after the stop display of the normal symbol.

On the other hand, the "time saving game state" is the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the winning lottery of the normal symbol performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44. A gaming state that is set shorter than the "non-time saving game state" and that the opening time of the second starting port 47 when winning is set to be, for example, 2.5 seconds, which is longer than the "non-time saving game state". Say. Further, in the "non-time saving game state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set as low as 1/128, for example, and in the "time saving game state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is, for example 127. It is set as high as / 128. Therefore, in the "time saving game state", when the game ball passes through the normal drawing gate 44, the second starting port 47 is more likely to be controlled in the open mode than in the "non-time saving gaming state". As a result, in the "short-time game state", the player can advantageously advance the game without consuming the game ball.

In the embodiment, the "time-saving game state" has more advantages than the "non-time-saving game state" in terms of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery. Is set. However, the "time saving game state" may be set so that only one of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is advantageous. .. Further, in the non-time saving game state, the probability of winning in the winning lottery of the normal symbol may be, for example, 0/128.

(Type of jackpot)
Next, the types of jackpots will be described.

In the present embodiment, "first jackpot", "second jackpot", and "third jackpot" are selected as the types of jackpots that can be won in the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45. It has "first jackpot" and "second jackpot" as the types of jackpots that can be won in the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47.

The "first big hit" is to execute the first big hit game in which the big winning opening 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then the big winning opening 50 is closed for 2 seconds up to 10 times. It's a big hit. In the round game, one round game ends when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the large winning opening 50 even before the opening time elapses.

After the end of the first big hit game, the high-accuracy time-saving game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, from the jackpot winning probability in the high probability gaming state, the next jackpot is substantially determined.

The "second jackpot" is a jackpot that executes a second jackpot game in which a round game is executed up to 10 times. After the end of the second big hit game, the game is set to a low-probability time-saving game state until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 100 times.

The "third jackpot" is a jackpot that executes a third jackpot game in which a round game is executed up to four times. After the end of the third big hit game, the high-accuracy time-saving game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, from the jackpot winning probability in the high probability gaming state, the next jackpot is substantially determined.

It should be noted that the number of variable display times (in this embodiment, the above-mentioned 100 times or 10000 times) of the specific game state (high-probability short-time game state, low-probability short-time game state) set after the big hit game is referred to as "high probability". It may be expressed as "number of times" or "time reduction number of times".

In the present embodiment, the number of types of jackpots is three, but the number is not limited to three, and may be less than or more than three. Further, the opening time of the opening / closing member 51 is set to 29.5 seconds regardless of which big hit (1st big hit to 3rd big hit), but the opening time does not have to be 29.5 seconds, and it depends on the round game. It may have different opening times.

(Type of hit)
Next, the types of hits will be described.

In the present embodiment, there are "first hit" and "second hit" as the types of hits that can be won in the winning lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the Fuzu Gate 44, and the winning lottery is executed. If the gaming state at the time of being played is a non-time-saving gaming state, it is a "first hit", and if the gaming state at the time of executing the winning lottery is a time-saving gaming state, it is a "second hit".

The "first hit" is a hit in which the first hit game in which the second starting port 47 is opened for a maximum of 0.2 seconds is executed. That is, it is a hit game in which the movable member 48 is opened once.

The "second hit" is a hit in which the second start opening 47 is opened for 2.6 seconds, then closed for 1.5 seconds, and then opened again for 2.6 seconds. .. That is, it is a hit game in which the movable member 48 is opened twice.

In the first hit game and the second hit game, the hit game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the large winning opening 50 even before the opening time elapses.

In this way, in the "time-saving game state", the game ball is easily won in the second starting port 47, and the player is more advantageous in the game without consuming the game ball than in the "non-time-saving game state". It is possible to proceed.

Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board 110.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 110a, and the main CPU 110a performs the following main processing.

First, the main CPU 110a performs an initialization process in step S10. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the boot program is read from the main ROM 110b, and the flag stored in the main RAM 110c is initialized.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the reach determination random value for determining the variation mode (variation time) of the special symbol and the special symbol determination random value, and in step S30, the jackpot determination is performed. The initial value random value update process for updating the initial value random value, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination is performed.

Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred in step S40. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power failure detection signal has been input from the power failure detection circuit of the power supply board 160, and if the power failure detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S20 to detect the power failure. If a signal is input, the process proceeds to step S41.

The main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interruption in step S41, performs a process of clearing the output port in step S42, calculates a checksum of the main RAM 110c in step S43, and stores a predetermined value. The process of storing in the area is performed, in step S44, the process of turning on the backup flag to be referred to at the time of recovery from the power failure is performed, and in step S45, the process of prohibiting RAM access is performed, and the power supply voltage supply is completely cut off. Wait until it hangs down.

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) on the main control board 110.

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, the special game timer counter such as the update process of the special symbol time counter, the release time of the special electric accessory, and the like. Time control processing for updating various timer counters, such as update processing of the normal symbol time counter, update processing of the opening / closing time of the movable member 48, and the like. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from counters such as a special symbol time counter, a special game timer counter, a normal symbol time counter, a start port open timer counter, and a start port close timer counter is performed.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a determines a random number value for jackpot determination, a random number value for determining a special symbol, a random number value for determining a special symbol variation pattern, a random number value for hit determination, a random number value for determining a normal symbol, and a random number for determining a normal symbol. Performs specific random number update processing to update the random number value. Specifically, each random number value and random number counter are added by +1 and updated. If the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter makes one round), the random number counter is returned to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the round, it corresponds. Initial value to be set The random number value is set as a new lap initial value and the random number value is newly updated.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a sets the initial value random value for jackpot determination, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination in step S130, as in step S30. Initial value to be updated Random value Update processing is performed.

In step S200, the main CPU 110a includes a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a large winning opening detection switch 50a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, a gate detection switch 44a, a winning confirmation detection switch 52a, and the like. It is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches, and if there is an input, an input control process for setting predetermined data is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 75.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol memory determination (big hit determination, etc.), special symbol display control, opening / closing control of the big winning opening 50 (opening / closing member 51), game state control, and the like. Perform processing. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 77.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs a normal symbol memory control process for performing normal symbol memory determination (hit determination, etc.), normal symbol display control, opening / closing control of the second starting port 47 (movable member 48), and the like. ..

Next, in step S500, the main CPU 110a transmits a payout state confirmation designation command for confirming the payout state of the payout control board 120 to the payout control board 120, or a prize ball counter (three prize ball counters, which will be described later). With reference to the 10 prize ball counter and the 15 prize ball counter), a payout control process for transmitting a payout number designation command corresponding to various winning openings to the payout control board 120 is performed. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out the prize balls from the game ball payout device 100.

In step S600, the main CPU 110a determines the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or a radio wave abnormality based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and determines the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or a radio wave abnormality, and specifies a magnetic abnormality error designation command or a radio wave abnormality error designation. Performs magnetic / radio wave abnormality determination processing for transmitting a command to the effect control board 130. When the effect control board 130 receives the magnetic abnormality error designation command or the radio wave abnormality error designation command, the effect control board 130 performs control for performing the magnetic abnormality error notification and the radio wave abnormality error notification.

In step S700, the main CPU 110a outputs external information data (game information) output from the game information output terminal plate 90, starting port opening / closing data output to the second starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, and large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b. Winning opening opening / closing data, special symbol display data output to the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display data output to the normal symbol display 62, the first special symbol hold indicator 63 and Data creation processing is performed to create data such as special symbol hold display data to be output to the second special symbol hold display 64 and normal symbol hold display data to be output to the normal symbol hold display 65.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a has port output processing for outputting signals such as external information data, start opening opening / closing data, and large winning opening opening / closing data created in step S700, special symbol display data, and normal symbol display data. , Display output processing to output signals such as special symbol hold display data, normal symbol hold display data, and payout command transmission process to send commands set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120. Or, an output control process for executing an effect command transmission process for transmitting a command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the effect control board 130 is performed.

The types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 78 and 79.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a returns the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the timer interrupt process this time.

(Input control processing of the main control board)
The input control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an input control process on the main control board 110.

In step S210, the main CPU 110a performs a general winning opening detection switch input process. In this general winning opening detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the general winning opening 43. If there is no detection signal input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the process proceeds to step S220.

When the detection signal is input from the general prize opening detection switch 43a, the data indicating 10 prize balls is added to the prize ball counter (10 prize ball counter) for the general winning opening used for the prize balls and updated. Then, "1" is added to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls entered in the winning opening to update (D ← D + 1), and then the general winning opening detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening detection switch input process. In this big winning opening detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is input from the big winning opening detection switch 50a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the big winning opening 50. If there is no detection signal input from the large winning opening detection switch 50a, the process proceeds to step S230.

When the detection signal from the large prize opening detection switch 50a is input, the data indicating 15 prize balls is added to the prize ball counter (15 prize ball counters) for the large prize opening used for the prize balls. Update and update (D ← D + 1) by adding "1" to the prize ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the prize opening, and whether or not the current game state is in the special game state. Is determined. When the current game state is in the special game state, "1" is added to the round prize counter (C) for counting the game balls won in the large prize opening 50 and updated (C ← C + 1). , Grand prize opening detection switch Ends the input process.

If the current game state is not in the special game state, an illegal winning ball indicating the number of game balls that have won (winned) in the specific winning opening (second starting opening 47, large winning opening 50) outside the winning period. "1" is added to the counter (E) and updated (E ← E + 1), and it is determined whether or not the value of the illegal winning ball counter (E) is larger than the specified number (for example, 10), and the illegal winning is won. If the value of the ball counter (E) is less than or equal to the specified number, the large winning opening detection switch input process is terminated.

If the value of the illegal winning ball counter (E) is larger than the specified number, it is assumed that an illegal winning (illegal winning) has occurred in which the game ball wins (wins) outside the winning period, and an error for illegal winning is specified. Set the command in the transmission data storage area for production. As a result, the error designation command for illegal winning is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 notifies that the illegal winning error has occurred to notify that the illegal winning has occurred.

Then, external information data (output data) for outputting an illegal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and the illegal winning ball counter (E) is cleared to detect a large winning opening. The switch input process ends. As a result, the illegal winning signal is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and it becomes possible to grasp (specify) that the illegal winning has occurred in the external device.

The main CPU 110a performs the first start port detection switch input process in step S230. In this first start port detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first start port 45. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 76.

The main CPU 110a performs the second start port detection switch input process in step S240. In this second start port detection switch input process, substantially the same process as the first start port detection switch input process shown in FIG. 76, which will be described later, is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs a gate detection switch input process in step S250. In this gate detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal gate 44. If the detection signal is not input from the gate detection switch 44a, the gate detection switch input process is terminated.

When the detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, it is determined whether or not the number of normal figure hold storage, which is the number of normal figure hold storage stored in the normal symbol hold storage area, is less than 4. If the number of reserved figures is not less than 4, the gate detection switch input process is terminated.

If the number of holdings of the normal figure is less than 4, "1" is added to the number of holdings of the normal figure and updated, and the random value for hit judgment, the random value for determining the normal symbol, and the random value for determining the normal symbol fluctuation pattern are added. Acquired, the vacant storage unit is searched in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol reservation storage area, the acquired random number value is stored in the vacant storage unit, and the gate detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S260, the main CPU 110a performs a winning confirmation detection switch input process. In this winning confirmation detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the winning confirmation detection switch 52a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the winning ball flow path 52. If the detection signal is not input from the winning confirmation detection switch 52a, the input control process ends.

When the detection signal is input from the winning confirmation detection switch 52a, the winning ball counter (D) is subtracted by "1" and updated (D ← D-1), and the value of the winning ball counter (D) is the upper limit value (D). For example, it is determined whether or not it is within the range of 20) and the lower limit value (for example, -10).

If the value of the winning ball counter (D) does not fall within the range between the upper limit value and the lower limit value, it is assumed that an abnormal winning (winning ball) has occurred and an error designation command for abnormal winning is sent to the transmission data storage area for production. Set, set the external information data (output data) for outputting the abnormal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 in the predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, clear the winning ball counter (D), and clear the winning confirmation detection switch. End the input process. The sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the error designation command for abnormal winning is notified of the abnormal winning error to notify that the abnormal winning has occurred.

(First start port detection switch input process on the main control board)
The first start port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a first start port detection switch input process on the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a determines in step S230-1 whether or not the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is input. When the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is input, the process is transferred to step S230-2, and when the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is not input, the current first step is performed. 1 Start port detection switch Input processing is completed.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating data indicating three prize balls to the three prize ball counter used for the prize balls, and in step S230-3, the winning opening is won (winning). "1" is added to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered) to update (D ← D + 1).

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of first special symbol reservations (U1), which is the number of first reserved storages stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area, is less than four. .. If the number of first special symbol reservations (U1) is less than 4, the process is transferred to step S230-5, and if the number of first special symbol reservations (U1) is not less than 4, the first start of this time is performed. Mouth detection switch Ends input processing.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the first special symbol hold number (U1) and updating (U1 ← U1 + 1), and in step S230-6, the updated first special The first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the number of reserved symbols (U1) is set in the transmission data storage area for effect.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a acquires special figure determination information (big hit determination random value, special symbol determination random value, reach determination random value, special figure fluctuation pattern determination random value), and is the first special. The vacant storage unit is searched in order from the first storage unit in the symbol reservation storage area, and the acquired special figure determination information is stored in the vacant storage unit.

As described above, the special symbol determination information (big hit determination random value, special symbol determination random value, reach determination random value, and special symbol variation pattern determination) is stored in the predetermined storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area. The first hold storage consisting of random values, etc.) will be stored.

The main CPU 110a performs the first pre-determination process in step S230-8. In this first pre-judgment process, the pre-judgment table (not shown) is referred to, and the special figure judgment information (first hold storage) acquired this time is displayed before the variation display of the special symbol based on the judgment information is performed. Judgment is made, and the scheduled fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern to be executed, is determined.

In step S230-9, the main CPU 110a sets the first start opening winning designation command corresponding to the scheduled fluctuation pattern determined in the first pre-determination process of step S230-8 in the transmission data storage area for production, and this time. The first start port detection switch input process of the above is terminated.

As a result, the scheduled fluctuation pattern can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the first start port prize designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the first start port prize designation command receives the first start port prize. The designated command is analyzed, and a predetermined notice effect is produced over one or a plurality of variable displays executed before or before the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first start opening winning designated command is started. It is possible to execute a look-ahead notice effect. The look-ahead notice effect is performed by using one or a plurality of the image display device, the sound output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the movable effect member 73, and the board lighting device 74.

Regarding the second start port detection switch input process, the first start port detection switch 45a, the first special symbol hold storage area, the first hold storage, the first special symbol hold number (U1), and the first special symbol storage designation. The command, the first pre-judgment process, and the first start port winning designation command are executed by the second start port detection switch 47a, the second special symbol hold storage area, the second hold storage, the second special symbol hold number (U2), and the first. 2 It may be read as a special symbol memory designation command, a second pre-judgment process, and a second start opening winning designation command.

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
The special figure special electric control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a loads the special figure special electric processing data in step S301, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special electric processing data loaded in step S302, and stores the special symbol if the special figure special electric processing data = 0. The process is transferred to the determination process (step S310), the process is transferred to the special symbol variation process (step S320) if the special figure special electric process data = 1, and the special symbol stop process (step) if the special figure special electric process data = 2. S330), if the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the processing is transferred to the jackpot game processing (step S340), and if the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the processing is performed in the big hit game end processing (step S350). Move.

This "special figure special electric processing data" is set as necessary in each subroutine of the special figure special electric control processing as described later, so that the subroutine necessary for the game is appropriately processed. ..

In step S310, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol storage determination process of determining a jackpot, determining the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed, and determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol.

Specifically, first, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is "1" or more, and when the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is not "1" or more. In, it is determined whether or not the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is "1" or more, and when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not "1" or more ("0"). Determines whether or not the customer waiting state determination flag for determining whether or not the variable display of the special symbol and the start of the customer waiting state in which the jackpot game is not executed is "0".

When the customer waiting state determination flag is "0", it is assumed that the customer waiting state has started, the customer waiting state specification command is set in the transmission data storage area for production, and the special figure special electric processing data = 0 is maintained. If the customer waiting status determination flag is not "0" after the current special symbol storage determination processing is completed, it is assumed that the customer waiting status has already started, and the special symbol special electric processing data = 0 is maintained. This special symbol memory determination process is terminated.

When the number of second special symbol reservations (U2) is "1" or more, "1" is subtracted from the value stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area, and then the second special symbol reservation storage area is stored. Various random value values (special figure determination information) stored in a certain first storage unit to the fourth storage unit are shifted to the previous storage unit, and the number corresponding to the second special symbol hold number (U2) after subtraction is obtained. 2 Set the special symbol storage specification command in the transmission data storage area for production.

Then, the main CPU 110a makes a jackpot determination for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot game. Specifically, the special symbol determination random value among the various random value values (special symbol determination information) shifted from the first storage unit to the 0th storage unit in the second special symbol reservation storage area, and the current probability. Based on the gaming state (low-probability gaming state, high-probability gaming state), it is determined whether the jackpot game is a "big hit" or a "loss".

On the other hand, when the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is not "1" or more and the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is "1" or more, the first special symbol reservation storage area is stored. After subtracting "1" from the stored value, various random value stored in the first to fourth storage units in the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the previous storage unit. The first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) after subtraction is set in the transmission data storage area for effect.

Then, the main CPU 110a makes a jackpot determination for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot game. Specifically, the special symbol determination random value among the various random value values (special symbol determination information) shifted from the first storage unit to the 0th storage unit in the first special symbol reservation storage area, and the current probability. Based on the gaming state (low-probability gaming state, high-probability gaming state), it is determined whether the jackpot game is a "big hit" or a "loss".

Then, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol determination process for determining the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the jackpot determination is performed based on the random value for determining the special symbol stored in the 0th storage unit of the 2nd special symbol reservation storage area, it is stored in the 0th storage unit. The jackpot special symbol or the loss special symbol is determined based on the random value for the jackpot symbol, and the effect symbol designation command corresponding to the determined special symbol is set in the effect transmission data storage area.

Further, when the jackpot determination is performed based on the random value for determining the special symbol stored in the 0th storage unit of the 1st special symbol reservation storage area, the jackpot symbol stored in the 0th storage unit is used. A special symbol (big hit special symbol, loss special symbol) is determined based on the random number value, and the effect symbol designation command corresponding to the determined special symbol is set in the effect transmission data storage area.

Next, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol variation pattern determination process for determining a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. Specifically, when the jackpot determination is performed based on the random value for determining the special symbol stored in the 0th storage unit of the 2nd special symbol reservation storage area, it is stored in the 0th storage unit. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the reach determination random value and the special symbol fluctuation random value, and the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is set in the special symbol time counter to obtain the determined fluctuation pattern. Set the corresponding variation pattern specification command in the transmission data storage area for production.

Further, when the jackpot determination is performed based on the random value for determining the special symbol stored in the 0th storage unit of the 1st special symbol reservation storage area, the reach determination is stored in the 0th storage unit. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random value and the random value for special symbol fluctuation, the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is set in the special symbol time counter, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is set. Set the specified command in the transmission data storage area for production.

Then, the main CPU 110a sets the variation display data for causing the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 to display the variation of the special symbol (blinking of the LED) in the predetermined processing area. ..

As a result, when the variable display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the data for turning on or off the LED is appropriately created in step S600, and the created data is output in step S700. The variable display of the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 is performed.

Then, the special symbol special electric processing data = 0 is set to the special symbol special electric processing data = 1, and preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special symbol variation processing, and the current special symbol storage determination processing is completed.

In step S320, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol variation process for determining whether or not the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the special symbol set in step S310 has elapsed (special symbol time counter = 0). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the special symbol variation processing this time is terminated while maintaining the special symbol special electric processing data = 1.

When the fluctuation time has elapsed, the special symbol determined in step S310 is displayed on the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 to stop and display the jackpot special symbol or the lost special symbol. , Set the predetermined special symbol stop time (0.5 seconds) in the special symbol time counter. As a result, the player is notified of the determination result of the jackpot determination.

Then, the special symbol special electric processing data = 1 is set to the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special symbol stop processing, and the special symbol change processing this time is completed.

In step S330, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol stop process for determining whether or not the stop time (0.5 seconds) of the special symbol has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the stop time of the special symbol set in step S320 has elapsed (special symbol time counter = 0). If the stop time has not elapsed, the special symbol stop processing this time is terminated while maintaining the special figure special electric processing data = 2.

When the stop time has elapsed, when the number of time reductions> 0, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction counter to update, when the number of time reductions = 0, the time reduction game flag is cleared, and when the number of high probability times> 0, it is high. It is updated by subtracting 1 from the probability count counter, and when the high probability count = 0, the high probability game flag is cleared.

Then, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop-displayed special symbol is a jackpot special symbol. In the case of a big hit special symbol, the time saving game flag, the high probability game flag, the time saving number counter, and the high probability number counter are cleared, and the special figure special electric processing data = 2 to the special figure special electric processing data = 3 are set. Then, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the jackpot game processing, and the special symbol stop processing of this time is completed.

On the other hand, in the case of a lost special symbol, the special symbol special electric processing data = 2 is set to the special symbol special electric processing data = 0, and preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special symbol storage determination processing, and this special symbol stop processing is performed. To finish.

In step S340, the main CPU 110a is for executing the first jackpot game, the second jackpot game, or the third jackpot game based on the type (stop symbol data) of the jackpot special symbol set in step S310. Perform jackpot game processing.

Specifically, the opening time of the opening / closing member 51 according to the type of the jackpot game is set in the special game timer counter, and the drive data of the big winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b is output to open the opening / closing member 51. At this time, 1 is added to the round game count (R) storage area.

When a specified number of game balls win (win) during this opening, or when the opening time of the large winning opening elapses (round winning counter (C) = 10 or special game timer counter = 0), the size is large. The output of the drive data of the winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b is stopped to close the opening / closing member 51. As a result, one round game is completed. Also, the counter value of the round winning counter (C) is cleared.

When the predetermined number of round games (4 times or 16 times in the present embodiment) is completed, the data stored in the round game number (R) storage area is cleared, and the special figure special electric processing data = 3 To special figure special electric processing data = 4, prepare to move to the subroutine of big hit game end processing, and end this big hit game processing.

In step S350, the main CPU 110a determines either the high-probability gaming state or the low-probability gaming state, and also determines the time-saving gaming state or the non-time-saving gaming state. Performs jackpot game end processing.

Specifically, based on the type of jackpot special symbol (stop symbol data) set in step S310, the setting of the high probability game flag, the setting of the high probability number of times, the setting of the time saving game flag, and the setting of the time saving number of times are performed. Then, the special figure special electric processing data = 4 is set to the special figure special electric processing data = 0, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special symbol storage determination processing, and the current jackpot game end processing is completed.

(Explanation of commands related to the production control board)
78 and 79 will be used to describe the types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. 78 and 79 are diagrams showing the types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130.

The "first special symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved storages stored in the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area, "MODE" is set to "E0H", and the number of reserved storages is set. DATA information is set according to.

When the value stored in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area increases or decreases, this first special symbol storage designation command waits for storage after the increase or decrease in step S230-11 or step S310. The first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the number is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "second special symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved storages stored in the second special symbol holding number (U2) storage area, "MODE" is set to "E0H", and the number of reserved storages is set. DATA information is set according to.

When the value stored in the second special symbol storage number (U2) storage area is increased or decreased, the second special symbol storage designation command is used to change the reserved storage number after the increase or decrease in step S240 or step S310. The corresponding second special symbol storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

In this embodiment, the "first special symbol storage designation command" and the "second special symbol storage designation command" may be collectively referred to as a "special symbol storage designation command".

The "effect symbol designation command" indicates the type (type) of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed. If it is the first special symbol, "MODE" is set to "E1H", and if it is the second special symbol, "MODE". Is set in "E2H", and DATA information is set according to the type of special symbol. Since the type of the special symbol eventually determines the type of the jackpot and the game state after the jackpot ends, the effect symbol designation command can be said to indicate the type of the jackpot and the game state after the jackpot ends. ..

In this effect symbol designation command, when various special symbols are determined and the variable display of the special symbol is started, the effect symbol designation command corresponding to the special symbol in the above step S310 is the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Is set to, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "first special symbol variation pattern designation command" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, "MODE" is set to "E3H", and various variations are made. DATA information is set according to the pattern.

This first special symbol variation pattern designation command is a first special symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern in step S310 when the variation display of the special symbol of the first special symbol display 60 is started. The pattern designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "second special symbol variation pattern designation command" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the second special symbol display 61, "MODE" is set to "E4H", and various variations are made. DATA information is set according to the pattern.

This second special symbol variation pattern designation command is a second special symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern in step S310 when the variation display of the special symbol of the second special symbol display 61 is started. The pattern designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

In the present embodiment, the "first special symbol variation pattern designation command" and the "second special symbol variation pattern designation command" may be collectively referred to as a "variation pattern designation command".

The "special symbol confirmation command" indicates that the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and "MODE" is set to "E5H" and "DATA" is set to "00H".

In this special symbol confirmation command, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61, the special symbol confirmation command is the transmission data for effect of the main RAM 110c in the step S320. It is set in the storage area and transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "normal symbol confirmation command" indicates that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, "MODE" is set to "E5H", and "DATA" is set to "01H".

In this normal symbol confirmation command, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 62, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal symbol confirmation command is the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S400. Is set to, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "starting opening winning designation command" is information for notifying the effect control board 130 of the result of the jackpot determination (lottery) in advance, and if it is based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 45, "MODE". Is set to "E6H", and if it is based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47, "MODE" is set to "E7H", and DATA information is set according to various winning information. There is.

This start opening winning designation command is a starting opening winning designation corresponding to the starting winning information in steps S230-10 or S240 when the game ball wins in the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47. The command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "big hit opening designation command" indicates that various big hit games (special game states) are started, "MODE" is set to "E8H", and DATA information is set according to the type of big hit game. It is set.

In this jackpot opening designation command, when various jackpot games are started, the jackpot opening designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot game is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S330, and step S800. It will be transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of.

The "round designation command" indicates the number of rounds of the jackpot game, "MODE" is set by "E9H", and DATA information is set according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game.

In this round designation command, when the round game of the jackpot game is started, the round designation command corresponding to the number of rounds is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S340, and the output control process of step S800 is performed. Will be transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "big hit ending designation command" indicates that various jackpot games have been completed, "MODE" is set to "EAH", and DATA information is set according to the type of jackpot game.

In this jackpot ending designation command, when various jackpot games are completed, the jackpot ending designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot game is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S340, and step S800. It will be transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of.

The "normal symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved storages stored in the normal symbol holding number (G1) storage area, "MODE" is set to "ECH", and DATA is set according to the number of reserved storages. Information is set.

When the value stored in the normal symbol storage number (G1) storage area increases or decreases, this normal symbol storage designation command corresponds to the normal symbol storage number after the increase or decrease in step S250 or step S400. The storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "normal symbol designation command" indicates the type of the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 62, "MODE" is set to "EDH", and the DATA information is set according to the type of the ordinary symbol. It is set.

In this normal symbol designation command, when various normal symbols are determined and the variation display of the normal symbol is started, the normal symbol designation command corresponding to the normal symbol in the above step S400 is the transmission data storage area for effect of the main RAM 110c. Is set to, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "normal symbol fluctuation designation command" indicates the fluctuation time of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 62, "MODE" is set to "EEH", and DATA information is set according to the fluctuation time of various ordinary symbols. Is set.

In this normal symbol fluctuation designation command, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started, the normal symbol fluctuation designation command corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set in the transmission data storage area for production of the main RAM 110c in step S400. , Will be transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "hit opening designation command" indicates that various auxiliary games are started, "MODE" is set to "EFH", and DATA information is set according to the type of the auxiliary game.

In this hit opening designation command, when the auxiliary game is started, the hit opening designation command corresponding to the type of the auxiliary game is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S400, and in step S800. It will be transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process.

The "hit ending designation command" indicates that various auxiliary games have been completed, "MODE" is set to "EFH", and DATA information is set according to the type of auxiliary game.

In this hit ending designation command, when various auxiliary games are completed, the hit ending designation command corresponding to the type of the auxiliary game is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S400, and the step It will be transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of S800.

The "game state designation command" indicates whether or not the game is in a time-saving game state and whether or not the game is in a high-probability game state. "DATA" is set.

This game state designation command is set to the game state in step S310, step S330, and step S350 at the start of the change of the special symbol, at the end of the change of the special symbol (at the start of the jackpot game), and at the end of the jackpot. The corresponding game state designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "power-on designation command" and the "power recovery designation command" indicate whether or not the power-on to the gaming machine 1 involves the initialization of the main RAM 110c, and "MODE" is "F1H". When set and the initialization of the main RAM 110c is accompanied, "DATA" is set to "00H", and when the initialization of the main RAM 110c is not accompanied, "DATA" is set to "01H to 03H".

The power-on designation command and the power-on recovery designation command indicate whether or not the main RAM 110c is initialized in step S10 and the power-on designation command corresponding to the gaming state when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1. Alternatively, a power restoration designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "customer waiting state specification command" indicates that the customer waiting state in which the change display of the special symbol is not performed is set, "MODE" is set to "F1H", and DATA is set to "04H". ing.

This customer waiting state designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in the above step S310 when the customer waiting state in which the change display of the special symbol is not performed is performed, and in the output control process of the step S800. It will be transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "error designation command" indicates an error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1, "MODE" is set to "F2H", and "DATA" information is set according to the type of error.

This error specification command is used when the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or a radio wave abnormality is determined in the magnetic / radio wave abnormality determination process of step S600, or when the occurrence of an abnormal prize is determined in the prize confirmation detection switch input process of step S260. When the occurrence of an illegal winning is determined in the large winning opening detection switch input processing in step S220 or the second starting opening detection switch input processing in step S240, the error designation command corresponding to the error type is the main RAM 110c. It is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the above, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

Further, when the game board mounting frame 3 or the glass frame 4 is opened, the lower tray 12 is full, or the payout abnormality is detected in the payout control board 120, an error designation command corresponding to the error type is transmitted for the effect of the payout RAM 121c. It is set in the data storage area and transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of the payout control board 120.

The "error cancellation designation command" indicates that the error generated in the gaming machine 1 has been resolved, and "MODE" is set to "F2H", and the information of "DATA" is set according to the type of the resolved error. Is set.

This error cancellation designation command is used as the type of error resolved when it is detected in the payout control board 120 that the game board mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 are closed, the lower tray 12 is full, and the payout abnormality is resolved. The corresponding error release designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of the payout control board 120.

(Main processing of production control unit 130m)
Next, the main process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 80. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the effect control unit 130m.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interruption in step E10, and performs initialization processing in step E20. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the main processing program is read from the sub ROM 130b, the flags and the like stored in the sub RAM 130c are initialized, and processing such as initial setting is performed.

In step E30, the sub CPU 130a sets an interrupt permission that permits timer interruption, and in step E40, performs a sub random number update process. Specifically, a process of updating various random value values stored in the sub RAM 130c is performed. After that, the process of step E40 is repeated until the predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of effect control unit 130m)
A timer interrupt process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E100, the sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area, and performs timer update processing in step E120. In this timer update process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.

The sub CPU 130a performs an input control process in step E130. Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, and if there is an input, a process of setting predetermined data is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E150. Specifically, a process of determining whether or not various commands have been transmitted from the main control board 110 and storing the received commands in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 130c when various commands have been transmitted is performed. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs a power-on process in step E200. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the power-on designation command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if it is received, a process for performing a power-on notification is performed. More specifically, a power-on notification command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 to display the power-on screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display). The power-on sound is output from the audio output device 9.

The sub CPU 130a performs a power failure recovery process in step E250. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the power recovery designation command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if it is received, a process for performing a power failure recovery notification is performed. More specifically, a power restoration notification command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 to display the power restoration screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display). A power recovery sound is output from the audio output device 9.

The sub CPU 130a performs the customer waiting effect processing in step E300. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting state specification command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if it is received, the customer waiting effect is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 20 seconds). Perform the processing to do. More specifically, a customer waiting effect command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 to display a customer waiting demo screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display). , A customer waiting demo sound is output from the voice output device 9.

The sub CPU 130a performs the game state update process in step E350. Specifically, the process of referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not the game state specification command is being received, and updating the game state information stored in the sub RAM 130c when the command is being received is performed. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs the hold information update process in step E400. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a special symbol storage designation command or a normal symbol storage designation command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if it is received, it is stored in the sub RAM 130c. 1 Performs a process of updating the number of special symbol reservations, the number of second special symbol reservations, the number of ordinary symbol reservations, and the like.

The sub CPU 130a performs the icon change effect processing in step E500. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a start opening winning designation command or a variation pattern designation command is received with reference to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if it is received, processing related to the icon change effect is performed.

The icon change effect is a type of hold icon and a look-ahead notice effect that changes the display mode of the icon. The details will be described later, but the timing and change mode (normal change, symbol action change, and character) to be changed will be described later. Multiple types of action change) are set. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 82.

In the present embodiment, the icon change effect for the hold icon may be referred to as "hold icon change effect" and the icon change effect for the icon may be referred to as "the icon change effect".

In step E600, the sub CPU 130a performs the special drawing special electric effect effect processing. Specifically, the effect symbol designation command, the special symbol variation pattern designation command, the special symbol confirmation command, the jackpot opening designation command, the round designation command, the jackpot ending designation command, etc., with reference to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, etc. Is determined, and if it is received, a process for executing an effect corresponding to the received command is performed.

In step E800, the sub CPU 130a performs the Fuzu-fuden effect processing. Specifically, whether or not the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c is used to receive a normal map designation command, a normal map variation designation command, a normal symbol confirmation command, a hit opening designation command, a hit ending designation command, or the like. It is determined whether or not, and if it is received, a process for executing an effect corresponding to the received command is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E850. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an error specification command or an error cancellation specification command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if it is received, an error notification effect corresponding to the received error specification command is produced. Performs processing for executing, and processing for ending the error notification effect corresponding to the received error cancellation specification command.

The sub CPU 130a performs output control processing in step E900. Specifically, it performs processing such as outputting a signal such as predetermined data and transmitting various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150. ..

In step E950, the sub CPU 130a returns the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a, and ends the timer interrupt processing this time.

(Icon change effect processing of the effect control unit 130 m)
An icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 82. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an icon change effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E510, the sub CPU 130a performs an icon change effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute the icon change effect. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 83.

In step E520, the sub CPU 130a performs an icon display mode update process for updating (changing) the display mode of the already displayed icon (hold icon and the icon), and ends the current icon change effect processing. do. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

(Icon change effect determination process of effect control unit 130 m)
The icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an icon change effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E510-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the start opening winning designation command has been received. When the start opening prize designation command is received, the process is transferred to step E510-2, and when the start opening prize designation command is not received, the icon change effect determination process this time is terminated.

In step E510-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received start opening winning designation command, and grasps whether or not it is a big hit, the type of the big hit game, and the effect content (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E510-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the present is the feasible period of the icon change effect. If it is the feasible period of the icon change effect, the process is moved to step E510-4, and if it is not the feasible period of the icon change effect, the current icon change effect determination process is terminated.

The executable period of the icon change effect is when the jackpot game is not being executed, the icon change effect is not being executed, or the icon change effect is not scheduled to be executed. It should be noted that one of the above three conditions or only two conditions may be provided. Further, the conditions may be different from the above three conditions.

In step E510-4, the sub CPU 130a has all the pre-determination results of the advance hold (holding memory corresponding to the previously received start opening winning designation command) equal to or less than the normal reach, that is, all the advance determination results of the advance hold are normally changed. Judge whether it is shortened fluctuation or normal reach. If all are below normal reach, the process is transferred to step E510-5, and if all are not below normal reach, the process is transferred to step E510-8.

In step E510-5, the sub CPU 130a acquires an icon display mode determining random number value for determining the final display mode of the icon displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), and in step E510-6. , Select the icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 84) for determining the final display mode of the icon. The details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the icon final display mode in step E510-7. Specifically, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 84, and is among a plurality of icon final display modes based on the start opening winning designation command and the random value for determining the icon display mode. The final display mode of one icon is determined from.

In step E510-8, the sub CPU 130a determines a normal icon (CD icon), which is a normal display mode, as the icon final display mode.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E510-9 whether or not the determined icon final display mode is the display mode (special icon) for executing the icon change effect. If the display mode is to execute the icon change effect, the process is transferred to step E510-10, and if the display mode is not to execute the icon change effect, the process is transferred to step E510-13.

In step E510-10, the sub CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (see FIG. 85) for determining a change scenario of the icon change effect. The details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario shows the transition of the display mode from the appearance of the hold icon to the disappearance of the hold icon.

In step E510-11, the sub CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the hold storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, referring to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 85, one change scenario is determined from a plurality of change scenarios based on the icon final display mode and the selection rate.

In step E510-12, the sub CPU 130a identifies a winning icon, which is an icon display mode first displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) from the determined change scenario, and the icon of the winning icon. Set the display command in the transmission buffer and end the icon change effect determination process this time. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 in the output control process of step E900, and the hold icon of the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the winning icon is the first. It will be displayed on the image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or a predetermined sound effect will be output.

In step E510-13, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets the read-ahead information storage area corresponding to the hold storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E510-14, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command of the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and ends the icon change effect determination process this time. As a result, the display data is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 in the output control process of step E900, and the hold icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the normal icon is displayed as the first image. It will be displayed on the device 70 (main liquid crystal display) or a predetermined sound effect will be output.

In the icon change effect determination process of the present embodiment, the icon change effect (hold icon change effect, the icon change effect) is executed when all the prior determination results of the advance hold are equal to or less than the normal reach. , The icon change effect may be executed when the advance determination result of the advance hold does not perform the reach effect, and the icon change effect may not be executed when the reach effect is performed. In this way, the display mode of the hold icon does not change during the variable effect corresponding to the advance hold in which the reach effect is executed, and the hold icon is held during the variable effect corresponding to the advance hold in which the reach effect is not executed. The display mode of the above is changed, the reach effect is not hindered by the icon change effect, and the fun of the game can be improved.

Further, even if the pre-determination result of the advance hold includes the one that performs the reach effect, the icon change effect may be executed, but the pre-determination result of the advance hold includes the one that performs the reach effect. If there is no icon change effect, the icon change effect may be more easily executed (executed at a higher rate) than when the reach effect is included.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table referred to when determining the icon final display mode.

The icon final display mode determination table is associated with the type of the start opening winning designation command, the random value for determining the icon display mode, and the selected icon final display mode, and the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 84. A random number value for determining the icon display mode is assigned so as to be.

The final display mode of the icon includes a CD icon as a normal icon, a blue character icon as a special icon suggesting that there is a possibility of a big hit (a big hit game is executed), a red character icon, and a rainbow character. The icon is set.

The expectation of winning a big hit related to a special icon is higher in the order of (CD icon <) blue character icon <red character icon <rainbow character icon, and the rainbow character icon is an icon that confirms that it will be a big hit. ..

Here, as a main feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 84, the selection rate of the icon final display mode is different depending on the effect content. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the effect content is specific start winning information indicating that the effect content is SP reach or SPSP reach, the effect content is normal variation, shortened variation, or normal reach that does not reach reach. The character icon is selected at a higher rate than in the case of the normal start winning information shown.

In the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 84, the CD icon is not selected as the icon final display mode in the case of a big hit, but it may be selected.

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table referred to when determining a change scenario.

In the change scenario determination table, the icon final display mode, the number of holdings of the special symbol corresponding to the start opening prize designation command, the selection rate (%) of each scenario, and the type of the selected change scenario are associated. For reference, the preliminary fluctuations in each change scenario and the update mode in the fluctuations are described.

Here, the "preliminary variation" is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information stored before the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received start opening winning designation command. That is, the "variation" is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received start opening winning designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the prior change (the hold icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the execution of the change (the icon change effect is executed). The scenario (for example, scenario 01, etc.) and the icon display mode change during the execution of the pre-variation (hold icon change effect is executed), but do not change during the execution of the change (the icon change effect). A scenario (for example, scenario 02, etc.) that is not executed, and the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of the pre-variation and the execution of the change (hold icon change effect and icon change effect are executed). ) A scenario (for example, scenario 15 or the like) is set.

In the change scenario determination table of the present embodiment, a scenario for changing the display mode of the icon is determined regardless of whether or not the reach effect (which may be a reach other than the normal reach) is executed in the prior variation. However, the display mode of the icon is changed by the change scenario determination table that uses the judgment factor as to whether or not the reach effect that suggests that the jackpot game may be executed in the advance fluctuation is executed. You may decide which scenario to let. When such a change scenario determination table is used, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed, and the reach effect is not executed. It is advisable to set various scenarios so that the display mode changes. In addition, the icon display mode changes during the execution of the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed and the pre-variation in which the reach effect is not executed. Various scenarios may be set so that the display mode of the icon changes at a higher rate during the execution of the pre-variation in which is not executed.

(Icon display mode update process for the effect control unit 130m)
The icon display mode update process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing an icon display mode update process in the effect control unit 130 m.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E520-1 whether or not the variation pattern designation command has been received. When the variation pattern specification command is received, the process is transferred to step E520-2, and when the variation pattern specification command is not received, the current icon display mode update process is terminated.

In step E520-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon change scenario stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and in step E520-3, whether or not there is a hold icon for changing (updating) the display mode. Is determined. If there is a hold icon that changes the display mode, the process is moved to step E520-4, and if there is no hold icon that changes the display mode, the process is moved to step E520-7.

In step E520-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a change pattern determination table (see FIG. 87) for the hold icon for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the hold icon to be changed. The details of the change pattern determination table for the hold icon will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the hold icon change pattern in step E520-5. Specifically, with reference to the change pattern determination table for the hold icon shown in FIG. 87, among a plurality of hold icon change patterns based on the mode of the hold icon change in the current variation effect and the selection rate (%). Determines one hold icon change pattern from.

In step E520-6, the sub CPU 130a sets the change effect command corresponding to the determined hold icon change pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the display data is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 in the output control process of step E900, and according to the change timing according to the hold icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing. Therefore, the display mode of the hold icon displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) may change, or a predetermined sound effect may be output.

In step E520-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is the icon that changes (updates) the display mode. If there is the icon for changing the display mode, the process is moved to step E520-8, and if there is no icon for changing the display mode, the current icon display mode update process is terminated.

In step E520-8, the sub CPU 130a is selected from a plurality of change pattern determination tables for the icon for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the icon to be changed in the current variation effect. A change pattern determination table (see FIGS. 88 and 89) for the icon according to the change stage in which the icon changes is selected. The details of the change pattern determination table for the icon according to the change stage will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in step E520-9. Specifically, with reference to the change pattern determination table for the icon shown in FIG. 88 or FIG. 89, the plurality of relevant icons are based on the mode of the icon change in the current variation effect and the selectivity (%). One icon change pattern is determined from the icon change patterns.

In step E520-10, the sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined icon change pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends the current icon display mode update process. As a result, the display data is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 in the output control process of step E900, and according to the change timing according to the icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing. Therefore, the display mode of the icon displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) may change, or a predetermined sound effect may be output.

(Change pattern determination table for hold icon)
FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for a hold icon that is referred to when determining a change pattern for a hold icon.

In the change pattern determination table for the hold icon, the mode of the hold icon change in this variation effect, the selection rate (%) of each hold icon change pattern, and the type of the selected hold icon change pattern are associated with each other. As a reference, the timing of occurrence of the change effect of the hold icon in each hold icon change pattern and the change stage are described.

The hold icon change pattern is a normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes with the output of a sound effect when the hold icon is shifted and displayed (at the start of fluctuation) according to the disappearance of the icon. Or, a normal change pattern 02 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes during fluctuation with the output of a sound effect, or an action effect that acts on the icon from the character as the character appears, and the icon is displayed. The character action change pattern 01 whose mode changes and the change notification symbol (special symbol) indicating that the display mode of the icon changes as a result of the fluctuation effect are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the change notification symbol acts on the hold icon as a starting point. A symbol action change pattern 01 is set in which the display mode of the hold icon is changed by performing the action effect.

The timing of the change effect of the hold icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the change effect, and the effect pattern is when the change effect is started (at the time of the change start) and when the change effect is being executed (during change). There is a time when the 70a is temporarily stopped ((temporarily) stopped).

At the change stage of the hold icon, 1UP (for example, change from CD icon to blue character icon, change from blue character icon to red character icon) that changes the jackpot winning expectation to the display mode one step higher, and jackpot 2UP (for example, change from a CD icon to a red character icon) is set to change the winning expectation to a display mode that is two levels higher.

The timing of the change effect of the hold icon is the above three timings, but the timing is not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it may be provided that the variable effect is being executed (during fluctuation) until the reach is established, the normal reach is being executed, the SP (SPSP) reach is being executed, and the like.

(Change pattern determination table for the icon)
88 and 89 are diagrams showing a change pattern determination table for the icon that is referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon, and FIG. 88 is a diagram that changes the display mode of the icon by one step. It is a table referred to in the case, and FIG. 89 is a table referred to when the display mode of the icon is changed in two steps.

The change pattern determination table for the icon is associated with the mode of the icon change in the current variation effect, the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern, and the type of the selected icon change pattern. As a reference, the timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon in each icon change pattern and the change stage are described.

The icon change pattern includes a normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes at the start of the change with the output of the sound effect, and a normal change in the display mode of the hold icon during the change with the output of the sound effect. A change pattern 02 and a character action change pattern 01 that changes the display mode of the icon by performing an action effect that acts on the icon from the character as the character appears are set.

The timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the change effect, and the effect symbol is when the change effect is started (at the time of the change start) and when the change effect is being executed (during change). There is a time when the 70a is temporarily stopped ((temporarily) stopped).

At the change stage of the icon, 1UP (for example, change from CD icon to blue character icon, change from blue character icon to red character icon) that changes the jackpot winning expectation to the display mode one step higher, and jackpot 2UP (for example, change from CD icon to red character icon, change from blue character icon to rainbow character icon) is set to change the winning expectation to a display mode two levels higher.

In the change pattern determination table for the icon of the present embodiment, the symbol action change pattern 01 is not selected, but it may be possible to select it. For example, in the variation effect in which the pseudo-continuous effect is performed, the change notification symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed when the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 70a before the pseudo variation is performed.

Pseudo-continuous production means that the jackpot judgment based on winning (ball winning) to one start port (first start port 45, second start port 47) is executed as if the change display of the effect symbol is performed multiple times. In order to make it look as if it was done, all the productions are made within the special figure fluctuation time determined for winning (ball winning) to one starting port (first starting port 45, second starting port 47). It is a variation display of a special aspect in which the re-variation display that starts the variation again after the symbol 70a is temporarily stopped is executed once or a plurality of times.

The timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon is limited to the above two timings, but the timing is not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it may be provided that the variable effect is being executed (during fluctuation) until the reach is established, the normal reach is being executed, the SP (SPSP) reach is being executed, and the like.

(Relationship between the display mode of the hold icon and the timing of the change effect occurrence)
FIG. 90A is a diagram showing the relationship between the holding icon display mode and the occurrence frequency of the change effect occurrence timing.

When the display mode of the hold icon changes to the blue character icon, the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command has a higher frequency of occurrence of the change effect than the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specification command. ing.

In addition, when the display mode of the hold icon changes to the blue character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher in the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the fluctuation pattern specification command than in the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command. It's getting low.

That is, the hold icon is executed when the icon change effect is executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command than when the icon change effect is executed at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specification command. It can be said that the display mode of is easily changed to a blue character icon.

On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold icon changes to the red character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher in the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the fluctuation pattern specification command than in the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command. It's getting higher.

In addition, when the display mode of the hold icon changes to the red character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher in the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command than in the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specification command. It's getting low.

In other words, the hold icon is more when the icon change effect is executed at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specification command than when the icon change effect is executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command. It can be said that the display mode of is easily changed to a red character icon. It should be noted that this predetermined command is a start opening winning designation command or a variation pattern designation command.

Specifically, the change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of a predetermined command is that the game ball wins a prize at the start port (first start port 45, second start port 47) and a hold icon is displayed. It is a change effect (change effect at the time of winning) in which the hold icon is displayed as a special icon at the timing when the hold icon is set, and a normal change pattern 01.
Further, the change effect generated at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command is a normal change pattern 02, a character action change pattern 01, and a symbol action change pattern 01.

Since the relationship between the hold icon display mode and the change effect occurrence frequency is as described above, the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specification command is the predetermined command. Since the frequency of change effects that change to the red character icon, which has a higher expectation of winning a big hit than the frame update timing according to the reception of, is high, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the change effect occurrence timing and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to make it.

In addition, the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command has a higher frequency of the change effect that changes to the blue character icon than the predetermined frame update timing after the change pattern specification command is received, so that the change effect is early. In addition, although it is difficult to change to a red character icon with a high expectation of winning a big hit, it is easy to change to a blue character icon, so it is possible to draw the player's attention to the subsequent fluctuation production and improve the interest of the game. It will be possible.

(Relationship between change effect type and change effect occurrence timing 1)
FIG. 90B is a diagram showing the relationship 1 of the change effect occurrence frequency between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing.

When the change effect occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command, the change effect occurs more frequently in the hold icon change effect than in the icon change effect.

Further, when the change effect occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command, the change effect occurs less frequently in the icon change effect than in the hold icon change effect.

Since the relationship between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence frequency is as described above, the hold icon is likely to change at an early stage of the change effect. It is possible to pull the expectation of the jackpot game of the person for a long period of time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It should be noted that this predetermined command is a start opening winning designation command or a variation pattern designation command.

(Relationship between change effect type and change effect occurrence timing 2)
FIG. 90C is a diagram showing the relationship 2 between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing and the change effect occurrence frequency 2.

When the change effect occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, the change effect occurs more frequently in the icon change effect than in the hold icon change effect.

Further, when the change effect occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, the change effect occurs less frequently in the hold icon change effect than in the icon change effect.

Since the relationship between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence frequency is as described above, the icon is likely to change at a later time of the change effect. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by pulling the expectation of the jackpot game of the person until the late period of the variable production.

(Relationship between icon display mode and notification sound when icon is generated (changed))
FIG. 90D is a diagram showing the relationship between the icon display mode and the notification sound when the icon is generated (changed).

When the CD icon is generated as the hold icon, the first generation notification sound is output as the notification sound when the icon is generated, and when the hold icon and the blue character icon are generated as the icon (when changed to), When the second occurrence notification sound (change notification sound) is output as the notification sound when the icon is generated (change), and the hold icon and the red character icon are generated (changed to) as the icon, the icon is generated (when the icon is changed). When the third occurrence notification sound (change notification sound) is output as the notification sound at the time of change) and the icon changes to the rainbow character icon, the fourth generation notification sound (change notification sound) is output as the notification sound when the icon changes. Is set to be output.

In the present embodiment, different notification sounds are set for each of the plurality of icon display modes (4 types), but the generated notification sound when the CD icon is generated, the blue character icon, and the red character icon. , And a change notification sound when the icon changes to a rainbow character icon, or when a CD icon is generated, the notification sound is not output, and only when the icon changes to any mode, the notification sound is output. It may be output. Further, for the rainbow character icon that is confirmed to be a big hit, a dedicated change notification sound may be provided to make three types.

(Main processing of the overall control unit 141)
The main process of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the integrated control unit 141.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the control CPU 142, and the control CPU 142 performs the following main processing.

First, the integrated CPU 142 sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interruption in step T1, and performs initialization processing in step T2. Specifically, the main processing program is read from the control ROM 143, the flags and the like stored in the control RAM 144 are initialized, and processing such as initial setting is performed.

In step T3, the centralized CPU 142 sets interrupt permission for permitting timer interruption, and in step T4, it determines whether or not an effect instruction command is received from the effect control unit 130 m with reference to the receive buffer of the integrated RAM 144. If it is determined and not received, the process is transferred to step T7, and if it is received, the animation pattern is determined and set from the type of animation group corresponding to the received production instruction command in step T5. Performs animation pattern setting processing.

Examples of the effect instruction command include a customer waiting effect command, an icon display command, a change effect command, a variable effect pattern command, a symbol stop pattern command, an opening effect pattern command, a round effect pattern command, and an ending effect pattern command.

The animation group is the type of object that constitutes the production image, the scene (timing) and wait frame (display time) at which the production image is displayed, the target data (sprite image identification number, transfer source address, etc.), One or more animation patterns that are information that specifies (designates) parameters (display position of sprite image, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, information that specifies the image display device that displays the effect image, etc. are bundled. It is a group formed by being done.

The types of animation groups include, for example, an effect symbol group for displaying the animation of the effect symbol 70a, an icon group for displaying the hold icon and the animation of the icon, and a variable effect animation such as a background and a character. Examples include a variable effect group, a notice effect group for displaying an animation such as a notice, and a special game effect group for displaying an animation of a special game effect.

In step T6, the general CPU 142 performs sound setting processing for determining and setting a sound pattern from a type of sound group corresponding to the received effect instruction command, and in step T7, updates the effect image to be displayed on the image display device. It is determined whether or not there is a frame switching flag indicating that it is the frame update timing (drawing a new effect image), and if there is no frame switching flag, the process is moved to step T4 and the frame switching flag is set. If there is, the frame switching flag is cleared in step T8.

In step T9, the control CPU 142 generates a display list composed of drawing control command groups, and performs display list generation / output processing for outputting the generated display list to the image control unit 145 (VDP).

Here, the display list is image shaping information for molding an effect image to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display), and is one unit. Alternatively, it is generated for each frame of a plurality of units (frame update timing), and in the present embodiment, the display list is generated for each frame.

Specifically, since the animation scene information (address) is updated for each animation pattern set in the animation control process described later, a drawing control command is set for each set animation pattern according to the contents of the animation scene information. A display list for one frame corresponding to the current number of frames is generated. The drawing control commands are sequentially set from the animation pattern of the animation group having the lowest priority to the animation pattern of the animation group having the highest priority according to the priority (drawing order) set to the animation group to which each animation pattern belongs. However, the reverse is also possible.

In step T10, the control CPU 142 performs drawing command processing for instructing the image control unit 145 (VDP) to draw an effect image based on the output list. By performing this drawing command processing, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the effect image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and the effect image drawn in the display frame buffer is the first image display device. A process of displaying on the 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is performed.

In step T11, the general CPU 142 generates a sound list composed of sound control command groups, and performs sound list generation / output processing for outputting the generated sound list to the voice control unit 148.

Here, the sound list is audio output information for designating sounds (BGM, sound effects, etc.) such as audio data and music data to be output from the audio output device 9, and is used when a new sound is output. It is generated based on the drawing frame.

In step T12, the control CPU 142 performs sound output command processing for instructing the sound output based on the sound list output to the voice control unit 148. By performing this sound output command processing, the voice control unit 148 outputs the sound based on the sound list from the voice output device 9.

Therefore, various sounds are started to be output from the audio output device 9 so as to be synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing by the image control unit 145 (VDP), and are synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing. The output from the audio output device 9 is terminated.

The audio output device 9 starts outputting various sounds so as to synchronize (synchronize) with the frame update timing, but the audio output device 9 outputs various sounds so as not to synchronize (synchronize) with the frame update timing. May be stopped and vice versa.

In step T13, the general CPU 142 performs animation control processing for updating animation scene information (address) for each set animation pattern in preparation for creating a display list for the next frame, and then performs processing in step T4. After that, the processes from step T4 to step T13 are repeated so as to loop.

(Command reception interrupt processing of the overall control unit 141)
The command reception interrupt process of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. 92. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing a command reception interrupt process of the integrated control unit 141, and the command reception interrupt process is executed by receiving an effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m.

In step T20, the control CPU 142 performs a command reception process for receiving an effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m. Specifically, the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m is stored in the receive buffer of the control RAM 144, and the command reception interrupt process this time is terminated.

(V blank interrupt processing of the overall control unit 141)
The V blank interrupt process of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the V blank interrupt process of the general control unit 141, and the V blank interrupt process ends the display of the effect image for one frame from the image control unit 145 (VDP) (1/30). It is executed every time a V blank signal transmitted every second (second = about 33 ms) is received (1/30 second = about 33 ms).

In step T30, the control CPU 142 performs counter update processing for updating a predetermined number of counters (scene switching counter, wait frame counter, frame counter, etc.) (for example, adding “1”), and in step T31, the image control unit 145 ( A frame buffer switching command process for instructing the VDP) to switch between the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 is performed.

As a result, each time the V blank interrupt process is executed every 1/30 second (about 33 ms), the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area become a "drawing frame buffer" and a "display frame buffer". It will be switched alternately with.

In step T32, the control CPU 142 sets a frame switching flag indicating that the drawing (display) frame has been switched, and ends the current V blank interrupt processing. Since this frame switching flag is referred to in step T7, the processes of steps T8 to T13 are executed every time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

(Timing chart of change effect at the time of winning)
94 and 95 are timing charts showing various timings when the display mode of the first hold icon is displayed (changed to) by the blue character icon when the game ball is won in the first start port 45.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the 280th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed. At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer is The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is the timing in the middle of the 280th frame after the variation effect is started. At this timing, a start opening winning designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control unit 130m based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting opening 45.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 281st frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, it is decided to display the display mode of the first hold icon with the blue character icon at the time of winning, but the blue character icon is not displayed on the image display device, and the second generation notification sound from the voice output device 9 Output is not started either.

Further, at the timing of T3, drawing of image data c (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display of the data b on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen b is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 282nd frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data d (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data c drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen c (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound is started from the voice output device 9. .. The timing of this T4 corresponds to the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 283rd frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of image data e (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image data d drawn in the first frame buffer is The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound from the voice output device 9 is continued. To.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 284th frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data f (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data e drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound from the voice output device 9 is continued. To.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 296th frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image of the image data g drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen g (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is continued.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 297th frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the output of the second generation notification sound that had been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped. Further, the drawing of the image data i (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image display device of the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display on the image is started, and the normal variation effect display screen h (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 298th frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data j (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image display of the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen i (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

In this way, the output of the second generation notification sound is started from the audio output device 9 in accordance with (synchronously) the frame update timing in which the blue character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display). Compared to the case where the frame update timing between the display of the blue character icon and the output of the second generation notification sound is different from the start, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of strangeness and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to make it.

Also, while the output of the second generation notification sound was started in accordance with the frame update timing when the blue character icon is displayed (synchronously), the blue character icon is deleted and the second generation notification sound is output. Since it is performed at a frame update timing different from the stop of, it is possible to stop the output of the second occurrence notification sound without being restricted by the timing to erase the blue character icon, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game. It becomes.

(Example of production change at the time of winning)
FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which the display mode of the first hold icon is displayed (changed to) by the blue character icon when the game ball is won in the first start port 45.

As shown in FIG. 96A, the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed in a state where the first hold icon and the second hold icon are not displayed, that is, in a state where no hold memory is stored. Normally, a variable effect is executed.

Here, based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 45, a starting port winning designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control unit 130m, and the icon change effect determination process is executed, as a change scenario. It is assumed that "scenario 02" (the display mode of the first hold icon is displayed by the blue character icon at the time of winning) is determined.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 96B, the first holding icon (blue character) is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 of the first holding icon display area 70B in response to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 45. Icon) H11 is displayed, and the second generation notification sound is output from the voice output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

Then, as shown in FIG. 96 (c), stop display is performed in a combination (here, “234”) indicating that the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed is a loss, and is displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon (CD icon) TH that has been displayed is deleted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (d), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first hold icon (blue character icon) H11 of the first display unit 70B1 is shifted to the icon display area 70C. Will be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 96 (e), the effect symbol 70a of "2" is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed, and the central variable display area. A reach effect is executed in which the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 96 (f), the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped and displayed in the central variation display area, so that the reach effect ends and the variation display ends. Here, since the variable display is completed, the icon (blue character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

Although not shown, BGM, sound effects, and the like are output from the voice output device 9 during the fluctuation effect. The same applies to the following FIGS. 99, 102, 103, 106, and 107.

(Timing chart of normal change pattern 01)
97 and 98 show timings showing various timings when the normal change pattern 01 is determined as the hold icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process and the display mode of the first hold icon is changed to the blue character icon. It is a chart.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the 600th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol stop period in which the stop display of the effect symbol 70a is performed. At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the stop effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is the timing in the middle of the 600th frame after the variation effect is started. At this timing, the fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control unit 130m.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 601st frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol stop period. At this timing, it is decided to execute the normal change pattern 01 that changes the first hold icon to the blue character icon, but the blue character icon is not displayed on the image display device, and the second generation occurs from the sound output device 9. The output of the notification sound is not started either.

Further, at the timing of T3, drawing of image data c (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display of the data b on the image display device is started, and the stop effect display screen b is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T4 is the timing (the timing at which the variation effect is started), which is the first frame after the start of the next variation effect. At this timing, drawing of the image data d (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data c drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen c (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound is started from the voice output device 9. .. The timing of this T4 corresponds to the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the second frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of image data e (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image data d drawn in the first frame buffer is The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is continued. ..

The timing of T6 is the timing of the third frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data f (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data e drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is continued. ..

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 15th frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image of the image data g drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen g (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is continued.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 16th frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the output of the second generation notification sound that had been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data i (background image, variation effect image, various symbols) to the second frame buffer is stopped. Drawing of images (images, various icon images, etc.) is started, display of the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen h (blue character) is displayed on the image display device. Icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 17th frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data j (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image display of the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen i (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

In this way, the output of the second generation notification sound is started from the audio output device 9 in accordance with (synchronously) the frame update timing in which the blue character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display). Compared to the case where the frame update timing between the display of the blue character icon and the output of the second generation notification sound is different from the start, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of strangeness and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to make it.

Also, while the output of the second generation notification sound was started in accordance with the frame update timing when the blue character icon is displayed (synchronously), the blue character icon is deleted and the second generation notification sound is output. Since it is performed at a frame update timing different from the stop of, it is possible to stop the output of the second occurrence notification sound without being restricted by the timing to erase the blue character icon, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game. It becomes.

(Example of production of normal change pattern 01)
FIG. 99 is a diagram showing an effect example when the display mode of the first hold icon is changed to the blue character icon (normal change pattern 01) at the start of fluctuation (shift).

As shown in FIG. 99A, when the first hold icons (CD icons) H11 and H12 are displayed on the first display unit 70B1 and the second display unit 70B2 of the first hold icon display area 70B. , It is assumed that the stop display of the effect symbol indicating the loss is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (b), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 and the second display unit 70B2 is started. H11 and H12 are shifted and displayed on the icon display area 70C and the first display unit 70B1, respectively.

Here, when the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 displayed on the second display unit 70B2 is shifted and displayed on the first display unit 70B1, the display mode is changed to a blue character icon. Further, the CD icon is changed to the blue character icon, and the voice output device 9 outputs the second generation notification sound for 0.5 seconds.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99 (c), stop display is performed with a combination (here, “164”) indicating that the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed is a loss, and is displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon (CD icon) TH that has been displayed is deleted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (d), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first hold icon (blue character icon) H11 of the first display unit 70B1 is shifted to the icon display area 70C. Will be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99 (e), the effect symbol 70a of "2" is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed, and the central variable display area. A reach effect is executed in which the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 99 (f), the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped and displayed in the central variation display area, so that the reach effect ends and the variation display ends. Here, since the variable display is completed, the icon (blue character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

(Timing chart of character action change pattern 01)
100 and 101 show timings showing various timings when the character action change pattern 01 is determined as the icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process and the display mode of the icon TH is changed to the red character icon. It is a chart.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the first frame after the start of the variation effect (the timing of the start of the variation effect), and is the frame update timing of the start of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed. .. At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer is The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is the timing of the 61st frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the effect control unit 130m has decided to execute the character action change pattern 01 that changes the display mode of the icon TH to the red character icon, but the image display device does not display the character or the like, and the sound is heard. The output of the third generation notification sound from the output device 9 is also not started.

Further, at the timing of T2, drawing of image data d (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, character images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and is drawn in the first frame buffer. The display of the image data c that has been performed on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen c is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 62nd frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of image data e (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, character images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data d on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen d (character display) is displayed on the image display device, but the output of the third generation notification sound from the voice output device 9 is Not started.

The timing of T4 is the 63rd frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of image data f (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, character images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display of the data e on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen e (character display) is displayed on the image display device, but the third generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is not output. Will continue.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 64th frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of image data g (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, character images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data f on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen f (character display) is displayed on the image display device, but the third generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is not output. Will continue.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 91st frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data g drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen g (character display) is displayed on the image display device, but the non-output of the third generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is continued. To.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 92nd frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data i (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen h (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the third generation notification sound is started from the voice output device 9. .. The timing of this T7 corresponds to a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 106th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the output of the third generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 continues, and the image data j (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) is drawn in the first frame buffer. Is started, the display of the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen i (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device. Become.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 107th frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the output of the third generation notification sound that had been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data k (background image, variation effect image, various symbols) to the second frame buffer is stopped. Drawing of images (images, various icon images, etc.) is started, display of the image data j drawn in the first frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen j (red character) is displayed on the image display device. Icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 108th frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data l (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image display of the image data k drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen k (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

In this way, the output of the third generation notification sound is started from the audio output device 9 in accordance with (synchronously) the frame update timing in which the red character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display). Compared to the case where the frame update timing between the display of the red character icon and the output of the third occurrence notification sound is different from the start, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of strangeness and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to make it.

In addition, while the output of the third generation notification sound was started according to the frame update timing when the red character icon is displayed (synchronously), the red character icon is deleted and the third generation notification sound is deleted. Since the frame update timing is different from the output stop, the output of the third generation notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing to erase the red character icon, which can improve the fun of the game. It will be possible.

(Production example of character action change pattern 01)
102 and 103 are diagrams showing an example of an effect when the display mode of the icon TH is changed to a red character icon (character action change pattern 01) during the variation effect.

As shown in FIG. 102 (a), the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed in a state where the first hold icon and the second hold icon are not displayed, that is, in a state where no hold memory is stored. The normal fluctuation effect to be made is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 102 (c), after the character C1 is displayed (see FIG. 102 (b)), the character C1 performs a throwing kiss operation and directs the heart H toward the icon (CD icon) TH. The production of skipping is performed.

Then, when the heart H hits the icon TH, as shown in FIG. 102 (d), the display mode of the icon TH changes from the CD icon to the red character icon, and the voice output device 9 sets the third generation notification sound. Is output for 0.5 seconds.

After that, as shown in FIG. 103 (a), the effect symbol 70a of "2" is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed, and the central variable display area. A reach effect is executed in which the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed.

Then, when the SP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), the production in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is started. When the SP reach is developed, the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 103 (c), the ally character C2 wins over the enemy character C3, suggesting that it is a big hit, and the combination indicating that the variable display effect symbol 70a is a big hit ( Here, the stop display is displayed at "222").

Then, as shown in FIG. 103 (d), the effect symbol 70a returns from the reduced display to the original size and is stopped and displayed at the center of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display). Here, since the variable display is completed, the icon (red character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

(Timing chart of symbol action change pattern 01)
FIGS. 104 and 105 show various timings when the symbol action change pattern 01 is determined as the hold icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process and the display mode of the first hold icon is changed to the red character icon. It is a timing chart.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the first frame after the start of the variation effect (the timing of the start of the variation effect), and is the frame update timing of the start of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed. .. At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer is The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is the timing of the 299th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, it is decided to execute the character action change pattern 01 that changes the display mode of the first hold icon to the red character icon, but the change pattern or the like is not displayed on the image display device, and the voice output device 9 The output of the third generation notification sound is also not started.

Further, at the timing of T2, drawing of image data d (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, change symbol images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and drawing is performed in the first frame buffer. The display of the image data c that has been performed is started on the image display device, and the normal variation effect display screen c is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 300th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing of the symbol temporary stop period in which the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 70a is performed. At this timing, drawing of image data e (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, change symbol images, etc.) in the first frame buffer was started, and was drawn in the second frame buffer. The display of the image data d on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen d (change symbol display) is displayed on the image display device. The output does not start.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 301st frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data f (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, change symbol images, etc.) in the second frame buffer was started, and was drawn in the first frame buffer. The display of the image data e on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen e (change symbol display) is displayed on the image display device, but the third generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is displayed. Non-output continues.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 302nd frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data g (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, change symbol images, etc.) in the first frame buffer was started, and was drawn in the second frame buffer. The display of the image data f on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen f (change symbol display) is displayed on the image display device. Non-output continues.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 330th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data h (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, change symbol images, etc.) in the first frame buffer was started, and was drawn in the second frame buffer. The display of the image data g on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen g (change symbol display) is displayed on the image display device. Non-output continues.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 331st frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data i (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, change symbol images, etc.) in the second frame buffer was started and was drawn in the first frame buffer. The display of the image data h on the image display device is started, the temporary stop effect display screen h (change symbol & red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the third occurrence notification is notified from the voice output device 9. Sound output is started. The timing of this T7 corresponds to a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 345th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data j (background image, stop effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, change symbol image, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data i on the image display device is started, the temporary stop effect display screen i (change symbol & red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the third generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is displayed. Output continues.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 346th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the output of the third generation notification sound that had been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data k (background image, stop effect image, various symbols) to the second frame buffer is stopped. Drawing of images, various icon images, change pattern images, etc.) is started, display of the image data j drawn in the first frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen is displayed on the image display device. j (change pattern & red character icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 347th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of the image data l (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image display of the image data k drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen k (change symbol & red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

In this way, the output of the third generation notification sound is started from the audio output device 9 in accordance with (synchronously) the frame update timing in which the red character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display). Compared to the case where the frame update timing between the display of the red character icon and the output of the third occurrence notification sound is different from the start, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of strangeness and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to make it.

In addition, while the output of the third generation notification sound was started according to the frame update timing when the red character icon is displayed (synchronously), the red character icon is deleted and the third generation notification sound is deleted. Since the frame update timing is different from the output stop, the output of the third generation notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing to erase the red character icon, which can improve the fun of the game. It will be possible.

(Example of effect of pattern action change pattern 01)
FIGS. 106 and 107 are diagrams showing an effect example when the display mode of the hold icon is changed to the red character icon (design action change pattern 01) while the effect symbol 70a is stopped (temporarily stopped).

As shown in FIG. 106 (a), in a state where the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B, the effect symbol 70a is varied and displayed. The production is being executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 105 (b), the effect symbol 70a of "2" in the left fluctuation display area, "3" in the right fluctuation display area, and "change" in the center fluctuation display area is stopped and displayed (provisional). An effect like a lightning bolt appears toward the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 of the first display unit 70B1 from the change symbol that is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the variable display area in the center (stop display). Upon hitting, the display mode of the first hold icon H11 changes from the CD icon to the red character icon, and the voice output device 9 outputs the third generation notification sound for 0.5 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (c), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first hold icon (red character icon) H11 of the first display unit 70B1 is shifted to the icon display area 70C. Will be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 107 (a), the effect symbol 70a of "2" is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed, and the central variable display area. A reach effect is executed in which the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed.

Then, when the SP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 107 (b), the production in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is started. When the SP reach is developed, the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 107 (c), the ally character C2 wins over the enemy character C3, suggesting that it is a big hit, and the combination indicating that the variable display effect symbol 70a is a big hit ( Here, the stop display is displayed at "222").

Then, as shown in FIG. 107 (d), the effect symbol 70a returns from the reduced display to the original size and is stopped and displayed at the center of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display). Here, since the variable display is completed, the icon (red character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 130m executes the change effect at the frame update timing according to the reception of a predetermined command (start opening winning designation command or variation pattern designation command). Since the effect control unit 130m may execute the change effect at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specification command, it is possible to improve the fun of the game by increasing the variation of the change effect. Become.

In the present embodiment, the icon change effect is designed to determine the final display mode and the scenario when the effect control unit 130m receives the start opening winning designation command, but the present invention is not limited to such a determination method. .. For example, it may be determined whether or not to change the display mode each time the display mode of the icon (the icon, the hold icon) can be changed. Further, when the effect control unit 130m receives the start opening winning designation command, only the final display mode is determined, and how it changes is the timing at which the display mode of the icon (the icon, the hold icon) can be changed. When it becomes, it may be decided each time.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the icon (the icon, the hold icon) is 4 as a CD icon as a normal icon, a blue character icon as a special icon, a red character icon, and a rainbow character icon. Although it was a kind, it is not limited to four kinds, and may be many or few.

For example, a special icon (blinking CD icon) may be provided, which has a lower expectation of winning a big hit than the blue character icon and may change to a special icon. When such a special icon is provided, since the jackpot winning expectation is lower than that of the blue character icon, the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (after receiving the change pattern designation command). It is desirable not to change to a special icon in the change effect) that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing. By doing so, the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command), which easily change to a display mode with a high expectation of winning a big hit. Since it will not change to a special icon due to the change effect that occurs in the above, it is possible to increase the variation of the icon display mode while preventing the player from being discouraged, and to improve the interest of the game. It will be possible.

Further, in addition to the four types of the present embodiment, the above special icon and the green character icon may be provided. In this case, the jackpot winning expectation for the icon (corresponding icon, hold icon) is (CD icon <) blinking CD icon <blue character icon <green character icon <red character icon <rainbow character icon in this order. You just have to make it higher.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the character C1 or the changed symbol is displayed in the character action change pattern 01 or the symbol action change pattern 01, the display mode of the icon (the icon, the hold icon) is always changed. However, there may be a case where the character C1 or the change symbol is not changed even if it is displayed (so-called ghost effect). When such a ghost effect is provided, the ghost effect for the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command) is provided. The execution rate is higher than that of the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command), or the normal change pattern 02 and the character action change. It is desirable that only the pattern 01 and the pattern action change pattern 01 (change effect generated at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command) can be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect is not executed a plurality of times during one variation effect, but may be executed a plurality of times. In this case, the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (the change effect that occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command) have only one timing during the change effect, so that the normal change is performed. The pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (change effect generated at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command) may be executed a plurality of times. By doing so, the display mode of the icon (the icon, the hold icon) may change a plurality of times in one variable effect, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution timing of the change effect (change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01) that occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command is determined by the predetermined command (starting port winning designation). The frame update timing was set to be 2 frames after the number of frames received (command or variable pattern specification command), but it is not limited to 2 frames, and if it is not extremely late after receiving the specified command, the number even after 1 frame. It may be after the frame.

Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol action change pattern 01 is not provided as the icon change pattern, but it may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the "normal change pattern 01" is executed, the change effect is executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the fluctuation pattern designation command, but the change effect is not limited to this timing, for example, special. The change effect may be executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the symbol memory designation command or the effect symbol specification command.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the "normal change pattern 02", the "character action change pattern 01", and the "design action change pattern 01" are executed, at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command. Although the change effect has been executed, the change effect is not limited to this timing, and the change effect may be executed at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving another predetermined command.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the icon (the icon, the hold icon) changes, an icon generation (change) notification sound is output as an effect of notifying that the icon (the icon, the hold icon) has changed. However, it is not limited to such an effect, and in addition to the output of the icon generation (change) notification sound, the changed icon (the icon, hold) is used by using the panel lighting device 74 and / or the frame lighting device 10. The lamp may be made to emit light in the same color as the color of the display mode of the icon). In this case, as with the output of the icon generation (change) notification sound, the frame update timing at which the changed icon (corresponding icon, hold icon) is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). At the same time (synchronously), the lamps of the panel lighting device 74 and / or the frame lighting device 10 may be started to emit light, and the timing of ending the light emission of the lamps is set to end after a lapse of a predetermined time. Alternatively, the icon (the icon, the hold icon) may be terminated at the frame update timing (synchronized) to be deleted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon and the hold icon are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), but are displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display). May be good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution of the icon change effect is not restricted depending on the game state, but the execution of the icon change effect may be restricted depending on the game state. For example, in the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect generated at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command) can be executed. However, the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (change effect generated at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command) may be infeasible. By doing so, since the fluctuation time is set short in the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state, the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the character action change pattern 01 executed during the fluctuation are set. By limiting the execution of the symbol action change pattern 01 (change effect generated at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command), the playability of the first specific game state and the second specific game state can be improved. It is possible to improve the fun of the game without damaging it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect changes the display mode (shape and color) of the hold icon and the icon itself, but the display is not limited to such a change, and the hold icon and the icon itself are displayed. The mode may not be changed (the CD icon remains), and an effect of a color indicating the jackpot winning expectation may be displayed around the hold icon or the icon, or around (near) the hold icon or the icon. A character indicating the degree of expectation of winning a big hit may be displayed, or a character image suggesting an effect to be executed may be displayed around (near) the hold icon or the icon (for example, "SP" or "pseudo-ren"). May be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the change scenario is determined, it is determined regardless of the winning of the jackpot, but it may be determined by referring to the winning of the jackpot. Specifically, one change scenario may be determined from a plurality of change scenarios based on the icon final display mode, the current number of holds, the winning of the jackpot, and the selection rate (%). ..

In this way, when deciding the change scenario by referring to the winning of the jackpot, if the jackpot is won and it changes to the red character icon, the current number of reservations is "1" or "2" rather than "1" or "2". In the case of "3" or "4", the selection rate (%) may be set so that the change scenario that changes to the red character icon at the time of winning is more likely to be selected.
In other words, if you win a big hit and change to a red character icon, the red character at the time of winning is better when the current number of holds is "1" or "2" than when it is "3" or "4". It can be said that the selection rate (%) makes it difficult to select a change scenario that changes to an icon.
Also, if you have not won the jackpot, that is, if you are lost and change to the red character icon, the change scenario that changes to the red character icon at the time of winning than if you won the jackpot and change to the red character icon. Can be set to a selection rate (%) that is difficult to select.

Further, in the present embodiment, when determining the hold icon change pattern, the decision is made regardless of the current number of holds and the winning of the jackpot, but the decision is made by referring to the current number of holdings and the winning of the jackpot. You may. Specifically, one hold icon from a plurality of hold icon change patterns based on the mode of the hold icon change in this variation effect, the current number of holds, the winning of the jackpot, and the selection rate (%). The change pattern may be determined.

In this way, when determining the hold icon change pattern by referring to the current number of holds and the winning of the jackpot, if the jackpot is won and the red character icon changes, the current number of holds is "1" or ". The selection rate (%) may be set so that "normal change pattern 01" is more easily selected as the hold icon change pattern in the case of "3" or "4" than in the case of "2".
In other words, if you win a jackpot and change to a red character icon, the hold icon change pattern is better when the current number of holds is "1" or "2" than when it is "3" or "4". It can be said that the selection rate (%) is difficult to select as “normal change pattern 01”.
In addition, if the jackpot is not won, that is, if the jackpot is lost and the icon changes to the red character icon, the "normal change pattern 01" is used as the hold icon change pattern rather than the case where the jackpot is won and the red character icon is changed. ] Can be set to a selection rate (%) that is difficult to select.

As described above, when the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect generated at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command) change to the red character icon, the current number of pending numbers is "1". "3" or "4" has a higher expectation of winning a big hit than "2", so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Fourth Embodiment)
Hereinafter, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. Here, the same parts as those of the third embodiment will be omitted, and different parts will be described.

In the fourth embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 109 (a), the special symbol TZ variablely displayed in the lower right corner of the display unit of the first image display device 70 in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol. It differs from the third embodiment in that a special symbol display area for displaying is provided.

Further, on the left end of the display unit of the first image display device 70, a first reserved number display area 70E for displaying a first reserved number indicating the current first special symbol reserved number (U1) and a current first reserved number display area 70E. 2 It is also different from the third embodiment in that a second reserved number display area 70F for displaying a second reserved number indicating the special symbol reserved number (U2) is provided.

The first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number displayed in the second hold number display area 70F correspond to the first hold information, and the first hold icon display area. The first hold icon displayed on the 70B and the second hold icon displayed on the second hold icon display area 70D correspond to the second hold information, and the icon displayed on the icon display area 70C is the execution information. Corresponds to.

(Specific example when variable production is started from waiting for customers)
A specific example when the variation effect is started from the customer waiting state will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 40. FIG. 108 is a timing chart in which the variation effect is started from the customer waiting state, and FIGS. 109 (a) to (f) and FIGS. 110 (g) to (k) are FIGS. 108 (a) to (k). It is a figure which shows the production example corresponding to.

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the 0th frame after the customer waiting state is started. At this timing, the subtraction of the waiting time (30 seconds) for starting the customer waiting demonstration effect is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 109 (a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. Further, "0" is displayed in the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number display area 70F, and the hold icon and the icon TH are not displayed.

The timing of T1 is the timing when the first special symbol hold number (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (fourth frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first hold number and the non-animation increase display of the first hold icon (completed in one frame) are performed, and the first generation notification sound which is the notification sound when the icon is generated is performed. Output starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 109 (b), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1". At the same time, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed in the normal size on the first display unit 70B1. Further, the first generation notification sound (picot) is output from the voice output device 9.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special symbol hold number (U1) decreases from "1" to "0" and the variation effect (variation display of the special symbol) by the normal variation pattern is started (start of the customer waiting state). 5th frame from). At this timing, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the reduction display of the first hold number by non-animation, and the change display (decrease display) of the first hold icon to the icon by animation are started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 109 (c), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0". At the same time, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 displayed on the first display unit 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the reduced display is started in a state where the effect symbol 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 10th frame after the output of the first generation notification sound is started (14th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the output of the first generation notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 109 (d), in the first image display device 70, the movement (shift) of the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 to the icon display area 70C is continued, and the effect is produced. The reduced display of the symbol 70a continues.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 20th frame after the start of the change display (decrease display) of the first hold icon (25th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the change display of the first hold icon ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 109 (e), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon H11 moved from the first display unit 70B1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C. At the same time as the icon TH, the reduced display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 40th frame after the start of the variation effect (45th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 109 (f), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the left variable display area, the central variable display is displayed. Scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the area is started.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 50th frame after the start of the variation effect (55th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110 (g), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the central variable display area, the right variable display is displayed. Scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the area is started, and the effect symbol 70a is scrolled in all the variable display areas.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 225th frame after the start of the variation effect (230th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110 (h), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "3" is temporarily stopped (becomes a swaying state) in the variable display area on the left side. The scrolling of the effect symbol 70a continues in the variable display area on the center and the right side.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 255th frame from the start of the variation effect (260th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110 (i), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped (becomes a swaying state) in the variable display area on the right side. The scrolling of the effect symbol 70a continues in the variable display area in the center.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 285th frame after the start of the variation effect (the 290th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110 (j), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "6" is temporarily stopped (in a swaying state) in the central variable display area, and is lost. The combination of the effect symbols 70a indicating that there is is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 300th frame after the start of the variation effect (the 305th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110 (k), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left middle right variable display area is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is produced. The stop display is made with the same combination "365" as the symbol 70a. Further, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

In this way, when the number of special symbol hold increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for customers, the increase display by non-animation of the hold number and hold icon is the shortest for one frame. Since it ends in a period (time), it is possible to immediately shift to a variable effect (decrease display of the hold number and change display of the hold icon) so as not to be delayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the occurrence notification sound output in synchronization with the start of the increase display of the hold number and the hold icon is until the timing (frame update) after the end of the increase display of the hold number and the hold icon (frame update). Since it continues, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of special symbols reserved has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of special symbol reservations is reduced (changes from "1" to "0"), the reduction display of the hold number by non-animation and the change display of the hold icon by animation to the icon are executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of special symbols reserved has decreased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the timing when the decrease display of the hold number is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing when the change display of the hold icon to the icon is completed (frame update), the special symbol is held. While producing a change in the number, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the number of special symbols held has decreased due to the reserved number, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect symbol does not scroll (it is not updated to the next effect symbol) until the change display of the hold icon to the icon is completed, and the effect symbol is completed at the timing when the change display of the hold icon is completed (frame update). Since scrolling (update to the next effect symbol) is started, it becomes easier to grasp the progress of the game that the variable effect is started after the hold memory is reduced, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, when the number of special symbol hold increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for customers, the increase display of the hold icon is not executed non-animated, but rather than the increase display of the hold number. The animation may be executed over a plurality of frames (for example, 5 frames) so as to continue for a long time. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the increase in the number of special symbol reservations, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, instead of starting the decrease display of the hold number and the change display (decrease display) of the hold icon to the icon at the same timing (frame update), the decrease display of the hold number is completed (frame update). If it is faster, you can start either one first. By doing so, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of special symbol reservations has decreased while improving the degree of freedom in display control, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, instead of starting scrolling of the effect symbol (update to the next effect symbol) at the timing when the change display of the hold icon is completed (frame update) (start is delayed than usual), the change display of the hold icon is displayed. The scrolling of the effect symbol (update to the next effect symbol) may be started shortly before the completion (frame update).

(Specific example when the number of holds increases during variable production)
A specific example will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 to 42 when the number of holdings increases during the variation effect. FIG. 111 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during the fluctuation effect, and FIGS. 112 (a) to 112 (c) are diagrams showing an example of the effect corresponding to FIGS. 111 (a) to (c).

First, the timing of T1 is the timing that is the 50th frame after the fluctuation effect by the normal fluctuation pattern is started. At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112 (a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are scrolled (moved downward). Further, "0" is displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F, and the icon (CD icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (60th frame from the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first hold number and the increase display by the animation of the first hold icon are started, and the output of the first generation notification sound which is the notification sound when the icon is generated is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112 (b), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1". At the same time, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 in an extremely small size, and the enlarged display is started. Further, the first generation notification sound (picot) is output from the voice output device 9.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 10th frame after the start of the increase display of the first hold icon (70th frame from the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the increase display of the first hold icon ends, and the output of the first generation notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112 (c), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 is completed and the normal size is used. Is displayed.

In this way, when the number of special symbol hold increases, the increase display by non-animation of the hold number and the increase display by the animation of the hold icon are executed, so that the player can tell that the number of special symbol hold has increased. It is possible to surely recognize the game and improve the fun of the game.

Also, since the timing when the increase display of the hold number is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing when the increase display of the hold icon is completed (frame update), the number of special symbol hold changes. While producing this, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the number of special symbols held has increased due to the holding numbers, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of special symbol reservations increases during the execution of the variable effect, the increase display of the hold icon is executed for a longer period than when the number of special symbol reservations increases while waiting for customers. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of special symbol reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the occurrence notification sound output in synchronization with the start of the increase display of the hold number and the hold icon ends in synchronization with the timing when the increase display of the hold icon ends (frame update), so that the number of special symbol hold is reduced. It is possible to effectively produce the increased number and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the period related to the increase display of the hold icon (10 frames) is shorter than the period related to the change display of the hold icon to the icon (20 frames), the variable effect is started. It can be emphasized and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

If the increase display of the hold number and the increase display of the hold icon are not started at the same timing (frame update), but the timing when the increase display of the hold number is completed (frame update) is earlier, whichever? May start first. By doing so, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of special symbol reservations has increased while improving the degree of freedom in display control, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the period related to the increase display of the hold icon may be longer than the period related to the change display of the hold icon to the icon, instead of shortening the period related to the increase display of the hold icon. By doing so, it is possible to emphasize that the number of special symbol reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, instead of shortening the period related to the increase display of the hold icon than the period related to the change display of the hold icon to the icon, both periods may be the same length.

(Specific example when the number of reservations increases immediately after the decrease)
A specific example of the case where the number of reservations increases immediately after the decrease will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 44. FIG. 113 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases immediately after the decrease, and FIGS. 114 (a) to 114 (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to FIGS. 113 (a) to (f).

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the fifth frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. At this timing, the stop display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 114 (a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbols 70a and the special symbol TZ of "4", "6", and "8" indicating the loss are stopped and displayed. ing. Further, "2" is displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F. Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1, the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2, and the icon TH is not displayed. It is in a state.

The timing of T1 is the timing at which the variation effect (variation display of the special symbol) by the normal variation pattern is started (20th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the reduction display of the first hold number by non-animation, the change display of the first hold icon by animation to the icon, and the reduction of the first hold icon by animation. The display starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 114 (b), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1". .. Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 displayed on the first display unit 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C, and is displayed on the second display unit 70B2. 1 The hold icon (CD icon) H12 starts moving (shifting) toward the first display unit 70B1. Further, the reduced display is started in a state where the effect symbol 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (30th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first hold number is started, but since the change display and decrease display of the first hold icon are being executed, the increase display of the first hold icon and the notification when the icon is generated are being executed. The output of the generation notification sound, which is a sound, will be on standby.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 114 (c), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". At the same time, the reduced display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 20th frame after the change display and the decrease display of the first hold icon are started (40th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the change display and the decrease display of the first hold icon end. In addition, the increase display by the animation of the first hold icon that has been waiting is started, and the output of the first generation notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 114 (d), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon H11 moved from the first display unit 70B1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C. Along with the icon TH, the first hold icon H12 moved from the second display unit 70B2 is located at the center of the first display unit 70B1, and the reduced display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped. Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H13 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2 in an extremely small size to start the enlarged display, and the output of the first generation notification sound (picot) from the voice output device 9 is started. To.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the fifth frame after the increase display of the first hold icon is started (the 45th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the increase display of the first hold icon and the output of the first generation notification sound continue.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 114 (e), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon (CD icon) H13 is displayed in a small size on the second display unit 70B2, and the enlarged display is continued. At the same time, the output of the first generated notification sound (picot) from the voice output device 9 continues. Further, scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the variable display area on the left side is started.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 10th frame after the increase display of the first hold icon is started (the 50th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the increase display of the first hold icon ends, and the output of the first generation notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 114 (f), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 is completed and the normal size is used. Is displayed. Further, scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the central variable display area is started.

In this way, if the number of special symbols held increases during the execution of the change display of the hold icon to the icon and the decrease display of the hold icon, the change display and the decrease display are completed (frame update). Since the increase display of the hold number is started even before the timing, the player can be made to recognize that the number of special symbol hold has increased even while the change display and the decrease display of the hold icon are being executed. , It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of special symbols held increases during the change display of the hold icon to the icon and the decrease display of the hold icon, the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are waited (restricted). When the change display and decrease display of the hold icon are completed (frame update), the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are started, so that it is difficult to grasp the transition of the number of special symbol hold. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of outputting the occurrence notification sound in synchronization with the increase display of the hold icon executed after the increase display of the hold number, the occurrence notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the hold number. May be good.

Also, at the timing when the change display and decrease display of the hold icon are completed (frame update), the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are not started (start is delayed than usual), but the change of the hold icon. The increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound may be started shortly before the display and decrease display are completed (frame update). By doing so, it is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to grasp the transition of the number of special symbols reserved, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of special symbols held increases during the increase display of the hold icon, the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are waited (restricted) as in the case of the change display or decrease display of the hold icon. On the other hand, the increase display of the hold number may be started, and the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound may be started at the timing when the increase display of the hold icon is completed (frame update).

(Specific example when the number of holds increases during a specific reach production)
With reference to FIGS. 115 to 46, a specific example when the number of reservations increases during the specific reach effect will be described. FIG. 115 is a timing chart in which the number of holds increases during the specific reach effect, and FIGS. 116 (a) to 116 (f) are diagrams showing an example of the effect corresponding to FIGS. 115 (a) to (f). ..

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the variation effect by the SP reach variation pattern is started. At this timing, the normal reach effect executed before the SP reach effect and the variable display of the special symbol TZ continue.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 116 (a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbols 70a of "7" are temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and the effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the central variable display area. The variable display of 70a continues. Further, "1" is displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F. Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1, and the icon (CD icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the 90th frame from the start of the normal reach effect (430th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development production for developing into the SP reach production is started.

Specifically, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "7" temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and the effect symbol 70a scrolling in the central variable display area move to the upper left of the screen. Start moving and reducing the display.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 15th frame after the start of the development effect (the 445th frame after the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the development production to develop into the SP reach production continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 116 (b), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "7" temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and the central variable display area are scrolled. The effect symbol 70a is displayed at a position near the upper left of the screen, and is displayed in a size smaller than the normal size.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 30th frame after the start of the development effect (the 460th frame after the start of the variation effect). At this timing, while the development production ends, the SP reach production starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 116 (c), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a in the left, middle, and right variable display areas is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left of the screen and in the center of the screen. The confrontation production in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is started. Further, the hold icon (here, the hold icon display area 70B, the second hold icon display area 70D) is displayed in the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D), leaving the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C. The first hold icon only) is hidden together with the hold icon display area. Further, the special symbol TZ is in the reach state with the same "7" symbol as the effect symbol 70a.

The timing of T5 is the timing when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 820th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first hold number is started, but since the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) is being executed, the increase display of the first hold icon and the icon generation at this timing are performed. The generation notification sound, which is the notification sound, is not output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 116 (d), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". At the same time, the final production of the confrontation production (decision production for notifying whether or not it is a big hit) is being executed.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 420th frame after the start of the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) (the 880th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result of the final production (decision production) of the confrontation production is derived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 116 (e), in the first image display device 70, the effect that the ally character C2 wins over the enemy character C3 is performed, and the effect symbol 70a that is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen is displayed. Temporarily stops (becomes a swaying state) with a combination (“777”) indicating that is a big hit.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 450th frame after the start of the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) (the 910th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) ends, and the return display and the increase display of the first hold icon by non-animation are performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 116 (f), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen is enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen and temporarily stopped (swayed state). become). Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is redisplayed on the first display unit 70B1, and the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2 in a normal size.

Finally, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left, middle, and right variable display areas is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination as the effect symbol 70a, "777". Further, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

In this way, if the number of special symbol hold increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the hold number will be changed even before the timing when the specific effect ends (frame update). Since the increase display is started, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

In addition, when the number of special symbol hold increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the execution of the increase display of the hold icon is waited (restricted), and the specific effect ends (reduced display). Since the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the loss effect symbol or the jackpot effect symbol is enlarged (displayed) (frame update), it is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to grasp the transition of the number of special symbol hold, and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to make it.

In addition, when the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) is completed, the increase display of the hold icon by non-animation completed in one frame is performed, so that the timing when the number of special symbol hold increases. Even if there is an extreme difference between the timing of executing the increase display of the hold icon and the hold icon, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) ends, the generation notification sound is not output, so the number of special symbol hold increases at the timing when the specific effect ends due to the generation notification sound. It becomes difficult to misunderstand that it was done, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Even if the number of special symbols held increases more than once during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the increase display of the hold number is executed while the increase display of the hold icon is waited (restricted). However, it is advisable to collectively execute the increase display of the hold icon by the amount increased at the timing when the specific effect is completed (frame update) in one frame.

In addition, when the number of special symbol hold increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the generation notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the hold number instead of not outputting the generation notification sound. May be good.

Further, although the SP reach effect is exemplified as the specific effect, the SPSP reach effect may be included in the specific effect, or the full rotation reach effect may be included in the specific effect.

(Specific example when the number of holds increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific game state)
A specific example when the number of holdings increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 49. 117 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases / decreases before and after the end of the specific gaming state, and FIGS. 118 (a) to 118 (f) and FIGS. 119 (g) to 119 (i) are FIGS. 117 (a) to (i). It is a figure which shows the production example corresponding to i).

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the last (100th) variation effect in the specific gaming state is started. At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118 (a), "1" is displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, and "4" is displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F. Further, the first hold icon display area 70B is erased, and the second hold icons (CD icons) H21 to H24 are displayed on the first display units 70D1 to the fourth display units 70D4 of the second hold icon display area 70D, respectively. The icon TH is displayed. Further, the number of variable effects that can be executed in the specific game state (here, "0 remaining times") is displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the game ball is displayed at the upper right of the screen toward the right area of the game area 5a. A right-handed image MU prompting to fire is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 415th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the increase display of the first hold number by non-animation is started, but since the first hold icon display area 70B is erased, it is an increase display of the first hold icon and a notification sound when the icon is generated. The generation notification sound will not be output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118 (b), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". At the same time, the scrolling of the effect symbol 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 430th frame after the start of the variation effect. At this timing, the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed in the variable display area on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped at the same time.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118 (c), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "285" is temporarily stopped (in a swaying state) in the variable display area on the left, middle, and right. The combination of the effect symbols 70a indicating that the image is lost is displayed.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 15th frame after the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped (the 445th frame after the variation effect is started). At this timing, a result display showing the result of the game during a predetermined advantageous period (while the jackpot game and the specific game state continue) is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118 (d), in the first image display device 70, the background image HG is darkened, and during the “special time end” indicating the end of the specific gaming state and the predetermined advantageous period. The number of big hit games executed The characters "big hit x 1" are displayed. In addition, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 15th frame after the start of the result display (the 460th frame after the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the result display continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118 (e), in the first image display device 70, the characters "TOTAL 1200pt" indicating the number of game balls acquired (paid out) during a predetermined advantageous period are displayed. It is additionally displayed.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 30th frame after the start of the result display (the 475th frame from the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118 (f), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped at the upper left of the screen moves to the center of the screen to stop and display, and the special symbol TZ is displayed. The stop display is made with the same combination "285" as the effect symbol 70a. Further, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

The timing of T7 is the timing (490th frame from the start of the variation effect) when the last (100th) variation effect in the specific gaming state ends and the first variation effect in the normal game state starts. At this timing, variable display of the effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, reduction display of the second hold number by non-animation, change display of the second hold icon by animation to the icon, reduction display by animation of the second hold icon, The non-animated return display of the first hold icon and the non-animated increase display of the first hold icon are started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 119 (g), in the first image display device 70, the second reserved number displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F changes from "4" to "3". At the same time, the second hold icon (CD icon) H21 displayed on the first display unit 70D1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C, and the second display unit 70D2 to the fourth display unit 70D4. The second hold icon (CD icon) H22 to H24 displayed on the screen starts moving (shifting) toward the adjacent display unit.

Further, the first hold icon display area is restored, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is returned and displayed on the first display unit 70B1, and the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2. It is displayed in normal size. Further, the reduced display is started in a state where the effect symbol 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling. Further, in the upper left of the screen, a left-handed image HU urging the player to launch the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a is displayed.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 20th frame after the start of the change display and the decrease display of the second hold icon (510th frame from the start of the previous variation effect). At this timing, the change display and the decrease display of the second hold icon end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 119 (h), in the first image display device 70, the second hold icon H21 moved from the first display unit 70D1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C. At the same time as the icon TH, the second hold icons H22 to H24 moved from the second display unit 70D2 to the fourth display unit 70D4 are located at the center of the adjacent display unit, and the reduced display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 10th frame after the change display and the decrease display of the second hold icon are completed (520th frame from the start of the previous variation effect). At this timing, scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 119 (i), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling of the effect symbol 70a in the left variable display area, the effect symbol 70a in the central variable display area Scrolling (moving downward) is started.

In this way, when the first special symbol hold number (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increase display of the first hold icon is waited (restricted), while the increase display of the first hold number is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the number of special symbol reservations has increased even during the execution of the specific effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of first special symbol hold (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increase display of the first hold icon is performed at the timing when the specific game state (last variation effect in) ends (frame update). Therefore, even if the increase display of the first reserved number executed before that is overlooked, it is possible to recognize that the number of the first special symbol reserved has increased, and the interest of the game is improved. It becomes possible.

In addition, when the increase display of the first hold icon is started at the timing when the specific game state (the last variation effect in) ends, the increase display of the hold icon by non-animation completed in one frame is performed, so that the special symbol is held. Even if there is an extreme difference between the timing when the number increases and the timing when the increase display of the hold icon is executed, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the specific game state (the last fluctuation effect in) ends, the generation notification sound is not output, so the special symbol is displayed at the timing when the generation notification sound ends the specific game state. It becomes difficult to misunderstand that the number of holdings has increased, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect symbol does not scroll (it is not updated to the next effect symbol) until the change display of the hold icon to the icon is completed, and the effect symbol is completed at the timing when the change display of the hold icon is completed (frame update). Since scrolling (update to the next effect symbol) is started, it becomes easier to grasp the progress of the effect during the variable effect, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Even if the number of 1st special symbol hold increases by a plurality during the specific game state, while the hold number increase display is executed, the hold icon increase display is waited (restricted). It suffices to collectively execute the increase display of the hold icon by the amount increased at the timing when the specific game state (the last variation effect in) ends (frame update) in one frame.

Further, when the number of first special symbol reservations increases during the specific game state, the generation notification sound may be output in synchronization with the increase display of the reservation number instead of not outputting the generation notification sound.

In the present embodiment, the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are set (displayed) in the normal gaming state, but the second hold icon display area 70D is set (displayed). Instead, only the first hold icon display area 70B may be set (displayed).

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon display area 70C is set (displayed) regardless of whether or not a specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect) is executed during the variable effect. However, the icon may be hidden without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during the execution of the specific effect, or the icon display area 70C may not be set (displayed) during the execution of the specific effect. The icon may be hidden.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F are set (displayed) in the first image display device 70, but are set in the second image display device 71 (in this embodiment). It may be set (displayed) or set (displayed) on a dedicated display device (for example, 7-segment LED, dot matrix, dedicated LED, etc.) different from the image display device. Then, when setting to a dedicated LED, it is preferable to display the number of special symbol reservations according to the lighting color of the LED.

[Technical Features of the Present Invention]
The first configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) has a determination means (for example, a special symbol determination unit 234) for determining whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player when a predetermined start condition is satisfied. An effect control means (for example, an effect control unit 300) that controls an effect according to a determination by the determination means, a first mode (for example, a low-probability time-saving non-game state) and a second mode (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state). A game control means (for example, a game control unit 200) that can be controlled by , Left decorative symbol 41) and a plurality of symbols (for example, three decorative symbols 41) including a second symbol that can be displayed in the second area (for example, right decorative symbol 41) are displayed and controlled. In the variable display in which the plurality of symbols are changed, a part of the plurality of symbols (for example, the left and right decorative symbols 41) is displayed, and the other symbols (for example, the middle decorative symbol 41) are continuously changed. It is possible to perform a predetermined effect (for example, a reach effect), and when the predetermined effect is performed in the symbol display effect, the plurality of symbols (for example, three decorative symbols 41) are removed from the symbol (for example, the figure). The first symbol (for example, the left decorative symbol 41 of FIG. 37 (A-9)) and the second symbol (for example) that were temporarily stopped as the decorative symbol 41) at the edge of 37 (A-9) and temporarily stopped. For example, it is possible to perform a display effect in which at least one of the right decorative symbol 41) in FIG. 37 (A-9) approaches the other (for example, the approach display effect in FIG. 37 (A-10)), and the predetermined effect. When the detached symbol is temporarily stopped after, the second mode (for example, FIGS. 35 (B-1) to (B-4), 36 (B-5) to (B-8), and FIG. 37 (B)) B-9) to (B-12), the first mode (for example, FIGS. 35 (A-1) to (A-4), FIG. 36 (A-5) to (A-8) and the low-probability time-saving non-gaming state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol 41 of FIGS. 37 (A-9) to (A-11) is performed) is the display. It is characterized by being easy to produce.
With such a configuration, it is possible to switch whether or not to make the player pay attention to the out-of-order symbol according to the game state, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the effect using the decorative symbol. can.

◆ The second configuration that achieves the above objectives is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) has a determination means (for example, a special symbol determination unit 234) for determining whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player when a predetermined start condition is satisfied. The effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 300) for controlling the effect according to the determination by the determination means is provided, and the effect control means can be displayed on the display means in the first area based on the establishment of the start condition. Display control of a plurality of symbols (for example, three decorative symbols 41) including the first symbol (for example, the left decorative symbol 41) and the second symbol that can be displayed in the second area (for example, the right decorative symbol 41). In the variable display in which the symbol display effect is performed and the plurality of symbols are varied, a part of the plurality of symbols (for example, the left and right decorative symbols 41) is displayed, and another symbol (for example, the middle decorative symbol) is displayed. It is possible to perform a predetermined effect (for example, a reach effect) that continues the fluctuation of 41), and it is suggested that the special game is likely to be performed when the predetermined effect is performed in the symbol display effect. It is possible to perform a specific effect (for example, the SP reach effect of FIG. 43 (8)), and when the predetermined effect is performed, the plurality of symbols (for example, three decorative symbols 41) are removed from the symbol (for example, the figure). The first symbol (for example, the left decorative symbol 41 in FIG. 42 (5)) and the second symbol (for example, FIG. 42 (for example)) are temporarily stopped as the decorative symbol 41) at the center of 42 (5). It is possible to perform a display effect in which at least one of the right decorative symbols 41) of 5) approaches the other (for example, the approach display effect of FIG. 42 (6)), and the specific effect (for example, of FIG. 43 (8)). When the out-of-order symbol is temporarily stopped after the predetermined effect by not performing the specific effect rather than performing the SP reach effect), the display effect (for example, the approach display effect of FIG. 42 (6)) is performed. It is characterized by being easy to do.
With such a configuration, it is possible to switch whether or not to perform an effect that focuses the player on the out-of-order symbol depending on whether or not a specific effect is performed. Can be improved.

◆ The third configuration that achieves the above objectives is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) has a determination means (for example, a special symbol determination unit 234) that determines the gaming state when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and an effect according to the determination by the determination means. A game control means that can control the effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 300), and a first mode (for example, a low-probability time-saving non-game state) and a second mode (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state). (For example, a game control unit 200), and the effect control means performs a symbol display effect of displaying and controlling a plurality of symbols (for example, three decorative symbols 41) on the display means based on the establishment of the start condition. In the variable display that fluctuates the plurality of symbols, a part of the plurality of symbols (for example, the left and right decorative symbols 41) is displayed, and the variation of the other symbols (for example, the middle decorative symbol 41) is displayed. It is possible to perform a continuous predetermined effect (for example, reach effect), and when the predetermined effect is performed, a specific identification element (for example, FIG. 36 (B-5)) that identifies the symbol among the partial symbols. 411) can be enlarged and displayed, and when the predetermined effect is performed, the first mode (for example, FIGS. 35 (A-1) to (A-4), FIG. 36 (A-5)) is performed. The second mode (for example, FIG. 35 (for example, a low-probability time-saving non-gaming state) in which the variation display of the decorative symbols 41 of FIGS. 37 (A-9) to (A-11) is performed) is performed. The height at which the decorative symbols 41 of B-1) to (B-4), FIGS. 36 (B-5) to (B-8), and FIGS. 37 (B-9) to (B-12) are variablely displayed. (Probability time saving game state) is characterized in that it is easier to magnify and display the specific identification element after the start of the predetermined effect.
With such a configuration, the effect of focusing on the effect image other than the specific identification element in the symbol and the effect of impressing the player which symbol is aligned and the predetermined effect is performed are put into the gaming state. Since it can be switched according to the situation, it is possible to improve the interest in the production using the decorative pattern.

◆ The fourth configuration that achieves the above objectives is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) determines whether or not to perform a special game based on the acquisition means (for example, the random number acquisition unit 231) that acquires the determination information when the start condition is satisfied and the determination information. A determination means for determining (for example, a special symbol determination unit 234) and an effect control means for displaying a plurality of the effect symbols in a visible manner when the effect symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the result of the determination is notified. For example, the effect control unit 300) is provided, and the effect symbol has an identification character (for example, a number element 411) and a decorative character corresponding to the identification character (for example, a character element 413) when the variable display is started. A first display mode having the above (for example, the decorative symbol 41 in FIG. 58 (1)) and a second display mode mainly composed of the identification character when the variable display is started (for example, FIG. 41), and the second display mode is a first mode (for example, the decorative symbol 41 in FIG. 62-1 (1)) and a second mode (for example, FIG. 64) in which the display modes are different from each other. The time for displaying a plurality of the effect symbols in a visually recognizable manner in the case of using the first aspect with the decorative symbol 41) of (1) than in the case of using the second aspect. It is a gaming machine characterized by its long length.
Further, this gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) has an acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition unit 231) that acquires determination information when a start condition is satisfied, and whether or not to perform a special game based on the determination information. When the determination means (for example, the special symbol determination unit 234) for determining whether or not the effect symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the result of the determination is notified, the effect control for displaying the plurality of the effect symbols in a visually recognizable manner. A means (for example, an effect control unit 300) is provided, and the effect symbol has an identification character (for example, a number element 411) and a decorative property (for example, a character element) corresponding to the identification character when the variable display is started. A first display mode having 413) (for example, the decorative symbol 41 in FIG. 58 (1)) and a second display mode mainly composed of the identification character when the variable display is started (for example, FIG. 62-1). The second display mode is the first mode (for example, the decorative symbol 41 in FIG. 62-1 (1)) and the second mode in which the arrangement of the symbols is different from each other. (For example, in the case of having the decorative symbol 41 of FIG. 64 (1)) and using the first aspect, the plurality of the effect symbols can be visually recognized as compared with the case of using the second aspect. It is characterized in that the time for displaying them in a aligned manner (for example, the time for temporarily stopping) is long.

◆ The fifth configuration that achieves the above objectives is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) determines whether or not to perform a special game based on the acquisition means (for example, the random number acquisition unit 231) that acquires the determination information when the start condition is satisfied and the determination information. A determination means for determining (for example, a special symbol determination unit 234) and an effect control means for displaying a plurality of the effect symbols in a visible manner when the effect symbol is displayed in a variable manner to notify the result of the determination. For example, the effect control unit 300) is provided, and the effect control means can execute a special effect (for example, a reach fanning effect) for inciting whether or not the effect symbol becomes reach. The decoration of the first display mode (for example, FIG. 58 (1)) having the identification character (for example, the number element 411) and the decorativeness corresponding to the identification character (for example, the character element 413) when the variable display is started. It has a symbol 41) and a second display mode (for example, the decorative symbol 41 of FIG. 61 (1)) mainly composed of the identification character when the variable display is started, and the second display mode is mutual. It has a first aspect (for example, the decorative symbol 41 of FIG. 65-1 (1)) and a second aspect (for example, the decorative symbol 41 of FIG. 61 (1)) having different display modes, and the first aspect is used. The ratio of executing the special effect differs between the variable effect and the variable effect using the second aspect, and the probability of performing a special game in the variation in which the effect symbol executes reach after the special effect is executed is the above-mentioned probability. It is characterized in that the variation effect using the second aspect is higher than the variation effect using the first aspect.
Further, this gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) has an acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition unit 231) that acquires determination information when a start condition is satisfied, and whether or not to perform a special game based on the determination information. When the determination means (for example, the special symbol determination unit 234) for determining whether or not the effect symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the result of the determination is notified, the effect control for displaying the plurality of the effect symbols in a visually recognizable manner. A means (for example, an effect control unit 300) is provided, and the effect control means can execute a special effect (for example, a reach fanning effect) for inciting whether or not the effect symbol becomes reach, and the effect symbol can be executed. Is a first display mode (for example, FIG. 58 (1)) having an identification character (for example, a number element 411) and a decorative property (for example, a character element 413) corresponding to the identification character when the variable display is started. 41) and a second display mode (for example, the decorative symbol 41 in FIG. 61 (1)) mainly composed of the identification character when the variable display is started, and the second display mode is The arrangement of the symbols has a first aspect (for example, the decorative symbol 41 of FIG. 65-1 (1)) and a second aspect (for example, the decorative symbol 41 of FIG. 61 (1)) in which the arrangement of the symbols is different from each other. The ratio of executing the special effect is different between the variable effect using the first aspect and the variable effect using the second aspect, and the special game in the variation in which the effect symbol executes the reach after the special effect is executed is performed. The probability of performing the variation effect is higher in the variation effect using the second aspect than in the variation effect using the first aspect.

◆ The sixth configuration that achieves the above objectives is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) determines whether or not to perform a special game based on the acquisition means (for example, the random number acquisition unit 231) that acquires the determination information when the start condition is satisfied and the determination information. A determination means for determining (for example, a special symbol determination unit 234) and an effect control means for displaying a plurality of the effect symbols in a visible manner when the effect symbol is displayed in a variable manner to notify the result of the determination. For example, the effect control unit 300) is provided, and the effect control means can execute a predetermined change effect (for example, a reach time design effect) when the effect symbol reaches reach. The first display mode (for example, FIG. 58 (1)) having an identification character (for example, a number element 411) and a decorative character (for example, a character element 413) corresponding to the identification character when the variable display is started. The decorative symbol 41) has a second display mode (for example, the decorative symbol 41 of FIG. 61 (1)) mainly composed of the identification character when the variable display is started, and the second display mode is. The first display mode has a first mode (for example, the decorative symbol 41 in FIG. 65-1 (1)) and a second mode (for example, the decorative symbol 41 in FIG. 61 (1)) whose display modes are different from each other. Is characterized in that it is easier to execute the predetermined change effect than the second aspect.
Further, this gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) has an acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition unit 231) that acquires determination information when a start condition is satisfied, and whether or not to perform a special game based on the determination information. When the determination means (for example, the special symbol determination unit 234) for determining whether or not the effect symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the result of the determination is notified, the effect control for displaying the plurality of the effect symbols in a visually recognizable manner. The effect control means includes means (for example, an effect control unit 300), and the effect control means can execute a predetermined change effect (for example, a reach time design effect) when the effect symbol reaches reach. The design has a first display mode (for example, FIG. 58 (1)) having an identification character (for example, a number element 411) and a decorative property (for example, a character element 413) corresponding to the identification character when the variable display is started. 41) and a second display mode (for example, the decorative symbol 41 in FIG. 61 (1)) mainly composed of the identification character when the variable display is started. Has a first aspect (for example, the decorative symbol 41 of FIG. 65-1 (1)) and a second aspect (for example, the decorative symbol 41 of FIG. 61 (1)) in which the arrangement of the symbols is different from each other. The first display mode is characterized in that it is easier to execute the predetermined change effect than the second mode.

◇ The seventh configuration that achieves the above objectives is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) determines whether or not to perform a special game based on the acquisition means (for example, the random number acquisition unit 231) that acquires the determination information when the start condition is satisfied and the determination information. A determination means for determining (for example, a special symbol determination unit 234) and an effect control means for displaying a plurality of the effect symbols in a visible manner when the effect symbol is variedly displayed and the result of the determination is notified. For example, the effect control unit 300) is provided, and the effect symbol is displayed in the same gaming state (for example, a low-probability time-saving non-game state) as an identification character (for example, when the variation display is started. For example, the first display mode (for example, the decorative symbol 41 in FIG. 58 (1)) having the decorativeness (for example, the character element 413) corresponding to the identification character and the numerical element 411) and the variable display are started. Occasionally, it has a second display mode (for example, the decorative symbol 41 in FIG. 62-1 (1)) mainly composed of the identification character, and the case where the second display mode is used and the case where the first display mode is used are used. It is characterized in that the time for displaying the plurality of effect symbols in a visually recognizable manner differs depending on the case.

◆ The eighth configuration that achieves the above objectives is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) determines whether or not to perform a special game based on the acquisition means (for example, the random number acquisition unit 231) for acquiring the determination information when the start condition is satisfied and the determination information. A determination means for determining (for example, a special symbol determination unit 234) and an effect control means (for example, when displaying the effect symbols in a variable manner to notify the result of the determination, a plurality of the effect symbols are aligned and displayed in a visible manner). For example, the effect control unit 300) is provided, and the effect symbol has an identification character (for example, a numerical element 411) and a decorative character corresponding to the identification character (for example, a character element 413) when the variable display is started. The first display mode (for example, the decorative symbol 41 of FIG. 67 (1)) having the above and the second display mode (for example, FIG. 67 (6)) mainly composed of the identification character when the variable display is started. The second display mode has a decorative pattern 41), and the second display mode is a first mode (for example, the decorative symbol 41 in FIG. 67 (6)) and a second mode (for example, FIG. 68-2 (10)) in which the display modes are different from each other. ), And when the variation effect using the first aspect is started, the suggestion effect suggesting that the variation effect using the first aspect is started (for example, the introduction image 94). And the display of the probability variation mode end image 99), and the suggestion effect (for example, display of the introduced image 94) when the variation effect using the first display mode is switched to the variation effect using the first aspect. It is characterized in that the expectation is higher than the suggestion effect (for example, display of the probability variation mode end image 99) in the case of switching from the variation effect using the second aspect to the variation effect using the first aspect. ..
Further, this gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) has an acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition unit 231) that acquires determination information when a start condition is satisfied, and whether or not to perform a special game based on the determination information. When the determination means (for example, the special symbol determination unit 234) for determining whether or not the effect symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the result of the determination is notified, the effect control for displaying the plurality of the effect symbols in a visually recognizable manner. A means (for example, an effect control unit 300) is provided, and the effect symbol has an identification character (for example, a numerical element 411) and a decorative character (for example, a character element) corresponding to the identification character when the variable display is started. A first display mode having 413) (for example, the decorative symbol 41 in FIG. 67 (1)) and a second display mode mainly composed of the identification character when the variable display is started (for example, FIG. 67 (6)). 41), and the second display mode is a first mode (for example, the decorative symbol 41 in FIG. 67 (6)) and a second mode (for example, a diagram) in which the arrangement of the respective symbols is different from each other. 68-2 (10) Decorative pattern 41), suggestive effect suggesting that when the variation effect using the first aspect is started, the variation effect using the first aspect is started ( For example, the display of the introduction image 94 and the probability variation mode end image 99) can be executed, and the suggestion effect (for example, the introduction image) in the case of switching from the variation effect using the first display mode to the variation effect using the first aspect. The display of 94) has a higher degree of expectation than the suggestion effect (for example, the display of the probability variation mode end image 99) when the variation effect using the second aspect is switched to the variation effect using the first aspect. It is characterized by that.

◆ The ninth configuration that achieves the above objectives is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) determines whether or not to perform a special game based on the acquisition means (for example, the random number acquisition unit 231) that acquires the determination information when the start condition is satisfied and the determination information. A determination means for determining (for example, a special symbol determination unit 234) and an effect control means for displaying a plurality of the effect symbols in a visible manner when the effect symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the result of the determination is notified. For example, the effect control unit 300) is provided, and the effect control means can execute a special effect (for example, a reach fanning effect) for inciting whether or not the effect symbol becomes reach, and the first gaming state (for example, a reach instinct effect) can be executed. For example, the ratio of executing the special effect in a second gaming state (for example, a high-probability time-saving gaming state), which is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state). However, the probability of performing a special game in a variation in which the effect symbol executes reach after the special effect is executed is characterized in that the probability of performing the special game in the second game state is higher than that in the first game state.

◆ The tenth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) determines whether or not to perform a special game based on the acquisition means (for example, the random number acquisition unit 231) that acquires the determination information when the start condition is satisfied and the determination information. A determination means for determining (for example, a special symbol determination unit 234) and an effect control means for displaying a plurality of the effect symbols in a visible manner when the effect symbol is variedly displayed and the result of the determination is notified. For example, the effect control unit 300) is provided, and the effect control means can execute a predetermined change effect (for example, a reach time design effect) when the effect symbol reaches reach. As a display mode displayed in the same gaming state (for example, low-probability time-saving non-gaming state), the identification character (for example, the number element 411) and the decorativeness corresponding to the identification character (for example, the number element 411) when the variable display is started (for example, the decorativeness corresponding to the identification character). For example, a first display mode having the character element 413) (for example, the decorative symbol 41 in FIG. 59-1 (1)) and a second display mode mainly composed of the identification character when the variable display is started (for example, the decorative symbol 41 in FIG. 59-1 (1)). For example, it is easier to execute the predetermined change effect in the case of having the decorative symbol 41) of FIG. 61 (1) and using the first display mode than in the case of using the second display mode. It is characterized by.

41 ... Decorative design (an example of a design)
100 ... Pachinko gaming machine (an example of a gaming machine)
114 ... Image display unit (example of display means)
200 ... Game control unit (an example of game control means)
231 ... Random number acquisition unit (example of acquisition means)
233 ... Special symbol fluctuation control unit (an example of symbol control means)
234 ... Special symbol determination unit (an example of determination means)
300 ... Production control unit (an example of production control means)
310 ... Image / acoustic control unit (an example of effect control means)

Claims (1)

Acquisition means for acquiring judgment information when the start condition is satisfied, and
A determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game based on the determination information,
A storage means that can store the determination information as a hold storage,
When the effect symbol is variedly displayed and the result of the determination is notified, the effect control means for displaying a plurality of the effect symbols in a visually recognizable manner is provided.
The production design is
A first display mode having an identification character and a decorative portion having a decorative property corresponding to the identification character when starting the variable display, and a second display mainly containing the identification character when starting the variable display. Has an aspect and
The effect control means is
Fluctuation effect according to the result of the above judgment,
It is possible to execute a hold display that displays a number of icons according to the number of hold memories.
When using the second display mode,
It is possible to display a plurality of sets of the above-mentioned effect symbols.
When the reach effect is not executed in any of the plurality of sets, it is possible to make the timing of aligning the plurality of the effect symbols in a visible manner different in each of the plurality of sets.
The time for displaying a plurality of the effect symbols in a visually recognizable manner without revariating differs between the case where the second display mode is used and the case where the first display mode is used.
When the icon is increased and displayed, a predetermined notification sound can be output.
When the icon is increased by one while the customer is waiting for the variable effect to be performed, the output period of the predetermined notification sound is longer than the increased display period of the icon. ..

Images